Get CONTROLS Guide for BMW X5 SUV 2024

Vehicle cockpit

CONTROLS

Vehicle cockpit

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Vehicle equipment

For further information:

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Around the steering wheel

1

Safety switch for windows and

roller sunblinds 104

To unlock

To lock

2

Window lifters 102

5

Seat comfort functions

3

4

Exterior mirror operation 122

Central locking system 96

36

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Vehicle cockpit

CONTROLS

Front passenger seat functionality

112

Displaying the menu bar in the in-

strument cluster 156

Memory function 124

Volume, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment,

Communication 6

Massage function 109

Voice control system 59

6

7

Opening and closing luggage

compartment 87

Selecting the menu contents in

the instrument cluster 156

To change the station/music

track, see the Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment,

Communication 6

Steering column lever, left

Turn indicator 151

Telephone, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Enter-

tainment, Communication 6

High-beam headlight, headlight

flasher 151

High-beam Assistant 182

Knurled wheel for selecting con-

figuration menus for instrument

cluster and head-up display 156

Trip data 171

Operating the infotainment selec-

tion lists in the instrument cluster

167

8

9

Shift paddles

Buttons on steering wheel, left

Switch Cruise Control Systems

12 Steering column lever, right

Windscreen wipers 151

on/off 235

Rain sensor 152

Select Cruise Control System 235

To clean the windscreen 153

Rear wiper 154

To store a speed 235

Continue Cruise Control Systems

with the saved setting.

To clean the rear window 154

Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.

To set the speed 235

13

Horn, entire area

10 Instrument cluster 156

11 Buttons on steering wheel, right

37

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Vehicle cockpit

CONTROLS

14

To adjust the steering wheel 124

Exterior lights menu 53

High-beam Assistant 182

Automatic lights 178

15 Fold-down compartment 323

16 Lights

Low-beam headlight 179

Adaptive lighting functions 181

Rear fog light 184

17

To unlock the bonnet 390

Around the centre console

1

Control display 54

Ventilation 308

Rear window heating 307

2

3

Hazard warning lights 412

Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-

tion 6

Climate control 300

Defrost function 306

Adjusting the volume

38

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Vehicle cockpit

CONTROLS

Station/track forward

Station/track back

ECO PRO drive mode

Hill Descent Control 229

4

5

6

Button for glove compartment 322

Controller with buttons 56

9

Switching drive-ready state on/off

138

Two-axle ride level control 294.

10

Automatic Start/Stop function

138

xOffroad package 297

Parking assistance systems 263

7

Parking brake 147

Dynamic Stability Control 226

Automatic Hold 149

11 Selector lever 141

8

Driving Experience Control 146

SPORT drive mode

COMFORT drive mode

39

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Vehicle cockpit

CONTROLS

Around the headliner

1

Emergency call, SOS 414

Glass sunroof 104

4

5

Reading lights 185

Interior lights 184

2

3

Depending on the national-mar-

ket version:

Front passenger airbag indicator

light 189

40

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Sensors in the vehicle

CONTROLS

Sensors in the vehicle

Vehicle equipment

Cameras

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Front camera

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Overview

The front camera is located in the radiator

grille.

Depending on the equipment, the following

cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-

cle:

▷

Front camera.

Camera behind the windscreen

Camera behind the windscreen.

Exterior mirror cameras.

Reversing Assist Camera.

Front radar sensor.

Side radar sensors, front.

Side radar sensors, rear.

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

The camera behind the windscreen is located

in the area of the interior mirror.

▷

Side ultrasonic sensors.

41

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Sensors in the vehicle

CONTROLS

▷

When the camera field of view is covered,

for example by a fogged up windscreen or

stickers.

Exterior mirror cameras

▷

If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.

With the exterior mirrors folded in.

With open doors or open luggage compart-

ment.

▷

In the case of bright oncoming light or

strong reflections, for example if the sun is

low in the sky.

An exterior mirror camera is located under

each exterior mirror housing.

▷

In the dark.

The camera has overheated due to exces-

sive temperatures and temporarily turned

off.

Reversing Assist Camera

▷

During the camera calibration process im-

mediately after vehicle delivery.

A Check Control message may be displayed if

the system limits are reached.

Radar sensors

Safety information

WARNING

The Reversing Assist Camera is located in the

handle strip on the rear.

Due to external influences, e.g. interference,

the radar sensors of the vehicle and thus also

the driving assistance systems can be distur-

bed. There is a risk of accident. Observe the

traffic situation, be ready to take over steer-

ing and braking at any time, and actively in-

tervene if the situation warrants it.

Functional requirement of the

cameras

The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.

For further information:

▷

Washing the vehicle, see page 422.

Vehicle care, see page 423.

System limits of the cameras

The function of the cameras can be restricted

or may indicate something wrong, for example

in the following situations:

▷

In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.

On steep crests or dips or on tight bends.

42

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Sensors in the vehicle

CONTROLS

Front radar sensor

Functional requirement of the radar

sensors

The areas of the radar sensors are clean and

clear.

For further information:

▷

Washing the vehicle, see page 422.

Vehicle care, see page 423.

System limits of the radar sensors

The function of the radar sensors can be re-

stricted or not available, for example in the

following situations:

The front radar sensor is located in the front

bumper.

▷

If the sensors are contaminated.

In case of iced up sensors.

Side radar sensors, front

If the sensors are obscured, for example by

stickers, foils or a number plate carrier.

▷

If the sensors are misaligned, for example

due to parking damage.

If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-

ered, for example by protruding loads.

When the field of view of the sensors is cov-

ered, for example by garage walls, hedges,

snow hills, vehicles or trailers.

The radar sensors are located on the side of

the front bumper.

▷

After work performed incorrectly on the ve-

hicle paintwork near to the sensors.

At steep crests or hollows of hills.

Side radar sensors, rear

A Check Control message may be displayed if

the system limits are reached.

The radar sensors are located in the rear

bumper.

43

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Sensors in the vehicle

CONTROLS

Functional requirement of the

ultrasonic sensors

Ultrasonic sensors

The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean

and clear.

Ultrasonic sensors, front

For further information:

▷

Washing the vehicle, see page 422.

Vehicle care, see page 423.

System limits of the ultrasonic

sensors

The physical limits of ultrasound measurement

may be reached when detecting objects in sit-

uations involving the following, for example:

The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-

tance systems are located in the front bumper.

▷

If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g. by

stickers.

Ultrasonic sensors, rear

If the sensors are misaligned, for example

due to parking damage.

After work performed incorrectly on the ve-

hicle paintwork near to the sensors.

▷

Small children and animals.

Persons wearing certain types of clothing,

for example a jacket.

▷

Obstacles and people at the edge of the

driving lane.

If there is external interference with the ul-

trasonic sound, for example by passing ve-

hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic

sources.

The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-

tance systems are located in the rear bumper.

Side ultrasonic sensors

▷

Certain weather conditions; for example,

high air humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,

cold, extreme heat or strong wind.

For trailer towbars and tow hitches of other

vehicles.

▷

Thin or wedge-shaped objects.

Moving objects.

Higher protruding objects, for example pro-

jecting walls.

▷

Objects with corners, edges and smooth

surfaces.

The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-

tance systems are located on the side in the

front and rear bumpers.

44

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Sensors in the vehicle

CONTROLS

▷

For objects with fine surfaces or structures,

e.g. wire mesh fences.

▷

Objects with porous surfaces.

Small and low objects such as boxes.

Low objects already displayed, for exam-

ple, kerbs, can be outside of the detection

ranges of the sensors.

▷

Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam

material.

▷

Plants or shrubs.

In washing bays and car washes.

In the event of bumps, for example speed

bumps.

▷

In the presence of dense exhaust fumes.

The ultrasonic sensors do not take into ac-

count loads projecting beyond the outline of

the vehicle.

▷

If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor-

rectly seated.

A Check Control message may be displayed if

the system limits are reached.

45

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Vehicle operating condition

CONTROLS

Vehicle operating condition

Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-

cle is secured against rolling away:

Vehicle equipment

▷

Apply the parking brake.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Turn the front wheels towards the kerb

on uphill or downhill gradient.

▷

Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill

or downhill gradient, for example with a

chock.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

WARNING

General

Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle

can set the vehicle in motion and endanger

themselves or other road users, for example

by the following actions:

Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in

one of the three states:

▷

Rest state.

▷

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Standby state.

Drive-ready state.

Opening and closing doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Operating vehicle equipment.

Rest state

There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-

hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-

cle key with you and lock the vehicle.

Principle

If the vehicle is in rest state, it is switched off.

General

Establishing the rest state

automatically

The rest state is established automatically, for

example in the following situations:

The vehicle is in rest state before you open it

from outside and once you have left the vehicle

and locked it.

Safety information

▷

After a few minutes, if no operation is per-

formed on the vehicle.

WARNING

When the vehicle battery state of charge is

low.

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and

roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before

leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

Depending on the iDrive setting: one or

both of the front doors is opened when

leaving the vehicle after a journey.

46

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Vehicle operating condition

CONTROLS

In some situations, for example during a tele-

phone call or when the low-beam headlight is

switched on, the vehicle will not switch auto-

matically to rest state.

Establishing rest state on opening

the front doors

After a trip, the rest state can be established

by opening the front doors. For this purpose,

all passengers must exit the vehicle.

Press the button on the luggage compartment

to access the vehicle in deep sleep mode.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Deactivating deep sleep mode

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

▷

Switch off the function on the control dis-

play.

5. "Turn off after opening door"

▷

Drive the vehicle.

Establishing the rest state manually

To establish rest state in the vehicle at the end

of the journey:

Standby state

Principle

Press and hold the button on

the radio until the OFF display

on the instrument cluster turns

off.

When standby state is activated, most func-

tions can be operated while the vehicle is still

stationary. Any desired settings can be per-

formed.

General

Deep sleep mode

The vehicle switches to standby state after the

front doors are opened from the outside.

Principle

Use the deep sleep mode to prevent discharg-

ing of the vehicle battery if the vehicle is not

used for a period of several weeks.

Manually establishing standby state

General

In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are

reduced to the essentials.

The standby state can be switched on again

after the rest state has been automatically es-

tablished.

Activating deep sleep mode

1.

Apps menu

With button on the radio

2. "Vehicle apps"

Press the button on the radio.

The control display and instru-

ment cluster illuminate.

3. "System settings"

4. "Deep sleep mode"

5. Select the desired setting.

47

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Vehicle operating condition

CONTROLS

With the Start/Stop button

WARNING

Press the Start/Stop button. The

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and

roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before

leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

control display and instrument

cluster illuminate.

Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-

cle is secured against rolling away:

Display in the instrument cluster

▷

Apply the parking brake.

OFF is shown in the instru-

ment cluster. The drivetrain is

switched off and standby state

switched on.

Turn the front wheels towards the kerb

on uphill or downhill gradient.

▷

Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill

or downhill gradient, for example with a

chock.

Drive-ready state

NOTICE

Principle

Repeated attempts to start the engine or

starting it several times in quick succession

can cause the starter to overheat. Fuel will

also be unburned or insufficiently burned,

which could cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. There is a risk of material damage.

Avoid repeated starting in quick succession.

Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to

starting the engine.

General

Some functions can only be operated when the

drive-ready state is switched on.

Safety information

Switching on drive-ready state

General

DANGER

Drive-ready state is switched on

using the Start/Stop button.

A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-

tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to

enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain

pollutants which are colourless and odour-

less. In enclosed spaces, exhaust fumes can

also build up outside the vehicle. There is a

danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe clear

and ensure sufficient ventilation.

Switching on drive-ready state

1. Press the brake.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Starting proceeds automatically for a short

time and stops as soon as the engine starts.

Most of the indicator and warning lights in

the instrument cluster illuminate for varying

lengths of time.

48

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Vehicle operating condition

CONTROLS

Petrol engine

Depending on the motorisation, full drive

power may not be available until approx.

30 seconds after the engine is started. In this

case, the vehicle will not accelerate in the usual

way.

For further information:

Power display, see page 168.

Diesel engine

With the engine cold and at temperatures be-

low 0 ℃, 32 ℉ the starting operation can be

delayed slightly due to automatic preheating.

A Check Control message is shown.

After the engine is started, full drive power may

not be available until the engine is at operating

temperature. Pay attention to the engine tem-

perature display and power display as applica-

ble. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate

in the usual way.

For further information:

▷

Engine temperature display, see page 169.

Power display, see page 168.

Display in the instrument cluster

The activated drive-ready state is indicated

in the instrument cluster, depending on the

equipment, by the display of information re-

quired for driving or the READY display.

Switching off drive-ready state

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage se-

lector lever position P.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off. The vehicle

changes to standby state.

49

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

Safety information

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

WARNING

Operating integrated information systems

and communication devices during a journey

may distract you from the traffic situation.

You could lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only operate the systems

or devices if the traffic situation allows you to

do so. Stop if necessary and operate the sys-

tems or devices with the vehicle at a stand-

still.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Display and operating

concept

Main menu

Principle

General

BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-

ating concept and includes a wide range of

functions.

The main menu is divided into different areas:

Overview

General

Depending on the equipment, the functions

can be operated as follows:

▷

Via the control display.

Via the Controller.

Via the touchpad.

Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.

Via gesture control.

Using the operating elements on the steer-

ing wheel.

1

Menu bar

2

3

4

Widgets

For further information:

Status information

Climate bar, climate 300

Instrument cluster, see page 156.

Menu bar

Apps menu

Access to apps and vehicle functions. A

filter can be selected. The last selected filter

50

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

is stored. If necessary, change the filter to see

the apps you want.

as buttons and allow jumping to the relevant

menu.

▷

"All apps": all apps and functions are dis-

played.

Status information

"Infotainment apps": only infotainment

apps are displayed.

General

The status field is located in the top area of the

control display. Status information is displayed

in the form of icons. Various symbols are avail-

able depending on vehicle equipment and na-

tional-market version.

"Vehicle apps": only functions for vehicle

setting are displayed.

Media menu

Access to functions of the entertainment

system, for example, radio stations or connec-

tion with external devices.

Telephone status information

Icon

Meaning

Communication menu

Active call.

Access to the telephone and message

function as well as the connection and man-

agement of mobile devices, for example,

smartphones.

Data transfer not possible.

Signal strength.

SIM card missing.

Navigation menu

Access to navigation system, destination

entry and traffic information. Configurable map

views as well as other functions, for example

points of interest.

Entertainment status information

Icon Meaning

USB audio.

Apple CarPlay© menu

Bluetooth audio.

Smartphone audio.

Connected Music with Spotify.

WiFi.

Depending on the national-market version

with connected function: access to Apple Car-

Play. Apple CarPlay allows certain functions of

a compatible Apple iPhone to be used securely

via iDrive.

Apple CarPlay.

Android Auto.

Android Auto© menu

Depending on the national-market version

with connected function: access to Android

Auto. Android Auto enables certain functions

of a compatible Android smartphone to be

used securely via iDrive.

Status information notifications

Icon Meaning

Number of messages.

Check Control message.

Traffic information.

Widgets

Widgets show real-time information and dy-

namic content, for example the map of the

navigation system. The widgets also serve

51

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Icon Meaning

Icon

Function

Suppress private information.

To confirm your digit input.

Do not disturb.

Notification.

Move the entry area to the left

or right.

Input comparison

For further information:

When entering data from a database, for ex-

ample contacts, the selection is gradually nar-

rowed down with each character entered and

supplemented if necessary.

Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain-

ment, Communication, see page 6.

Other status information

Activating/deactivating functions

Icon Meaning

Some menu items are preceded by an icon.

Selecting the menu item enables or disables

the function.

Sound output active.

Sound output deactivated.

Activation word active.

BMW ID or driver profile.

Route guidance active.

Call up quicklist.

Icon

Meaning

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Activating/deactivating audio

confirmation

Wireless charging active.

Park Distance Control: sound activated.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Park Distance Control: sound deactiva-

ted.

3. "System settings"

4. "Sound"

5. Select the desired setting.

Digit input and display

Quick access

Letters and numbers

The quicklist provides access to the shortcuts,

certain settings and app recommendations.

Letters and numbers can be entered using

the controller, the touchpad, control display or

voice control depending on the equipment.

Icon

Function

To switch between upper and

lower case.

To enter a space.

To switch between languages.

To use voice input.

52

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Performing a function

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control

display.

Digit in-

put

Operation

Show

quicklist.

Swipe from top to bottom on the

control display.

2. Tap the desired shortcut.

The function is carried out immediately. If you

have selected a phone number for example,

the connection will also be established.

Slide the Controller upwards.

Tap the

bar.

icon in the status

Hide

quicklist.

Swipe from the bottom up on the

control display.

Deleting shortcuts

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control

display.

Slide the Controller downwards.

2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.

3. "Delete shortcut"

Activating/deactivating pop-ups

Pop-ups are automatically shown on the con-

trol display for some functions. Some of these

pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.

Direct access

1.

Apps menu

General

2. "Vehicle apps"

The vehicle has buttons that can be used to

access menus for the respective function di-

rectly on the control display. Then continue the

operation via iDrive.

3. "System settings"

4. "Pop-ups"

5. Select the desired setting.

Overview

Shortcuts

General

The iDrive functions can be stored on the

shortcuts and called up directly, for example,

radio stations, navigation destinations, phone

numbers and menu entries.

Saving a function

1. Select the desired function.

2. Press and hold the desired function.

3. "Add to shortcuts"

Button Function

Call up the Exterior lighting menu.

Shortcuts can only be created with an active

BMW ID or a driver profile.

53

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Safety information

BMW Curved Display

WARNING

Principle

Objects located in front of the control display

may slip and damage the control display.

There is a danger of injury or material dam-

age. Do not place objects in front of the con-

trol display.

The BMW Curved Display is the one-piece dis-

play in the vehicle that is curved towards the

driver. The BMW Curved Display comprises the

instrument cluster on the driver's side and the

control display in the centre console.

General

Overview

Follow the instructions on cleaning the BMW

Curved Display in the Care chapter.

For further information:

Care of special parts, see page 425.

Overview

Control display

Switching the control display on/off

automatically

The control display is switched on automati-

cally when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon

as the control display is required for operation.

1

Instrument cluster 156

Control display 54

2

In certain situations, the control display is

switched off automatically, for example if no

operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-

eral minutes.

Control display

Switching the control display on/off

manually

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control

display.

Principle

The iDrive functions are shown on the control

display.

2. "Screen off"

Tap the control display to turn it on again.

54

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Adjusting the brightness

Buttons on the Controller

1.

Apps menu

Button Function

2. "Vehicle apps"

To go to the main menu.

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Confirm the desired setting.

To go to the Media/Radio menu.

To go to the Telephone menu.

To go to the navigation map.

Depending on the lighting conditions, the

brightness control may not be immediately ap-

parent.

System limits

If the control display is exposed to very high

temperatures, for example because of strong

sunlight, the brightness may be reduced and

the control display may even switch itself off.

Normal functions will be restored when the

temperature is reduced, for example by provid-

ing shade or using the air conditioning.

To go to the destination entry menu

of the navigation system.

Go to previous menu.

To go to the Options menu.

Controller

General

Operation

The buttons are used to go to menus directly.

▷

Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-

ample.

Overview

▷

Press to select a menu item, for example.

Controller

55

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Switching between menus

After selecting a menu item, a new menu is

displayed.

▷

Slide the Controller to the left.

The current menu closes and the previous

menu is displayed.

▷

Press the button.

▷

Slide in four directions to change between

menus, for example.

The current menu closes and the previous

menu is displayed.

Entering letters and numbers

Digit input

1. Turn the Controller: to select letters or num-

bers.

2.

: to confirm your digit input.

Set system language, see page 61.

Delete the input.

Operation using the

Controller

Icon Function

Press Controller: to delete a letter or

number.

Going to the main menu

Press and hold the Controller: to delete

all letters or numbers.

Press the key.

The main menu is displayed.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-

tries, the letters for which entries exist can be

displayed in a letter field.

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.

1. Turn the Controller quickly to the left or

right.

2. Press the Controller.

2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.

Selecting widgets

1. In the main menu, slide the Controller to the

right.

The first entry for the selected letter is dis-

played in the list.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget

is selected.

3. Press the Controller.

56

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Using the map

The navigation system's map can be moved

using the touchpad.

Operation by touchpad

General

Tap the map on the control display and then

continue the operation using the touchpad.

Depending on the equipment, some iDrive

functions can be operated with the touchpad

of the controller.

Function

Operation

To move the map.

Swipe in the appropri-

ate direction.

Selecting functions

1.

Apps menu

To display the

menu.

Tap once.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Touchpad"

Using alphabetical lists

Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries

permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-

try exists.

5. Select the desired setting.

Entering letters and numbers

▷

Enter characters as they are displayed on

the control display.

Enter the first letter on the touchpad.

The first entry of the entered letter is displayed

in the list.

▷

Always enter associated characters, for ex-

ample accents or dots, so that the letter can

be clearly identified.

Operation via control display

▷

The input options depend on the set lan-

guage. You may need to enter special char-

acters using the Controller.

General

Set system language, see page 61.

Depending on the equipment, the control dis-

play may be equipped with a touchscreen.

Entering special characters

It is possible to tap on menu items and widg-

ets. Touch the control display with your fingers.

Do not use any objects.

Function

Operation

Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the

ter. touchpad.

Going to the main menu

Tap the icon.

To enter a space. From the centre of the

touchpad, swipe to the

right.

The main menu is displayed.

To enter a hy-

phen.

At the top of the touch-

pad, swipe to the right.

To enter an un-

derscore.

At the bottom of the

touchpad, swipe to the

right.

57

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Adapting widgets

Entering letters and numbers

You can adapt the widgets in the main menu.

It is only possible to make adaptations with the

vehicle at a standstill.

Digit input

1. If necessary, tap the

display.

icon or control

1. If necessary,

tap the icon.

2. Enter the required letters and numbers.

2. Press and hold the widget.

3. Make the desired adjustment:

Delete the input.

▷

Tap the icon.

Icon Function

A new widget can be selected.

Tap the icon.

Tap icon: to delete a letter or number.

The widget is deleted.

Press and hold the icon: delete all let-

ters or numbers.

Press and hold the widget and drag to

the left or right.

The widget is moved to the desired po-

sition.

Using the map

The navigation map can be moved on the con-

trol display.

Sorting apps

To sort the app icons again, press and hold

the desired icon and move it to the desired

location.

Function

Operation

To move the map. Swipe in the appropri-

ate direction.

To zoom in/out on Pinch together or move

Switching between menus

After selecting a menu item, a new menu is

displayed.

the map.

apart your fingers.

To display the

menu.

Tap once.

Swipe from left to right on the Control Display.

The current menu closes and the previous

menu is displayed.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-

tries, the letters for which entries exist can be

displayed in a letter field.

Go to context menu

Depending on the menu item, a context menu

with additional options can be displayed.

1. Tap the letter in front of the list.

A letter box is displayed.

Press and hold the desired menu item.

The menu consists of various areas, such as:

2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.

▷

"General help": call up the Integrated Own-

er's Handbook.

The first entry for the selected letter is dis-

played in the list.

▷

"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as

shortcut.

58

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

▷

Relevant ConnectedDrive Services via the

ConnectedDrive Store.

BMW Intelligent Personal

Assistant

Receive suggestions, see page 62.

Principle

Activating voice input

The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a

personal assistant that enables natural voice

control of various vehicle functions. The Per-

sonal Assistant simplifies the operation of the

vehicle by proactively suggesting and auto-

mating habits.

General

Voice input can be activated in various ways:

▷

Press the button on the steering

wheel briefly.

General

The microphone on the driver's side is ac-

tive.

▷

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-

able depending on the national-market ver-

sion.

Say the activation word.

The microphones on the driver's or front

passenger's side are active with the

following voice control, depending on

where the activation word was spoken.

The system includes special microphones

on the driver's side and the passenger's

side.

Then say the command. The activation word

and the command can be spoken without

pause in one sentence.

Say commands at a normal volume.

Speaking directly into the microphone does

not improve speech recognition.

Commands and numbers should be spoken

fluently, with the usual emphasis and at a

normal volume and speed.

Microphone button on steering wheel

›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-

ken.

1.

Press the button briefly.

2. Say the command.

Activation word

General

Operating requirements

▷

A system language that is supported by the

Personal Assistant must be set via iDrive.

Set system language, see page 61.

Saying the activation word starts the Personal

Assistant. The Personal Assistant listens.

▷

Always say commands in the configured

system language.

Preset activation word

For the full range of functions, the following

functions should be activated, set or booked:

›Hello BMW‹: The preset activation word can

be activated and deactivated.

▷

Online speech processing, see page 62.

All settings under

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

Data protection, see page 72.

Activation word, see page 59.

BMW ID or a driver profile.

▷

59

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Activation word"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Additional speech assistants"

6. Select the desired setting.

7. ""Hello BMW""

Personal activation word

Cancelling voice input

In addition to the preset activation word, a

personal activation word can be set up with

an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-

sonal activation word can also be changed or

deleted.

▷

Press the button on the steering

wheel again.

▷

›Cancel‹

Slide the Controller to the right or left.

Press the Controller.

The activation word should consist of multiple

syllables to ensure good detection.

›Hello‹: The addition is not necessary during

activation word and does not need to be spo-

ken.

Possible commands

General

1.

Apps menu

Commands can be used to give instructions

or ask questions where the Personal Assistant

provides support.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

For example, it is possible to call contacts,

navigate to an address, make settings or ask

questions about the vehicle function.

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Activation word"

7. "Personal activation word"

8. "Set"

Most of the contents on the control display, for

example menu items and list entries, can be

said as commands.

9. "Start recording"

Help for voice control

Activation word from third-party providers

▷

›Voice commands‹: to have voice command

options read aloud.

Depending on the national-market version,

some third-party providers offer digital voice

assistants, e.g. Siri or Amazon Alexa.

▷

›General information on voice control‹: have

information on the operating principle of the

voice control announced.

In order to use Siri, the smartphone must be

connected via Apple CarPlay.

▷

›Help‹: have tips and example commands

for voice control announced.

Supported voice assistants can be used with a

connected smartphone in the vehicle.

Additional example commands for the cur-

rent context are displayed in the widget of

the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.

In addition to the BMW preset or personal acti-

vation word, the activation word of voice assis-

tants from connected third-party providers can

be used.

Sample commands

1.

Apps menu

▷

›Call John Smith‹

2. "Vehicle apps"

›Drive me to Heathrow airport‹

›Play a classical music station‹

3. "System settings"

60

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

▷

›Is my tyre pressure still okay?‹

›Activate climate control‹

›Increase the ACC distance‹

›Sport mode‹

Example command: ›How do you disable the

front passenger airbag?‹

The Personal Assistant gives a response.

Where applicable, the section of the Integrated

Owner's Handbook is displayed on the control

display if the vehicle is at standstill.

Further example commands can be displayed

on the Control Display.

Settings

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

Setting the system language

3. "Personal assistant"

4. "Help"

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

5. "Example commands"

3. "System settings"

4. "Language"

Sample commands for the current context are

displayed in the widget of the BMW Intelligent

Personal Assistant.

5. Select the desired setting.

For further information:

Setting the response length

Adapting widgets, see page 57.

You can set the Personal Assistant to use the

standard dialogue or a short version. In case

of the short version, the announcements by

the Personal Assistant are played back in an

abbreviated version.

Menu items

Menu items can be called up directly via the

Personal Assistant. Speak the menu items

as they are displayed on the Control Display.

When speaking the menu items, the order of

the menus does not have to be observed.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

1. Activate the voice input.

2. ›Media‹

4. "Voice control"

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Response length"

7. Select the desired setting.

3. ›Saved stations‹

The saved stations are displayed on the

control display.

Owner's Handbook by voice control

Saying during voice output

It is possible to ask simple questions about

the vehicle functions and about operating the

vehicle.

It is possible to answer during inquiries of the

Personal Assistant. The function can be deac-

tivated if the feedback is frequently cancelled

inadvertently, for example due to background

noise or conversations in the vehicle.

The voice control system and the feedback it

provides are not a substitute for the printed

or Integrated Owner's Handbook. The function

is available depending on the national-market

version. The speech recognition function and

the quality of the feedback may vary.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

61

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

version. Online speech processing is not avail-

able in all languages.

6. "Speaking during voice output"

1.

Apps menu

Suggestions

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

General

4. "Voice control"

The Personal Assistant provides support with

individual suggestions.

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Online speech processing"

Activating/deactivating suggestions

1.

Apps menu

Voice control from third-party

providers

2. "Vehicle apps"

Depending on the equipment, third-party voice

control can be activated by pressing and hold-

ing the microphone button on the steering

wheel.

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. "Receive suggestions"

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Adapting suggestions

3. "System settings"

4. "Voice control"

The suggestions can be adapted, e.g. for

which category suggestions are made or

whether an audio signal is output.

5. "Long press"

1.

Apps menu

6. Select the desired setting.

2. "Vehicle apps"

Adjusting the volume

3. "System settings"

Turn the volume control button during the spo-

ken instructions until the desired volume is ob-

tained.

4. "Voice control"

5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"

6. Select the desired setting.

The volume setting is retained even if you

change the volume of other audio sources.

Online speech processing

Online speech processing improves the quality

of the speech recognition and search results

for points of interest. To use the function, data

is sent across an encrypted connection to a

service provider where it is delete stored. An

active ConnectedDrive contract is required for

online speech processing. ConnectedDrive is

available depending on the national-market

Using the voice control of the

smartphone

Depending on the device, a smartphone con-

nected to the vehicle can be operated via voice

input.

The device must be connected via Apple Car-

Play or Android Auto.

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

62

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

The voice control of the smartphone is acti-

vated.

Automating habits

If activation is successful, a confirmation

appears on the control display.

General

The Personal Assistant can automate routines,

for example, the automatic opening of win-

dows at the same place. This involves creating

rules that can be activated and deactivated at

any time.

2. Press the

button on the steering

wheel to cancel the voice control of the

smartphone.

Activating/deactivating routines

Amazon Alexa Car Integration

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

Principle

3. "Automate habits"

4. Select the desired setting.

Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-

pending on the equipment and national-mar-

ket version. Alexa is a digital assistant from

Amazon. Amazon Alexa Car Integration allows

Alexa to be used in the vehicle. Some Alexa

functions may only work to a restricted extent

in the vehicle to ensure they do not create a

safety risk when driving.

System limits

▷

The Personal Assistant provides informa-

tion about vehicle functions that may not be

installed in the vehicle.

This also applies to safety-relevant func-

tions and systems.

Operating requirements

▷

Certain noises may be detected and could

cause problems. Keep doors and windows

closed.

▷

A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.

▷

An active Amazon account exists.

Noises from the front passenger or other

passengers can impair the system. Avoid

background noise in the vehicle while you

are speaking.

Activating Amazon Alexa Car

Integration

Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in

the vehicle and, if applicable, in the My BMW

App.

▷

Strong dialects may prevent speech recog-

nition from working properly.

To set it up, follow the instructions in the Ama-

zon Alexa app in the vehicle.

A poor data connection influences the re-

sponse time of the Personal Assistant and

the Search.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Amazon Alexa"

Once set up, Amazon Alexa can be used in the

vehicle as follows:

BMW gesture control

Say the activation word Alexa and the desired

command.

Principle

BMW gesture control enables some iDrive

functions to be operated simply by moving

your hands.

Information about the active function appears

on the control display. If the function is im-

paired, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi if nec-

essary.

63

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

3. "System settings"

4. "Gesture control"

5. "Gesture control"

Overview

Settings

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Gesture control"

5. Select the desired setting.

The camera in the headliner detects gestures

made in the area of the centre console at the

height of the control display.

Performing gestures

The camera of the gesture control uses an in-

visible Class 1 laser.

▷

Perform the gestures under the interior mir-

ror and to the side of the steering wheel.

▷

Perform the gestures clearly.

Activating/deactivating gesture

control

The gestures can also be performed from

the passenger's side.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Possible gestures

Gesture

Operation

Function

Move extended index finger forward and To accept phone call.

backward in the direction of the control

To select the highlighted en-

try of a list during voice input.

To confirm the pop-up.

display.

Swipe hand in front of the control display To reject phone call.

in the direction of the front passenger

seat.

To close the pop-up.

To end voice input.

Move extended index finger slowly in a

clockwise circle.

To increase the volume.

Gesture is detected after approximately

one circular movement.

64

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Gesture

Operation

Function

Move the extended index finger slowly

counter-clockwise in a circle.

To reduce the volume.

Gesture is detected after approximately

one circular movement.

Depending on the

equipment:

Bring thumb and index finger together

and move the hand to the right or left.

Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-

cle view.

3D View: rotate camera view.

This gesture is only possible

with the vehicle at standstill.

Move fist with thumb extended to the left To skip back.

back and forth.

The previous music track is

played.

Move fist with thumb extended to right

left back and forth.

Skip function forwards.

The next music track is

played.

With the index and middle fingers exten- Perform individually assigna-

ded, point into the direction of the control ble gesture.

display.

Stretch out all five fingers, make a fist

and then stretch out all five fingers

again.

Perform individually assigna-

ble gesture.

▷

Route guidance to home address.

Mute/playback.

Control display on/off.

Assigning a gesture individually

General

Two gestures can be assigned individually and

can be set as a shortcut for certain functions,

for example:

Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an

active BMW ID or a driver profile.

65

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

type to select depends on the mobile device

and the function you wish to use.

Setting a gesture shortcut

The desired function can be selected directly in

any menu and set as a shortcut.

General

1. Press and hold the desired menu item.

2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"

Detailed information on functions and connec-

tion types can be found in the following media

from the Owner's Handbook under the speci-

fied keyword:

3. Select the desired gesture.

Selecting the function

Some defined functions can be selected di-

rectly in the menu for gesture control.

▷

Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehi-

cle.

▷

Printed Owner’s Handbook for Navigation,

Communication, and Entertainment.

1.

Apps menu

The following information sources can also be

used:

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Gesture control"

▷

Driver’s Guide app.

Driver’s Guide Web.

5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-

o-five fingers"

Safety information

6. Select the desired setting.

WARNING

System limits

Operating integrated information systems

and communication devices during a journey

may distract you from the traffic situation.

You could lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only operate the systems

or devices if the traffic situation allows you to

do so. Stop if necessary and operate the sys-

tems or devices with the vehicle at a stand-

still.

Detection of gestures by the camera in the

headliner can be disrupted under the following

circumstances:

▷

The camera lens is covered.

There are objects on the interior mirror.

The camera lens is dirty; clean the camera

lens.

Sensors and camera lenses, see page 423.

▷

The gesture is performed outside the de-

tection range.

Overview

▷

Wearing of gloves or jewellery.

Smoking in the interior.

The following list shows possible functions

and the appropriate connection types for them.

The range of functions depends on the vehicle

equipment and the mobile device.

Connecting mobile devices

to the vehicle

Principle

The vehicle offers various types of connections

for using mobile devices. Which connection

66

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Function

Connection type

Icon on the con-

trol display

Making calls using the hands-free

system.

Bluetooth.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection.

Operating telephone functions via

iDrive.

Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.

Playing music from a USB device.

Keyword: audio.

Bluetooth audio.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection.

Calling without a mobile phone.

Personal eSIM.

Keyword: calling with Personal eSIM. Keyword: Personal eSIM.

Data exchange between mobile de-

vice and vehicle.

WiFi.

Keyword: vehicle WiFi.

Use Internet access via the personal WiFi via personal hotspot.

hotspot.

Keyword: personal hotspot.

Operate Apple CarPlay via iDrive and Bluetooth and WiFi.

by voice commands.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection and

Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.

Operate Android Auto via iDrive and Bluetooth and WiFi.

by voice control.

Keyword: Bluetooth connection and

Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.

Playing music from a USB device.

Keyword: audio.

USB.

Keyword: USB connection.

For further information:

USB port, see page 318.

67

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

Vehicle equipment

leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-

hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-

cle key with you and lock the vehicle.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Operating requirements

▷

Active ConnectedDrive contract.

For further information:

▷

The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has

been activated.

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

▷

Mobile reception.

BMW Remote Software

Upgrade

A consent for the transmission of the corre-

sponding data was given in the Data Pro-

tection menu.

For further information:

Principle

Data protection, see page 72.

Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-

date the entire software of the vehicle. This

makes new functions, functional enhance-

ments or quality improvements available.

Search for an upgrade

Operating requirements

The standby state must be turned on to search

for a Remote Software Upgrade.

General

BMW recommends carrying out the Remote

Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes

available.

Automatic search

The vehicle regularly searches for updates in

the background.

Safety information

Manual search

WARNING

1.

Apps menu

Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle

can set the vehicle in motion and endanger

themselves or other road users, for example

by the following actions:

2. "All apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5. "Search for upgrades"

▷

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

Opening and closing doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Operating vehicle equipment.

68

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

sion information can be shown on the control

display while downloading and following suc-

cessful completion of the installation.

Download of an upgrade

Automatic download

If available, the data for a Remote Software

Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. No consent to download is required.

This information is also available in the Con-

nectedDrive customer portal.

Displaying information

Via BMW app

Display in the vehicle:

If an upgrade is available, information about

the new software version is displayed in the

BMW app.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

The data for the upgrade can then be down-

loaded to a mobile device, for example via an

existing Wi-Fi connection.

5.

▷

Display currently installed version:

"Installed version:"

The data can then be transferred from the mo-

bile device to the vehicle.

▷

Display new available version:

"Info on version"

This transmission method accelerates the

download of the data, for example in areas

with limited mobile network availability.

6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to

the smartphone.

Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal

on the Internet:

2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.

3. Establish the connection to the vehicle.

www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.

Installing the upgrade

General

▷

iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.

Android: connect Bluetooth® audio and

Wi-Fi.

▷

Installing the remote software upgrade may

cause software modifications not made by

the vehicle manufacturer to be deleted,

such as increases in performance.

The data transfer of the upgrade from the

mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the

background only while driving.

4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

▷

Modifications to the on-board power supply

of the vehicle, for example to control units

that have not been made by the manufac-

turer of the vehicle, can cause the installa-

tion to malfunction.

For further information:

For information on connecting mobile devices

with the vehicle, see Owner’s Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.

▷

The installation does not occur until the

consent was given.

Release notes

The installation can take around 20 to

30 minutes.

General

Installation cannot be interrupted.

The release notes describe the updates inclu-

ded in the Remote Software Upgrade. The ver-

69

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

▷

The vehicle cannot be used during installa-

tion.

Install immediately

The upgrade can be installed immediately

when all prerequisites have been met.

You may leave the vehicle during installa-

tion.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

Prerequisites for the installation

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5. "Start upgrade now"

▷

The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.

▷

The outside temperature is above -10 ℃,

14 ℉.

▷

The vehicle is parked on level ground.

The hazard warning lights are switched off.

The selector lever position P is engaged.

6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play.

Installing with timer

The engine is turned off and sufficiently

cooled down.

At the end of the journey, a timer can be used

to install the upgrade automatically at a config-

ured time, for example, during the night. It may

make sense to install later to meet functional

requirements, such as a sufficiently cooled en-

gine.

If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-

requisites on the control display.

If the prerequisites are not met, for example

a sufficient vehicle battery charge state, the

upgrade will not be offered for installation.

1.

Apps menu

Look out for an offer to install, for example

after driving for a long period.

2. "All apps"

3. "System settings"

Preparing the vehicle

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5. Select the desired settings.

The installation starts automatically when:

▷

Park the vehicle safely away from the public

road.

▷

Cellular network reception must be ensured

so that a fault message can be sent to the

vehicle manufacturer, for example if the in-

stallation is terminated.

▷

All prerequisites for the installation have

been established correctly.

▷

All prerequisites continue to be met at the

time of installation.

▷

Close the windows.

The timer is turned off when the drive-ready

state is turned on.

Close the glass sunroof.

Closing the luggage compartment

Functional limitations

During the upgrade, many of the functions are

temporarily unavailable, for example:

Remove devices that consume energy, for

example mobile phone.

▷

Disconnect the trailer or load carrier.

The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-

cle for the consent for installation.

▷

Hazard warning lights.

Central locking system and, if necessary,

Comfort Access.

▷

Switch off the exterior lights.

Remove the devices connected to the

socket for on-board diagnosis.

▷

Side lights.

Horn.

70

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

▷

Alarm system.

Emergency call.

Window lifters.

Glass sunroof.

Fuel filler flap lock.

Operating the tailgate or boot lid.

The driver's door can be unlocked and locked

from outside with the integrated key.

After successful upgrade

The vehicle can be used again immediately.

Purchased services, e.g. Real Time Traffic In-

formation or Remote Services, are automati-

cally reactivated during your next drive.

After an extended stationary period, charge

the vehicle battery with an extended drive.

Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-

structions on the control display or in the BMW

app.

If the malfunction cannot be rectified, contact

an authorised Service Partner or another quali-

fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Validity of Owner's Handbook

Vehicle production

When the vehicle leaves the factory, the con-

tents of the printed Owner's Handbook are up

to date.

After a software update in the vehicle

After a vehicle software update, for example,

via Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated

Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain

the latest information.

71

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Personal settings

CONTROLS

Personal settings

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Vehicle equipment

Principle

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Depending on use, the vehicle stores personal

data such as saved radio stations. This per-

sonal data can be permanently deleted using

iDrive.

For further information:

General

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Depending on the equipment, the following

data is deleted:

Data protection

▷

BMW IDs or driver profiles.

Saved radio stations.

Stored shortcuts.

Data transfer

Navigation, for example saved destina-

tions.

Principle

The vehicle offers various services which re-

quire data to be transferred to BMW or a serv-

ice provider.

▷

Phone book.

Online data, for example favourites, cook-

ies.

▷

Office data, for example voice memos.

Login accounts.

General

Data transfer can be deactivated for some

services. If data transfer has been deactivated

for a service, then that service cannot be used.

Digital keys.

It may take up to 15 minutes in total to delete

data. The vehicle is also removed from the My

BMW App and the ConnectedDrive customer

portal so that remote functions can no longer

be used.

Settings

Data transfer can be configured individually in

various stages or for individual services.

1.

Apps menu

Operating requirements

2. "Vehicle apps"

▷

Data can only be deleted with the vehicle at

a standstill.

3. "System settings"

4. "Data privacy"

▷

The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.

5. Select the desired setting.

Deleting data

Personal data in the vehicle is deleted when

the vehicle is reset to its factory settings.

For further information:

Reset vehicle data, see page 73.

72

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Personal settings

CONTROLS

Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW

ID in the vehicle can be synchronised with the

BMW Cloud. This makes these settings avail-

able in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is

used to log in.

Resetting vehicle data

All individual settings can be reset to the

factory settings when drive-ready state is

switched off. Data can only be deleted with the

vehicle at a standstill. The vehicle key must be

in the vehicle.

The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three

driver profiles.

Activation of a BMW ID or a driver profile can

already take place when unlocking. For this

purpose, the driver recognition via a vehicle

key or a digital key must be assigned to the

BMW ID or the driver profile.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Reset vehicle data"

5. "Reset vehicle data"

If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when

the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle is in the

guest profile.

If synchronisation of settings has been activa-

ted for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal

settings are retained in the BMW Cloud.

Operating requirements

When a BMW ID or driver profile is created,

changed, deleted or edited, the vehicle must

move no faster than at walking speed.

BMW ID/driver profiles

The login in the vehicle with a BMW ID and

synchronisation with the BMW Cloud are only

possible when the vehicle has cellular network

reception.

Principle

In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is

the personal login for all relevant offers for the

BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the

vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle

settings.

Welcome window

After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window

is shown on the control display. The type of

the welcome depends on the following prereq-

uisite:

In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal

vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.

General

▷

The vehicle does not have a stored BMW

ID or driver profile:

The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW

ID can be registered via the BMW app, in

the ConnectedDrive Portal or at the authorised

Service Partner.

The welcome is neutral. An option to add a

BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.

▷

The vehicle key or the digital key has not

been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-

file:

A driver profile is created in the vehicle.

If a vehicle is used by several people, each

person can create their own BMW ID or driver

profile in order to save their personal settings.

The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW

IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered

for selection. Additionally, it is possible to

If a BMW ID or a driver profile is activated,

the settings stored therein are applied to the

vehicle.

73

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Personal settings

CONTROLS

4.

add a new BMW ID or create a new driver

profile.

▷

Scan the QR code shown in the display.

The BMW ID is copied from the BMW

app.

▷

A BMW ID or a driver profile has not been

assigned to the vehicle key or the digital

key :

Enter the login data of the BMW ID.

5. Depending on the national-market version,

the following settings can be selected:

The welcome is personalised, the stored

settings are activated. The BMW ID or the

driver profile can be changed.

▷

"Synchronise BMW ID"

The settings stored in the BMW Cloud

are applied.

As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on

or the control display is tapped outside of the

welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.

▷

"Transfer settings"

If the vehicle is using the guest profile,

the settings of the guest profile will be

applied.

Registering a BMW ID

The following steps must be carried out in or-

der to use a BMW ID:

▷

"Continue"

The vehicle is added to the user’s BMW app.

▷

Register the BMW ID.

Activate the BMW ID.

Confirming the BMW ID

If the BMW ID has been created by the Service

Partner and added to the vehicle, the BMW ID

must then be confirmed in the vehicle:

Add or confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle.

Registration of the BMW ID via the BMW app

can be started in the vehicle.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

1. Select the BMW ID.

2. Select the desired confirmation:

2. "Add BMW ID"

3. "Register now"

▷

Scan the displayed QR code with the

BMW app.

4. Scan the QR code shown in the display.

The BMW ID is created on the smartphone.

▷

Enter the password of the BMW ID.

Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered

by the authorised Service Partner and added

to the vehicle. The BMW ID must then be

confirmed on the control display of the corre-

sponding vehicle.

BMW app

If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,

the vehicle is automatically added to the BMW

app. This means that functions of the BMW

app can be used for this vehicle. This requires

the BMW app to be used with the same BMW

ID.

Adding the BMW ID

An existing BMW ID can be added to the vehi-

cle:

Alternatively, a vehicle can be added to the

BMW app by the authorised Service Partner. In

this case, the BMW ID must then be confirmed

on the control display of the corresponding ve-

hicle.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

2. "Add BMW ID"

In rare cases, the use of BMW app functions

for this vehicle may be restricted. A further

note is shown on the control display.

3.

▷

"Log in with My BMW App"

"Log in with BMW ID"

74

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Personal settings

CONTROLS

The PIN can be used to activate the BMW

ID or the driver profile, even if the assigned

vehicle key or the assigned digital key is not

available.

Creating a driver profile

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

2. "Add driver profile"

▷

"Vehicle key"

3. Enter the name for the driver profile.

4. Select the desired setting:

"Transfer settings"

The vehicle key that is recognised in the

vehicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID

or the driver profile.

If the vehicle is using the guest profile, the

settings of the guest profile will be applied.

"Digital Key"

The digital key that is recognised in the ve-

hicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or

the driver profile.

Main user

The main user is the person who first enters

their BMW ID into the vehicle and the vehicle

into the BMW app. Alternatively, the main user

can be defined by the Service Partner.

Automatic driver recognition

If driver recognition has been defined, auto-

matic activation of the BMW ID or driver profile

is triggered by the following activities:

The main user has access to the following set-

tings, for example:

▷

By unlocking the vehicle using the assigned

vehicle key button.

▷

Remove BMW IDs stored in the vehicle.

Transfer the role of the main user to an-

other BMW ID.

▷

By unlocking the vehicle using an outside

door handle. The assigned vehicle key or

the assigned digital key must be carried.

▷

Make vehicle-wide privacy settings.

Creation of the digital master key.

▷

By automatic unlocking when approaching

the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the

assigned digital key must be carried. De-

pending on the national-market version, it

may not be possible to recognise the digital

key.

For further information:

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

Specify the driver detection

A driver detection and a PIN can be set up for

a BMW ID or a driver profile.

If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys

in the vicinity of the vehicle, the activation of

the BMW ID or the driver profile takes place

according to the following priority:

The driver detection offers the following ad-

vantages:

▷

The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers

the activation of the assigned BMW ID or

the assigned driver profile.

▷

The BMW ID or the driver profile with the

saved settings is automatically activated.

▷

The settings are not accessible to other

persons.

The guest profile is activated when the ve-

hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-

signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.

The driver detection is specified immediately

following the addition of the BMW ID or after

creating the driver profile.

▷

If a vehicle key and a digital key are detec-

ted at the same time, the digital key trig-

Prior to the selection of the driver detection, a

PIN must be created.

▷

"Set PIN"

75

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Personal settings

CONTROLS

gers the activation of the assigned BMW ID

or the assigned driver profile.

The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed

at any time via iDrive:

▷

If another key is detected on the driver's

door after activating the BMW ID or the

driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-

file of the last key detected is activated.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

2.

▷

"Change BMW ID"

"Change driver profile"

If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-

signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-

vated.

3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.

4. If necessary, enter the PIN.

The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,

the stored settings are loaded.

Synchronisation of settings

If synchronisation is switched on, settings are

continuously synchronised from the following

areas, for example:

Guest profile

The guest profile can be activated and

changed by anyone.

▷

BMW ID, e.g. profile picture.

Navigation, e.g. last destinations, home ad-

dress or map settings.

The guest profile is automatically active in the

following cases:

▷

Media, e.g. favourites or stored radio sta-

tions.

▷

A BMW ID has not yet been added or a

driver profile has not yet been created.

iDrive, e.g. main menu configuration, lan-

guage or units.

▷

No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-

signed to the vehicle key or the digital key

that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Personal assistant, e.g. suggestions or acti-

vation word.

The following limitations apply to the guest

profile:

Exterior lights, e.g. one-touch signalling and

home lights.

▷

Selected functions that process personal

data are not available in the guest profile.

This includes functions of the navigation

and the saving of favourites. More infor-

mation on data processing is available in

the ConnectedDrive data protection notes /

service descriptions.

Settings from the following areas are only

synchronised when you log in for the first time:

▷

Seating and climate comfort, e.g. driver’s

seat position or temperature setting.

Privacy menu.

▷

The guest profile cannot be renamed.

Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile

It is not possible to assign a PIN to the

guest profile.

If it was not possible to recognise the BMW

ID or driver profile when unlocking the vehicle,

the BMW ID or driver profile is selected on the

welcome window.

▷

It is not possible to assign a driver detection

to the guest profile.

In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-

sation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.

76

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Personal settings

CONTROLS

The guest profile is selected in the welcome

window or via iDrive:

be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the

driver profile.

The BMW Digital Key provides the option to

transfer a digital key to permit other persons

the use of your own vehicle.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

2.

▷

"Change BMW ID"

For further information:

"Change driver profile"

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

3. "Continue as guest"

Settings

Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

General

Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-

ating a driver profile can be changed.

2.

▷

"Change BMW ID"

"Change driver profile"

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

3.

Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or

the desired driver profile.

2. "Settings"

Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes

the vehicle to be removed from the BMW app.

If the BMW ID has been synchronised with the

BMW Cloud, the data stored in the BMW Cloud

is retained after the BMW ID is deleted. If the

currently active BMW ID is removed, the guest

profile is activated.

The following settings are available for the

BMW ID:

▷

The type of driver detection.

The profile picture.

The synchronisation with the BMW Cloud.

The personal salutation.

Removing a vehicle from the BMW app re-

moves the corresponding BMW ID from the

vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronised with

the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored on

the BMW Cloud will be retained.

The following settings are available for the

driver profile:

▷

The type of driver detection.

The profile picture.

If the vehicle is removed from the main user’s

BMW app, it will also be removed from the

other users’ BMW apps. The corresponding

BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.

The profile name.

Selecting a profile picture

The profile picture can be selected from the

predefined profile pictures.

If the vehicle is reset to the factory settings, the

vehicle is removed from all users’ BMW apps

and all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.

1.

Tap the icon or personal picture in the

status bar.

2. "Settings"

Transfer of the vehicle key

3. "Manage profile picture"

4. "Select profile picture"

A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or

a driver profile can be used to view or change

the stored personal settings.

For a BMW ID, the personal profile picture can

be taken from the profile in the BMW app.

This requires that the synchronisation with the

BMW Cloud is activated in the settings. After

Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-

sons, any assigned driver detection should be

cancelled. Changes to the driver detection can

77

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Personal settings

CONTROLS

the profile picture from the BMW app has been

applied, a selection from the predefined pic-

tures is only possible if the profile picture in

the BMW app is deleted or synchronisation is

deactivated.

System limits

A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or

the digital key may not always be possible, for

example in the following cases:

▷

If there is a change of driver without the

vehicle being locked and unlocked.

▷

When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-

tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver

profile are located in the outer area on the

driver's side of the vehicle.

▷

When the vehicle was unlocked from the

BMW app.

The use of personal settings that are stored

for a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to

technical limitations. For example, there may

be stored settings for a system that is not

available in other vehicles, or only in an incom-

patible version.

78

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

teries out of reach of children. Immediately

seek medical help if there is any suspicion

that a battery or button cell has been swal-

lowed or is located in any part of the body.

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Overview

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Vehicle key

General

The delivery specification includes two vehicle

keys, each containing an integrated key.

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-

tery.

Icon

Meaning

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, various settings are possible

for the button functions.

Unlock.

Lock.

A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-

tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.

Pre-conditioning, see page 314.

To provide information on maintenance re-

quirement, the service data is saved in the ve-

hicle key.

Open/close the luggage compart-

ment.

To prevent the vehicle key from being locked

in, take it with you whenever you leave the

vehicle.

Function adjustable:

Home lights, see page 180.

Open/close the luggage compart-

ment.

Safety information

Additional vehicle keys

WARNING

Additional vehicle keys are available from an

authorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

The vehicle key has a button cell battery.

Batteries or button cells can be swallowed

and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two

hours, for example due to internal burns or

chemical burns. There is a danger of injury or

danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and bat-

79

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Loss of vehicle keys

1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and

push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-

move it from the side.

A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-

placed by an authorised Service Partner or an-

other qualified Service Partner or a specialist

workshop.

If a BMW ID or driver profile has been assigned

to the lost vehicle key, the connection to this

vehicle key must be deleted. A new vehicle key

can then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver

profile.

Replacing the battery

2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-

cle key to the side.

NOTICE

Unsuitable batteries in a battery-operated

device can damage the device. There is a

risk of material damage. Always replace the

discharged battery with a battery with the

same voltage, the same size and the same

specification.

3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-

ing.

4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the

positive terminal facing down.

80

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle

key.

Removing the integrated key

1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and

push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-

move it from the side.

6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.

Dispose of old batteries with an author-

ised Service Partner, another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist work-

shop, or hand them in to an authorised collec-

tion point.

2. Slide out the integrated key at the open

side of the vehicle key.

Integrated key

General

The integrated key enables the vehicle to be

unlocked and locked without the vehicle key.

Depending on the national-market version, the

integrated key fits the glove compartment.

3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle

key.

Safety information

Unlocking/locking via the door lock

1. Pull the door handle outwards with one

hand and hold it.

WARNING

With some national-market versions, unlock-

ing from the inside requires specific knowl-

edge.

There is a danger of injury or danger to life

if persons remain in the vehicle for extended

periods and are exposed to extreme temper-

atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle

from the outside when there is someone in-

side it.

2. Slide one finger of your other hand under

the cover cap from behind and press the

cover outwards.

81

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Support the cover cap with your thumb to

stop it falling out of the door handle.

Emergency detection of the vehicle

key

3. Remove the cover cap.

Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the

vehicle key is not detected.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock with the

integrated key.

If this happens, proceed as follows:

1. Hold the rear side of the vehicle key against

the mark on the steering column. Pay at-

tention to the display in the instrument

cluster.

2.

▷

If the vehicle key is detected:

Switch on drive-ready state within

10 seconds.

▷

If the vehicle key is not detected:

The other doors must be unlocked using the

central locking system button or manually from

the inside.

Slightly change the position of the vehi-

cle key and repeat the procedure.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is shown where ap-

plicable.

Alarm system

If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated

key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-

tem is triggered when the door is opened.

It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the

vehicle key in some circumstances, including

the following:

In this case, use the emergency detection of

the vehicle key to switch off the alarm.

▷

The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.

If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key

via the door lock, the alarm system is not acti-

vated.

Disruption of the radio link by transmis-

sion masts or other equipment transmitting

powerful signals.

▷

Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob-

jects.

Do not transport the vehicle key together

with metallic objects.

82

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

Disruption of the radio link by mobile

phones or other electronic devices in the

immediate vicinity of the vehicle key.

WARNING

Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle

can set the vehicle in motion and endanger

themselves or other road users, for example

by the following actions:

Do not transport the vehicle key together

with electronic devices.

▷

Interference with the radio transmission

caused by the charging process of mobile

devices, for example a mobile phone.

▷

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

The vehicle key is located in the immediate

vicinity of the wireless charging tray.

Opening and closing doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Operating vehicle equipment.

Place the vehicle key somewhere else.

If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be

unlocked and locked from the outside with the

integrated key. Use the emergency detection

of the vehicle key to turn on the drive-ready

state.

There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-

hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-

cle key with you and lock the vehicle.

Actions during unlocking

Depending on the settings, the following func-

tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-

cle:

Access to vehicle interior

Safety information

WARNING

▷

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap

will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle

will be unlocked.

Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left

inside can lock the doors from the inside and

lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle

cannot be opened from the outside. There is

a danger of injury. Carry the vehicle key with

you so that you can open the vehicle from the

outside.

▷

The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-

firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.

The welcome light can be turned on when

the vehicle is being unlocked.

The following functions are also carried out:

▷

If a BMW ID or driver profile was assigned

to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver

profile will be activated.

WARNING

▷

The interior lights are switched on unless

they were switched off manually.

With some national-market versions, unlock-

ing from the inside requires specific knowl-

edge.

Depending on the equipment, folded exte-

rior mirrors are folded out.

There is a danger of injury or danger to life

if persons remain in the vehicle for extended

periods and are exposed to extreme temper-

atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle

from the outside when there is someone in-

side it.

If the exterior mirrors were folded in using

the button inside the vehicle, they are not

folded out when the vehicle is unlocked.

83

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

The anti-theft security system is switched

off.

If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap

have been unlocked because of the settings,

press the button on the vehicle key again to

unlock the other vehicle access points.

The alarm system is switched off.

For further information:

The vehicle is operational after one of the front

doors is opened.

▷

For settings, see page 98.

Welcome light, see page 180.

BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 73.

The lighting functions may depend on the am-

bient brightness.

Actions during locking

Locking the vehicle

Depending on the settings, the following func-

tions are performed when locking the vehicle:

1. Close the driver's door.

▷

The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed

with a light signal or a sound signal.

2.

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

On the outside door handle

Principle

▷

Depending on the equipment, the exterior

mirrors can be folded in automatically dur-

ing locking. If the hazard warning lights are

switched on, the exterior mirrors are not fol-

ded in.

This feature allows you to access the vehicle

without having to use the vehicle key.

▷

Home lights can be activated during lock-

ing.

The vehicle key is automatically detected near

the vehicle.

The following functions are carried out:

▷

All the doors, the tailgate and fuel filler flap

are locked.

General

▷

The anti-theft security system is switched

on. This prevents the doors from being un-

locked using the locking button or the door

openers.

The function is available with Comfort Access.

Depending on the national-market version, the

vehicle can also be unlocked and locked at the

outside door handle with compatible smart-

phones with a digital key.

▷

The alarm system is switched on.

If drive-ready state is still switched on when

locking, the vehicle horn sounds twice. If this

happens, switch off drive-ready state using

Start/Stop button.

For further information:

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

Operating requirements

For further information:

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,

in your trouser pocket.

For settings, see page 98.

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to unlock and lock with the digital

key.

With the vehicle key

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

84

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be

located outside the vehicle in the vicinity of

the doors.

Touchless unlocking/locking of the

vehicle

After locking, approx. 2 seconds must

elapse before unlocking is possible.

Principle

The vehicle is unlocked when the driver ap-

proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle

key.

Unlocking the vehicle

If the driver moves away from the unlocked ve-

hicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is locked.

General

The function is available with Comfort Access.

The vehicle is unlocked when an authorised

vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.

The unlocking zone is an area with a radius of

approximately 1.50 m, 5 ft around the vehicle.

Fully grasp the handle of a front door.

The vehicle is locked when the vehicle key

leaves the locking zone.

Locking the vehicle

1. Close the driver's door.

The locking zone is an area with a radius of

approximately 3 m, 9 ft around the vehicle.

2. Touch the grooved surface on the handle of

a closed front door with your finger for ap-

proximately 1 second, without gripping the

door handle.

Depending on the national-market version,

touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-

ble for compatible smartphones with a digital

key. Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to do this.

If the vehicle key remains within the unlocking

zone without moving for a prolonged period of

time, the vehicle is locked automatically.

If a person is detected on a seat when locking,

the following restrictions apply:

▷

The vehicle is locked, but not protected

against theft.

▷

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Malfunction

For further information:

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-

ing request detection on the outside door han-

dles.

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

Actions during unlocking

If a fault occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle

with the buttons on the vehicle key or with the

integrated key.

If the settings specify that only the driver's

door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,

note the following:

85

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only

be unlocked when the driver approaches the

vehicle on the driver's side.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle

For further information:

For settings, see page 98.

Operating requirements

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,

in your trouser pocket.

▷

Automatic unlocking and locking must be

activated in the settings.

Hold the activated Key Card directly and cen-

trally up against the outside door handle on

the driver's door.

▷

Drive-ready state must be switched off.

If the vehicle has been in rest state for

several days, contactless unlocking/locking

is not possible until the vehicle has been

driven.

When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,

make sure that all doors and the luggage com-

partment are closed.

For further information:

If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change

the position of the Key Card and repeat the

process.

For settings, see page 98.

With the Key Card

With the BMW Digital Key

Principle

The Key Card is a chip card on which a digital

key is installed. The key card can be used to

unlock and lock the vehicle.

Depending on the national-market version and

equipment, a digital key can be installed on

a compatible smartphone and used to unlock

and lock the vehicle.

For further information:

Key Card, see page 92.

For further information:

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

General

The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle

Hold the NFC antenna on the smartphone di-

rectly and centrally up against the outside door

86

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

handle on the driver's door. The position of the

NFC antenna will depend on the smartphone

model.

Safety information

WARNING

When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,

make sure that all doors and the luggage com-

partment are closed.

Parts of the body can become trapped when

the tailgate is operated. There is a danger of

injury. When opening and closing, make sure

that the movement range of the tailgate is

kept clear.

Frequently Asked Questions

What measures can be taken to enable a vehi-

cle to be opened if the vehicle key has acciden-

tally been locked inside the vehicle?

WARNING

▷

The Remote Services of the app can be

used to lock and unlock a vehicle, for exam-

ple.

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards

when opened. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. When opening and closing,

make sure that the movement range of the

tailgate is kept clear.

This requires an active BMW Connected-

Drive contract and the app must be instal-

led on a smartphone.

▷

Unlocking of the vehicle can be requested

via the BMW ConnectedDrive call centre.

NOTICE

This requires an active BMW Connected-

Drive contract.

Foreign objects, for example sand or ice, be-

tween the bumper and the tailgate can cause

damage when operating the lower tailgate.

There is a risk of material damage. Before

operating the lower tailgate, remove any for-

eign objects from the bumper and the lower

tailgate.

Access to the luggage

compartment

General

The luggage compartment will be opened to

the configured opening height.

WARNING

Pointed or angular objects can strike the win-

dows and the heating elements during the

journey. There is a danger of injury or mate-

rial damage. Cover edges and make sure that

pointed objects cannot strike the windows.

The tailgate consists of the upper and lower

tailgate. The lower tailgate opens downwards

to make it easier to load the luggage compart-

ment.

The opened lower tailgate can be loaded with

up to 250 kg.

NOTICE

If the tailgate is operated manually in the

wrong order, the tailgate can be damaged.

There is a risk of material damage. Close

the lower tailgate before manually closing the

upper tailgate.

87

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Closing the luggage compartment

With the vehicle key

▷

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key until the upper tailgate

has closed.

General

To prevent the vehicle key from being locked

in, do not place it in the luggage compartment.

▷

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key until the upper tailgate

has closed.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the following settings are pos-

sible:

The lower tailgate closes automatically with

the upper tailgate.

▷

Unlocking the luggage compartment with

the vehicle key also unlocks the doors.

Releasing the button stops the movement.

▷

The vehicle must be unlocked before un-

locking the luggage compartment with the

vehicle key.

If the doors were not unlocked, the luggage

compartment is locked again as soon as it

closes.

▷

Only the upper tailgate or the upper and

lower tailgates together can be opened

with the vehicle key.

On the luggage compartment

General

The tailgate can be operated with

the button on the vehicle key.

With Comfort Access, the luggage compart-

ment can be accessed without activating the

vehicle key.

Operating requirements

To open the luggage compartment with the

vehicle key, the trailer socket must not be oc-

cupied.

The key is automatically detected near the ve-

hicle.

Depending on the national-market version,

compatible smartphones with a digital key are

also detected automatically. In this case, the

luggage compartment can be opened with a

smartphone.

Selector lever position P must be engaged to

open the luggage compartment with the vehi-

cle key.

Opening with the vehicle key must be activated

in the settings.

For further information:

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

For further information:

For settings, see page 98.

Functional prerequisites

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,

in your trouser pocket.

Opening the luggage compartment

▷

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approximately 1 sec-

ond.

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to detect the digital key.

▷

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approximately 1 sec-

ond.

The lower tailgate is also opened if applicable.

88

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

the vehicle in the vicinity of the luggage

compartment.

Opening the upper tailgate

The lower tailgate closes automatically with

the upper tailgate.

Closing the lower tailgate

Make sure that there is no load on the lower

tailgate.

Press the button on the lower tailgate.

▷

Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-

ton on the luggage compartment.

In the interior

With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key

with you and press the button on the lug-

gage compartment.

Functional prerequisites

In order to be able to open the luggage com-

partment with the button in the vehicle interior,

the trailer socket must not be occupied.

Locked doors are not unlocked.

Opening the lower tailgate

The upper tailgate must be open.

In order to be able to close the luggage com-

partment with the button in the interior, the

vehicle key or the digital key must be located in

the interior.

Press the button on the lower tailgate.

Opening the luggage compartment

Closing the upper tailgate

Press the button in the driver's door.

The lower tailgate is also opened if ap-

plicable.

Closing the luggage compartment

Press the button in the driver's door.

The lower tailgate closes automatically with

the upper tailgate.

▷

Press the button on the inside of the

upper tailgate.

Cancelling the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the

following situations:

Press the button on the inside of the

upper tailgate.

The vehicle is locked after the lug-

gage compartment has been closed. For

this to happen, the driver's door must be

closed and the vehicle key must be outside

▷

If the vehicle begins to move.

By pressing the button on the outside of

the luggage compartment. Pressing it again

closes the luggage compartment again.

89

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

By pressing the button on the inside of

the luggage compartment. Pressing it again

closes the luggage compartment again.

General

The availability of the function depends on the

equipment and national-market version.

By pressing the button on the vehicle key.

If the vehicle key is within the sensor range,

the luggage compartment may open or close

inadvertently if you unintentionally move your

foot or if a foot movement is detected.

Pressing the button again continues the

opening process.

Pressing and holding the button again

closes the luggage compartment again.

The sensor range extends to approximately

1.50 m, 5 ft behind the rear area.

▷

By pressing or pulling the button in the

driver's door. Pressing again resumes the

opening procedure.

If you open the luggage compartment contact-

lessly, locked doors will not be unlocked.

depending on the national-market version,

touchless opening of the luggage compart-

ment is also possible for compatible smart-

phones with a digital key.

Cancelling the closing operation

The closing operation is interrupted in the

following situations:

For further information:

▷

When driving off suddenly.

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

By pressing the button on the outside of

the luggage compartment. Pressing it again

opens the luggage compartment again.

Safety information

▷

By pressing the button on the inside of

the luggage compartment. Pressing it again

opens the luggage compartment again.

WARNING

When opening/closing contactlessly, there is

a risk of touching vehicle parts, for example

the hot exhaust system. There is a danger of

injury. Make sure you are standing securely

as you move your foot, and do not touch the

vehicle.

By releasing the button on the vehicle key.

Pressing the button again opens the lug-

gage compartment again.

Pressing and holding it again resumes the

closing operation.

▷

By releasing the button in the driver's door.

Pulling and holding the button again re-

sumes the closing operation.

WARNING

Parts of the body can become trapped when

the tailgate is operated. There is a danger of

injury. When opening and closing, make sure

that the movement range of the tailgate is

kept clear.

Opening and closing the luggage

compartment contactlessly

Principle

Touchless opening and closing of the luggage

compartment is possible when carrying the ve-

hicle key on your person.

Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot

movement in the central rear area and the lug-

gage compartment is opened and closed.

90

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Your leg must move across the ranges of

both sensors.

WARNING

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards

when opened. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. When opening and closing,

make sure that the movement range of the

tailgate is kept clear.

WARNING

Pointed or angular objects can strike the win-

dows and the heating elements during the

journey. There is a danger of injury or mate-

rial damage. Cover edges and make sure that

pointed objects cannot strike the windows.

Before the luggage compartment opens, the

hazard warning lights will flash.

Moving the foot again will stop the opening

procedure. The subsequent foot movement

will close the luggage compartment again.

Operating requirements

Closing the luggage compartment

Perform the foot movement for opening the

luggage compartment.

▷

To enable the touchless opening of the lug-

gage compartment, the trailer socket must

not be occupied.

The hazard warning lights flash and an acous-

tic signal sounds.

Selector lever position P must be engaged

for touchless opening of the luggage com-

partment.

Moving the foot again will stop the closing op-

eration. The subsequent foot movement will

open the luggage compartment again.

Contactless opening and closing of the lug-

gage compartment must be activated in the

settings.

System limits

Detection of foot movement may be restricted

by the following external circumstances:

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to enable the touchless opening and

closing of the luggage compartment using

the digital key.

▷

Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.

Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.

For further information:

Movement in the vicinity of the sensors may

cause the luggage compartment to open un-

intentionally, for example if water flows under-

neath the vehicle during cleaning or in heavy

rain. To prevent the luggage compartment

from opening unintentionally, make sure that

the vehicle key is far enough away from the

rear of the vehicle.

For settings, see page 98.

Opening the luggage compartment

1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap-

proximately an arm's length away from the

rear of the vehicle.

2. Kick your foot as far as possible underneath

the vehicle and immediately pull it back.

91

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of

registered digital keys.

Malfunction

In the event of an electrical fault, operate the

unlocked luggage compartment manually with

a slow and smooth motion.

Operating requirements

To activate and deactivate the Key Card, there

must be a vehicle key in the vehicle.

Key Card

Activating the Key Card

Dock with thermal cup holder:

Principle

The Key Card can be used to lock, unlock and

start the vehicle.

General

The availability of the Key Card depends on

the equipment and national-market version.

A digital key that has already been paired with

the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The

digital key must be activated via iDrive.

Dock without thermal cup holder:

When you exit the vehicle, deactivate the Key

Card or take the Key Card with you, as it can

be used to start the vehicle when activated. Al-

ways take the vehicle key with you to a service

appointment.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the

wireless charging tray at the same time, the

Key Card may be damaged. There is a risk of

material damage. Do not place the Key Card

in the wireless charging tray at the same time

as a mobile device.

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

2. Place the Key Card in the middle of the

smartphone tray.

3. Follow instructions on the control display.

Deactivating the Key Card

1.

Apps menu

Activating/deactivating the Key Card

in the vehicle

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Digital Key"

General

5. "Key Card"

If BMW Digital Key is enabled for the vehicle, a

digital key can be used instead of the vehicle

key.

6. "Deactivate Key Card"

92

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of

registered digital keys.

BMW Digital Key

Principle

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

BMW Digital Key allows you to use a compat-

ible smartphone to lock, unlock and start the

vehicle.

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with

the activated Key Card.

For further information:

Access to the vehicle interior, see page 83.

General

The availability and scope of functions of BMW

Digital Key depend on the equipment and na-

tional-market version.

Switching on drive-ready state

Dock with thermal cup holder:

BMW Digital Key can be used with a compati-

ble smartphone or other compatible end devi-

ces.

To unlock and start a vehicle with a compati-

ble smartphone, this function must be offered

by the smartphone manufacturer. It is possi-

ble to check in the My BMW App whether the

smartphone and the vehicle are compatible

and which functions are supported.

Dock without thermal cup holder:

A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual

settings can be assigned to a digital key.

When using a smartphone as a digital key, it

is helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card

in the vehicle. In situations where the vehicle

has to be handed over to another person, the

Key Card can be handed over instead of the

smartphone. For this, the Key Card must be

activated via iDrive.

Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-

ice appointment.

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

For further information:

2. Place the activated Key Card in the middle

of the smartphone tray.

▷

BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 73.

Key Card, see page 92.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

www.bmw.com/digitalkey

After turning on the drive-ready state, the Key

Card can be taken out of the storage tray.

Malfunction

Objects between the sensors and the Key

Card, for example a purse/wallet or smart-

phone case, may prevent the vehicle from de-

tecting the Key Card.

93

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Limiting the range of functions

Operating requirements

Certain functions of the digital key can be limi-

ted before handing it over. For example, re-

strictions on driving stability control systems

can be suppressed and engine performance

can be reduced before the digital key is given

to a beginner driver. Further information can

be found on the ConnectedDrive portal and in

the My BMW App.

▷

The smartphone is compatible with BMW

Digital Key.

The vehicle is linked with the Connected-

Drive account of the registered keeper.

The smartphone battery is sufficiently

charged. The minimum battery charge re-

quired depends on the smartphone in

question.

Authentication

Depending on the recipient's smartphone

model, authentication may be required for se-

curity reasons.

Enabling the main digital key

The registered keeper's smartphone is ena-

bled as the main digital key in the vehicle.

To do so, the registered keeper must provide

proof of authorisation for their vehicle.

An authorised vehicle key, the main digital key

or another method can be used to perform the

authentication. Corresponding information is

displayed for your attention on the smartphone

or control display.

Proof of authorisation can be started via the

My BMW App or via the activation code in the

corresponding smartphone function, for exam-

ple, in the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must

be in the vehicle during activation.

Deleting digital keys

Follow the activation instructions in the Digital

Key menu in the app or on the control display.

General

Deleted digital keys are removed from the list

of enabled digital keys.

Sharing digital keys

Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.

General

Digital Key enables digital keys to be shared

with other people. This option is provided via

the smartphone enabled as the main digital

key. This function must be supported by the

smartphone.

Deleting the digital master key

The digital master key can be deleted from the

smartphone or via iDrive.

The deletion of the digital master key is com-

pleted immediately.

Passing on authorisation

To share the digital key, select the correspond-

ing function on the smartphone, for example in

the Wallet app.

Deleting a shared key

Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-

phone associated with the digital main key, via

the smartphone associated with the key to be

deleted or via iDrive.

As soon as a digital key is shared with a per-

son, this person receives an invitation. If the in-

vitation is accepted, the digital key is activated

on the recipient's smartphone.

A shared key will only be deleted via the

smartphone associated with the main digital

key if the vehicle is being used with a key other

than the one that is to be deleted.

94

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Deletion via the smartphone associated with

the key to be deleted or via iDrive will take

place immediately.

locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-

tion.

Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-

phone for contactless unlocking and locking

with the digital key.

Deletion in iDrive

To enable a digital key to be deleted via iDrive,

there must be an authorised vehicle key in the

vehicle or the digital main key must be in the

smartphone tray.

For further information:

Access to the vehicle interior, see page 83.

Switching on drive-ready state

1.

Apps menu

Using the smartphone tray

2. "Vehicle apps"

Dock with thermal cup holder:

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Digital Key"

5. Select a digital key as necessary.

6. Delete the Digital Key.

Resetting the function

To reset BMW Digital Key function, there must

be an authorised vehicle key in the vehicle.

All digital keys, including the main key, are de-

leted when the BMW Digital Key function is

reset. The digital key of the Key Card is not

deleted.

Dock without thermal cup holder:

Following the reset, it will no longer be possi-

ble to lock, unlock or start the vehicle with a

digital key.

The main digital key must be enabled again in

order to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Digital Key"

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the

smartphone tray.

5. "Reset function"

Make sure that the display is pointing up-

wards.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-

lows:

3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.

4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the

drive-ready state.

▷

Via the outside door handle.

With Comfort Access: depending on the na-

tional-market version, the vehicle can be

95

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

The smartphone is shielded from the sen-

sors in the vehicle by an unsuitable smart-

phone cover.

In the interior

With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending

on the national-market version, for the smart-

phone with activated Bluetooth to be located in

the interior. Press the Start/Stop button to turn

on the drive-ready state.

▷

There are objects between the smartphone

and its cover, for example a card with a chip

or the Key Card.

Fault of the connection from transmission

towers or other equipment with high trans-

mitting power.

Selling the smartphone

Delete all digital keys from the smartphone

before selling it. This ensures that the smart-

phone can no longer be used for the vehicle.

Shielding of the smartphone due to build-

ings or metal objects.

Changing smartphones

Central locking buttons

In order to be able to use a new smartphone

as a digital main key, the new smartphone

must be activated in accordance with the de-

scription for the digital main key. The previous

main key is deleted when the new smartphone

is activated.

General

The vehicle is automatically locked when mov-

ing off.

If an accident of appropriate severity occurs,

the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The haz-

ard warning lights and the interior lights illumi-

nate.

Selling the vehicle

Before selling a vehicle, reset the digital key

function or remove the vehicle from the Con-

nectedDrive account of the current registered

keeper.

Overview

If the vehicle is removed from the Connected-

Drive account, all digital keys for the vehicle

are deleted. The digital key of the Key Card is

not deleted.

System limits

With a digital key, it is not possible to switch off

the interior movement sensor and the tilt alarm

sensor of the alarm system.

The central locking system buttons are located

on the front door.

For further information:

Alarm system, see page 100.

Locking the vehicle

Malfunction

It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the

digital key in some circumstances, including

the following:

Press the button with the front doors

closed.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Locking does not activate the vehicle's anti-

theft protection system.

96

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Unlocking the vehicle

Valet parking mode

Press the key.

Principle

The control display is disabled in valet parking

mode.

To open the door

This mode can be used, for example, if the ve-

hicle is to be handed over to a parking service.

▷

Press the button to unlock all the

doors together.

Pull the door handle above the arm-

General

rest.

Depending on the national-market version, the

valet parking mode may not be available.

▷

Pull the door handle on the door being

opened. The other doors remain locked.

Valet parking mode includes the following re-

strictions:

Soft-close function for doors

▷

Changes to the vehicle settings via iDrive

are not possible.

Principle

▷

Settings stored in a BMW ID or a guest pro-

file cannot be changed.

The soft-close function reduces the effort and

noise when closing doors.

▷

Personal data cannot be displayed.

The door can be pushed into the door lock

without effort, and the door automatically

closes completely.

The volume of the audio system is limited.

The integrated universal remote control is

deactivated.

▷

The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be

deactivated.

Safety information

The availability of certain settings of the

drive modes is restricted.

WARNING

Parts of the body can become trapped when

the doors are operated. There is a danger of

injury. When opening and closing, make sure

that the movement range of the doors is kept

clear.

For further information:

BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 73.

Operating requirements

The driver has registered in the vehicle with a

BMW ID.

Closing

To close, press the door gently.

Activating valet parking mode

1.

Apps menu

The closing process is automatic.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Valet parking mode"

5. If necessary, "PIN"

97

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

If the active BMW ID does not have an as-

signed PIN, create a PIN. The PIN is nee-

ded to deactivate the valet parking mode.

Touchless unlocking/locking

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

6. If necessary, enter the PIN.

7. "Activate valet parking mode"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Comfort access"

5. Select the desired setting.

Deactivating valet parking mode

1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock

screen.

Automatic unlocking

1.

Apps menu

2.

▷

Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.

2. "Vehicle apps"

If the PIN was forgotten: enter access

data for the BMW ID.

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

▷

If the selected BMW ID does not have

an assigned PIN: enter access data for

the BMW ID.

5. Select the desired setting:

▷

"Unlock doors at end of trip"

"Unlock doors when in P"

Settings

After drive-ready state has been switched off

by pressing the Start/Stop button or by engag-

ing the selector lever position P, the locked ve-

hicle is automatically unlocked.

General

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, various settings are possible

for opening and closing.

Automatic locking

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Unlocking and locking

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

Doors

1.

Apps menu

5. "Lock after a short time"

2. "Vehicle apps"

The vehicle is automatically locked again after

a short while if no doors are opened after un-

locking.

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

5. "Unlock"

Vehicle acknowledgement signals

6. Select the desired setting:

1.

Apps menu

▷

"Driver's door only"

2. "Vehicle apps"

Only the driver's door and fuel filler flap

are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks

the entire vehicle.

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

5. Select the desired setting:

▷

"All doors"

▷

"Flash on lock/unlock"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

98

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Unlocking is acknowledged by two

flashes, locking by one flash.

Tailgate and doors

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, this setting may not be avail-

able.

▷

With alarm system:

"Sound on lock/unlock"

Unlocking is acknowledged by two

acoustic signals, locking by one acoustic

signal.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Tailgate"

Automatic folding of the mirrors

5. Select the desired button.

6. Select the desired setting:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

▷

"Upper tailgate"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Lock/unlock"

The upper tailgate is opened.

"Upper tailgate and door(s)"

▷

5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"

The tailgate is opened and doors are

unlocked.

Luggage compartment

▷

"Both tailgates"

Upper or both tailgates

For the button in the interior, it is possible to

set whether only the upper tailgate is opened

or the upper and lower tailgates together:

The upper and lower tailgates are

opened.

"Both tailgates and door(s)"

The upper and lower tailgates are

opened and the doors are unlocked.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

The following settings are available for

the button on the vehicle key:

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Tailgate"

▷

"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is already

unlocked"

5. Select the desired setting:

▷

"Upper tailgate"

The vehicle must be unlocked before the

tailgate can be operated with the vehicle

key.

Only the upper tailgate is opened.

"Both tailgates"

▷

"Lock tailgate button"

The upper and lower tailgates are

opened together.

Operation of the tailgate with the vehicle

key is disabled.

In order to open the upper and lower

tailgates together, the upper tailgate

must still be closed when operating the

button.

Adjusting the opening height

The extent to which the upper tailgate opens

can be set.

This setting also applies to contactless

opening of the tailgate.

99

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

When setting the opening height, make sure

that there is a clearance of at least 10 cm, 4 in

above the tailgate.

▷

Opening a door, the bonnet or the luggage

compartment.

▷

Movements inside the vehicle interior.

1.

Apps menu

A change in the vehicle's angle of inclina-

tion, for instance if an attempt is made to

jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it

prior to towing away.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Tailgate"

▷

An interruption in the battery voltage.

Improper use of the diagnostic socket.

5. "Opening height"

6. Watch the tailgate and set the desired

opening height.

Locking the vehicle while a device is con-

nected to the on-board diagnostic socket.

The alarm system indicates these changes vis-

ually and audibly:

Opening/closing the luggage

compartment contactlessly

▷

Acoustic alarm:

1.

Apps menu

Depending on local regulations, the acous-

tic alarm may be suppressed.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Tailgate"

▷

Optical alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning lights

and, if applicable, the headlights.

5. Select the desired setting.

To safeguard operation of the alarm system,

do not modify the system.

Closing the glass sunroof

automatically

1.

Apps menu

Turning the alarm system on/off

The alarm system is switched on or off as

soon as the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Close sunroof automatically"

If the vehicle is locked remotely from a dis-

tance with the My BMW App, the alarm system

is not switched on.

After locking, the open glass sunroof is auto-

matically moved to the raised position in the

event of rain or after six hours.

Opening the doors when the alarm

system is switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door is

opened if it has been unlocked via the door

lock using the integrated key.

Alarm system

Principle

The alarm system visually and acoustically

signals when someone attempts to open the

locked vehicle.

Opening the luggage compartment

with the alarm system turned on

The luggage compartment can be opened

even when the alarm system is turned on.

General

After closing the luggage compartment, the

luggage compartment will be locked and moni-

The alarm system responds to the following

changes in a locked vehicle:

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

tored again. The hazard warning lights flash

once during closing.

The alarm system responds, for example when

there is an attempt to steal a wheel or tow the

vehicle away.

Indicator light on the interior mirror

Interior movement detector

The vehicle interior is monitored.

The alarm system responds when movement

is detected in the vehicle interior.

To ensure perfect functioning, the windows

and glass sunroof must be closed.

Avoiding false warnings

▷

The indicator light flashes every 2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

General

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior move-

ment detector may trigger an alarm even

though no unauthorised activity is taking place.

The indicator light flashes for approxi-

mately 10 seconds then switches to flash-

ing every 2 seconds:

Situations where false warnings may occur:

The interior movement detector and tilt

alarm sensor are not active because the

doors, bonnet or tailgate are not closed

correctly. Correctly closed access points are

secured.

▷

In washing bays or car washes.

In two-level garages.

When transporting the vehicle via motorail,

car ferry or trailer.

▷

When there are pets in the vehicle.

Once the remaining open access points

have been closed, the interior movement

detector and tilt alarm sensor are switched

on.

When the vehicle is locked after starting to

refuel.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement

detector can be switched off for such situa-

tions.

▷

The indicator light flashes even though all

accesses have been closed:

Error in the alarm system.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior movement detector

The indicator light extinguishes after the

vehicle has been unlocked:

Within 10 seconds of locking the vehi-

cle, press the button on the vehicle key.

This means that the vehicle is not being

tampered with.

The indicator light illuminates for ap-

proximately 2 seconds and then flashes again.

▷

The indicator light flashes after unlocking

until drive-ready state is switched on, but

for no longer than approximately 5 minutes:

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior move-

ment detector are switched off until the next

time the vehicle is locked.

The alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The vehicle's angle of inclination is monitored.

Ending the alarm

Unlock the vehicle.

101

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated

key, drive-ready state must then be turned on

via emergency detection of the vehicle key.

Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-

rors are folded in provided that they were not

folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the

hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-

terior mirrors are not folded in.

Window

On the outside door handle

General

Principle

If a window is often opened in the same lo-

cation, this task can be carried out by the

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. Useful, for

example, if the same multi-storey car park is

frequently used.

The windows can be closed via the outside

door handle without operating the vehicle key.

The vehicle key is automatically detected near

the vehicle.

For further information:

General

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see

page 59.

The function is available with Comfort Access.

Depending on the national-market version, the

windows can also be closed at the outside

door handle with compatible smartphones with

digital key.

Safety information

WARNING

For further information:

Parts of the body can become trapped when

the windows are operated. There is a danger

of injury or material damage. When opening

and closing, make sure that the movement

range of the windows is kept clear.

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

Functional prerequisites

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,

in your trouser pocket.

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to close the windows with the digital

key.

With the vehicle key

Opening windows

Close windows

Keep the button on the vehicle key

pressed after unlocking.

The windows open for as long as the button

on the vehicle key remains pressed.

Close windows

Keep the button on the vehicle key

pressed after locking.

The windows close for as long as the button

on the vehicle key remains pressed.

Touch the grooved surface on the outside door

handle of a closed front door with your finger

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

and hold it there without gripping the door

handle.

The window is opened automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the move-

ment.

In addition to locking, the windows and the

glass sunroof with sun protection are closed.

Close windows

Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-

rors are folded in provided that they were not

folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the

hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-

terior mirrors are not folded in.

▷

Pull the switch as far as the resist-

ance point.

The window closes for as long as

the switch is held.

▷

Pull the switch past the resistance

point.

In the interior

The window closes automatically.

Pulling the switch again stops the move-

ment.

Overview

Anti-trap mechanism

Principle

The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or

parts of the body from becoming trapped be-

tween the door frame and window while a win-

dow is being closed.

Window lifters

General

If resistance or an obstruction is detected while

a window is being closed, the closing process

is interrupted.

Operating requirements

▷

Standby state is switched on.

Safety information

Drive-ready state is switched on.

For a short while after rest state has been

established.

WARNING

Accessories on the windows, for example

aerials, can impair the anti-trap mechanism.

There is a danger of injury. Do not attach

any accessories within the movement range

of the windows.

The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside

of the vehicle.

Opening windows

▷

Press the switch as far as the resist-

ance point.

The window opens for as long as

the switch is held.

▷

Press the switch past the resistance

point.

103

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Closing with no anti-trap mechanism

If an external hazard or ice prevents normal

closure, proceed as follows:

Safety switch

Principle

The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-

dren from opening and closing the rear win-

dows with the switches in the rear, for exam-

ple.

1.

Pull the switch past the resistance

point and hold it in this position.

The window is closed but with restricted

anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force

exceeds a certain level, the closing opera-

tion is interrupted.

If an accident of appropriate severity occurs,

the safety function is automatically switched

off.

Overview

2.

Pull the switch past the resistance

point again within approximately 4 seconds

and hold it in this position.

The window is closed with no anti-trap

mechanism.

Window roller sunblinds

Safety information

WARNING

Safety switch

When the roller sunblinds are closed and the

windows opened, the roller sunblinds can be

heavily stressed during the journey due to the

air stream. The roller sunblinds can become

damaged and endanger vehicle occupants.

There is a danger of injury. Do not open the

windows during the journey when the roller

sunblinds are closed.

Turning the safety functions on/off

Press the key.

The LED is illuminated when the safety

function is switched on.

Glass sunroof

Safety information

WARNING

Operating requirements

The affected window must be closed.

Operation

Pull the roller sunblind out with the loop and

hook into the holder.

Parts of the body may become trapped when

the glass sunroof is operated. There is a

danger of injury. When opening and closing,

make sure that the movement range of the

glass sunroof is kept clear.

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Closing the glass sunroof

With the vehicle key

Opening the glass sunroof

Keep the button on the vehicle key

pressed after unlocking.

The electric glass sunroof with sun protection

is opened for as long as the button on the

vehicle key is pressed.

Closing the glass sunroof

Touch the grooved surface on the outside door

handle of a closed front door with your finger

and hold it there without gripping the door

handle.

Keep the button on the vehicle key

pressed after locking.

The electric glass sunroof with sun protection

is closed for as long as the button on the vehi-

cle key is pressed.

In addition to locking, the windows and the

glass sunroof with sun protection are closed.

Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-

rors are folded in provided that they were not

folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the

hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-

terior mirrors are not folded in.

Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-

rors are folded in provided that they were not

folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the

hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-

terior mirrors are not folded in.

In the interior

On the outside door handle

Operating requirements

The glass sunroof and the sun protection can

be operated under the following conditions:

Principle

The glass sunroof can be closed with the out-

side door handle without operating the vehicle

key.

▷

Standby state is switched on.

Drive-ready state is switched on.

The vehicle key is automatically detected near

the vehicle.

For a short while after rest state has been

established.

The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior.

General

The function is available with Comfort Access.

General

The glass sunroof and the sun protection are

operated using the same switch.

Functional prerequisites

▷

Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,

in your trouser pocket.

▷

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone to close the glass sunroof with the

digital key.

105

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

The glass sunroof closes for as long as

the switch is held. If the glass sunroof is

already closed or is in the raised position,

the sun protection is closed.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

▷

Slide the switch backwards beyond the re-

sistance point.

The sun protection is opened automatically.

If the sun protection is already fully open,

the glass sunroof is opened automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the move-

ment.

▷

Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-

sistance point.

To open/close the glass sun-

roof/sun protection.

The glass sunroof is closed automatically.

If the glass sunroof is already closed or is

in the raised position, the sun protection is

closed automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the move-

ment.

Raising/closing the glass sunroof

Press the switch briefly up.

▷

The closed glass sunroof is

raised and the sun protection

opens slightly.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sun protection together

▷

Slide the switch back beyond

the resistance point twice in

quick succession.

▷

The opened glass sunroof

closes to the raised position.

The sun protection does not

move.

The glass sunroof and

the sun protection open to-

gether.

▷

The raised glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again

stops the movement.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sun protection separately

▷

Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-

sistance point twice in quick succession.

▷

Slide the switch backwards

as far as the resistance point

and hold.

The glass sunroof and the sun protection

close together.

The sun protection opens

for as long as the switch

is pressed. If the sun protec-

tion is already fully open, the

glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the move-

ment.

Comfort position

In some models, wind noise levels inside the

vehicle are lowest when the glass sunroof is

not fully open. On these models, the automatic

▷

Slide the switch forwards as far as the re-

sistance point and hold.

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

function initially only opens the glass sunroof

as far as this comfort position.

Anti-trap mechanism

Pressing the switch again in the interior opens

the electric glass sunroof fully.

Principle

The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or

parts of the body from becoming trapped be-

tween the roof frame and glass sunroof while

the glass sunroof is being closed.

Closing the glass sunroof

automatically

General

Principle

If resistance or an obstruction is detected while

the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing

operation is interrupted once the roof reaches

the half-open position or when closing from

the raised position.

After locking, the open glass sunroof is auto-

matically moved to the raised position in the

event of rain or after six hours.

Operating requirements

▷

Rain must be able to reach the sensor field

in the area of the interior mirror. The sen-

sor field may be obscured by a car port or

bridge, for example.

Closing with no anti-trap mechanism

from an open position

If there is danger from outside the vehicle or

icing, for example, prevents normal closing,

proceed as follows:

▷

Vehicle must be in rest state.

The function must be activated in the set-

tings.

For settings, see page 98.

Malfunctions

The open glass sunroof is not moved to the

raised position under the following circumstan-

ces:

1. Close all doors.

2. Establish drive-ready state or stop a mov-

ing vehicle.

▷

The glass sunroof is blocked.

3. Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-

sistance point and hold it in this position.

The anti-trap mechanism cannot be guar-

anteed.

The glass sunroof is closed with restricted

anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force

exceeds a certain level, the closing opera-

tion is interrupted.

▷

There is a system error, for example due

to a temporary open circuit. In this case,

initialising the glass sunroof can help.

An error message is shown on the control dis-

play. No further closure is attempted.

4. Slide the switch forwards once again be-

yond the resistance point and hold until

the glass sunroof closes with no anti-trap

mechanism. Ensure that the closing range

is clear.

If rain detection is not possible due to the sys-

tem, the open glass sunroof is immediately

moved to the raised position. An error mes-

sage is shown on the control display.

107

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

▷

If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens, then

closes again.

Closing with no anti-trap mechanism

from a raised position

If an external hazard or ice prevents normal

closure, proceed as follows:

If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,

then opens and closes again.

In the closed position, the sun protection is

initialized.

Initialisation is complete once the glass sun-

roof and sun visor have opened, then closed

again.

1. Close all doors.

2. Establish drive-ready state or stop a mov-

ing vehicle.

3. Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-

sistance point and hold it in this position.

Initialising after an open circuit

General

If a open circuit occurs while the glass sunroof

is opening or closing, it may only have restric-

ted functionality afterwards. In this case, initial-

ising the system can help.

The system can be initialised if the following

conditions are met:

▷

The vehicle is parked on level ground.

The vehicle does not move until initialisa-

tion is complete.

▷

Drive-ready state is activated.

The outside temperature is above

5 ℃/41 ℉.

During initialisation, the glass sunroof closes

with no anti-trap mechanism.

Ensure that the closing range is clear.

Initialising the system

Press the switch up and hold

until initialisation is complete:

Initialisation begins within 15 seconds.

108

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle equipment

WARNING

If the backrest is angled too far back, the pro-

tective effect of the seat belt will no longer

be guaranteed. There is a risk of sliding un-

der the seat belt in the event of an accident.

There is a danger of injury or danger to life.

Adjust the seat before starting the journey.

Adjust the backrest to the most upright posi-

tion possible, and do not change it during the

journey.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Safe seating position

WARNING

A seat position that suitably meets the needs

of the occupants is essential for relaxed driving

with minimum fatigue.

There is a risk of entrapment when the seats

are moved. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. Before making any adjust-

ment, make sure that the movement range of

the seat is clear.

In an accident, the correct seat position plays

an important role. Pay attention to the notes in

the following chapters.

For further information:

▷

Seats, see page 109.

Adjusting the seats

Seat belts, see page 116.

Head restraints, see page 119.

Airbags, see page 187.

General

The current seat position can be saved using

the memory function.

Overview

Seats, front

Safety information

WARNING

Setting the seat during a journey could cause

the seat to move unexpectedly. You could

lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of

accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's

side when at a standstill.

The switches for the seat settings are located

at the front seats.

109

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Adjusting the forward/back position

Adjusting the backrest angle

Press the switch forwards or backwards.

Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the height

Adjusting the seat position

automatically

General

The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored

in the active BMW ID or in the active driver

profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is

reactivated at a later time, the stored position

is loaded automatically.

Activating/deactivating the function

Press the switch up or down.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Adjusting the seat angle

3. "Seat comfort"

4. Select driver’s seat.

5. "Set automatically"

6. Select the desired setting.

Tilt the switch up or down.

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

The curvature is shifted upwards/down-

wards.

Thigh support

Sport seat

Backrest width

Principle

The backrest width can be adjusted to improve

lateral support when cornering.

General

The backrest width is changed by adjusting

the side sections of the backrest.

Pull the lever on the front of the seat and ad-

just the thigh support forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the backrest width

▷

Press the button at the front:

Backrest width is reduced.

Press the button at the rear:

Backrest width is increased.

Multifunction seat

▷

Backrest upper section

Principle

The backrest upper section provides support

for the back in the shoulder region. When ad-

justed correctly, it ensures a relaxed seat posi-

tion, and reduces strain on the shoulder mus-

cles.

Press the switch forwards or backwards.

Lumbar support

General

Principle

When getting out of the vehicle, the backrest

upper section moves all the way back. Before

the start of the journey, the last set position is

automatically moved to.

The curvature of the backrest can be changed

to provide support for the lumbar region, or

lordosis. The upper edge of the pelvis and the

spinal column are supported to encourage an

upright sitting posture.

Adjusting the lumbar support

▷

Press the button at the front/rear:

The curvature is increased/de-

creased.

▷

Press the button at the top/bottom:

111

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Adjusting the backrest upper section

Switching on

1.

Press the button. The LED is illumi-

nated.

2. Use the driver's seat switches to adjust the

front passenger seat.

3. If required, save the memory position for

the front passenger seat position.

Switching off

▷

Press the button at the front:

Press the key. The LED is extin-

guished.

The backrest upper section is tilted for-

wards.

The function is also disabled automati-

cally after a period of time.

Press the button at the rear:

The backrest upper section is tilted back-

wards.

Seat massage

Front passenger seat functionality

Principle

The seat massage ensures relaxed muscles

and better blood circulation in the back region

and can prevent signs of fatigue.

Principle

The front passenger seat can be adjusted us-

ing the switches on the driver's seat, for exam-

ple to increase the legroom in the rear.

General

If necessary, the front passenger seat position

can be saved using the memory function.

Eight different massage programmes can be

selected:

▷

Pelvic activation.

Overview

Upper-body activation.

Whole body mobilisation.

Back massage.

Buttons in the vehicle

Shoulder massage.

Lumbar massage.

Upper-body training.

Whole body exercise.

Front passenger seat functionality

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-

ting, the front seats must be calibrated.

Overview

Buttons in the vehicle

Safety information

WARNING

There is a risk of entrapment when the seats

are moved. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. Before making any adjust-

ment, make sure that the movement range of

the seat is clear.

Massage function

Calibrating the front seat

1. Push the switch forward again in a longitu-

dinal direction until the seat stops.

Switching on

2. Push the switch forward again until the seat

stops.

Press the button once for each inten-

sity level.

3. Reset the desired seat position.

The highest intensity level is selected if

the three LEDs are illuminated.

As soon as the message on the control dis-

play disappears, the calibration is complete.

If the message remains active, repeat the cali-

bration.

Switching off

If the message is not hidden after repeated

calibration, have the system checked by an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Press and hold the button until the

LEDs are extinguished.

Selecting the massage programme

1.

Apps menu

Rear seats

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Seat comfort"

Second-row seating

4. Select the desired seat.

5. "Seat massage"

General

6. Select the desired setting.

The backrest angle and the forward/back posi-

tion of the second row of seats can be adjus-

ted.

Calibrating the front seats

The backrest angle for the middle section is

adjusted together with the left rear seat back-

rest.

General

As soon as the electric seat adjustment no lon-

ger functions precisely, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed on the control display.

113

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Safety information

Overview

WARNING

There is a risk of entrapment when the seats

are moved. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. Before making any adjust-

ment, make sure that the movement range of

the seat is clear.

The switches for the seat settings are located

on the seats.

WARNING

There is a risk of entrapment when folding

down the centre armrest in the rear. There is

a danger of injury. When folding down, make

sure that the movement range of the centre

armrest is kept clear.

Selecting the base position

WARNING

There is risk of entrapment when folding

back the second-row seating. There is a dan-

ger of injury or material damage. Before fold-

ing back the second-row seating, make sure

that the movement range of the seats is kept

clear.

Press the button to move the seat to the base

position.

The process is cancelled if the button is

pressed again.

WARNING

Longitudinal direction

In the folded down state, the seats of the

second-row seating are not locked and can

move. There is a danger of injury or material

damage. Fold the seats of the second-row

seating only down with load. When driving

without load, fold back and lock the seats of

the second-row seating prior to departure.

Press the switch forwards or backwards.

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

The position of the front seats will be adjusted

automatically if necessary to avoid a collision.

Backrest angle

If the second-row seating is not locked in posi-

tion, an acoustic signal will sound and a warn-

ing icon is shown in the instrument cluster.

Third-row seating

General

The third-row seating consists of two split

seats.

Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.

Folding up the rear seat backrest

Access to the third-row seating

Safety information

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-

cured load may be flung into the interior,

for example in the event of an accident or

when braking or taking avoidance manoeu-

vre. There is a danger of injury. Make sure

that the rear seat backrest is locked after it

has been folded back.

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-

cured load may be flung into the interior,

for example in the event of an accident or

when braking or taking avoidance manoeu-

vre. There is a danger of injury. Make sure

that the rear seat backrest is locked after it

has been folded back.

1. Fold up the rear seat backrest and engage.

Folding down rear seat backrest

1. Fold up the middle part of the second-row

seating if necessary.

2. Press the switch forwards or backwards

once.

2. Set the head restraint correctly if necessary.

The seat moves automatically into the respec-

tive end position.

115

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Unlocking from the second-row seating

Folding down rear seat backrest

1. Push the head restraints downwards, see

page 120.

2. Push the lever forwards to unlock the rear

seat backrest.

Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest

forwards.

Unlocking from the third-row seating

3. Fold the rear seat backrest downwards.

Getting out from the third-row seating

Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest

forwards.

The second-row seating can be folded down

via the switch.

Seat belts

For further information:

General

Access to the third-row seating, see page 115

For the safety of the vehicle occupants, the ve-

hicle is equipped with five or seven seat belts.

However, they can only provide a protective

effect when applied correctly.

Rear seat backrest emergency release

General

Before each journey, always make sure that

all occupants have fastened their seat belts.

The airbags supplement the seat belts as an

additional safety device. The airbags are not a

substitute for the seat belts.

The two outer backrests of the second-row

seating can be folded down manually, for ex-

ample if there is an electrical fault.

All belt anchorages are designed to achieve

the best possible protective effect of the seat

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

belts with proper use of the seat belts and cor-

rect seat setting.

Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as

possible, consistent with comfort, to provide

the protection for which they have been de-

signed. A slack seat belt will greatly reduce

the protection afforded to the wearer.

The two outer seat belt buckles on the rear

seats are intended for those sitting on the left

and right.

Care should be taken to avoid contamina-

tion of the seat belt strap by polishes, oils

and chemicals and particularly battery acid.

Cleaning may safely be carried out using

a mild soap and water solution. The seat

belt should be replaced if the seat belt strap

becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

Seat belts should not be worn with straps

twisted. Each seat belt assembly must only

be used by one occupant; it is forbidden to

put a belt around a child being carried on the

occupant's lap.

The inner seat belt buckle on the rear seats is

intended for the person sitting in the middle.

For further information:

Notes on sitting safely, see page 109.

Safety information

WARNING

If a seat belt is used by more than one per-

son at the same time, the protective effect of

the seat belt is no longer guaranteed. There

is a danger of injury or danger to life. Only

one person should use each seat belt at any

one time. Do not allow infants and children

to travel on the lap of another occupant. In-

stead, secure the infant or child in child re-

straint systems intended for this purpose.

It is essential to replace the entire seat belt

assembly after it has been worn in a severe

impact even if damage to the assembly is not

obvious.

WARNING

No modifications or additions should be

made by the user that will either prevent the

seat belt adjusting devices from operating to

remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem-

bly from being adjusted to remove slack.

WARNING

The protective effect of the seat belts may be

restricted or may even fail completely if the

seat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is

not worn correctly, additional injuries can be

caused, for example in the event of an acci-

dent, braking or avoidance manoeuvre. There

is a danger of injury or danger to life. Make

sure that all vehicle occupants have fastened

their seat belts correctly.

WARNING

If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the

protective effect of the middle seat belt is not

ensured. There is a danger of injury or dan-

ger to life. Lock the wider rear seat backrest

when using the middle seat belt.

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the

bony structure of the body and should be

worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the

pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable.

Wearing the lap section of the belt across the

abdominal area must be avoided.

WARNING

The protective effect of the seat belts may be

restricted or may even fail completely in the

following situations:

117

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

▷

If the seat belts or seat belt buckles are

damaged, dirty or have been modified in

another way.

▷

The length of the diagonal shoulder strap

adjusts itself automatically to allow free-

dom of movement.

The seat belt tensioners or belt retrac-

tors have been modified.

To release the seat belt, press the button

on the seat belt buckle.

Seat belts can be damaged in an accident

without the damage necessarily being appa-

rent. There is a danger of injury or danger

to life. Do not modify seat belts, seat belt

buckles, seat belt tensioners, belt retractors

and belt anchor points and ensure that they

are kept clean. After an accident, have the

seat belts inspected at an authorised Service

Partner or another qualified Service Partner

or a specialist workshop.

Fastening the seat belt

1. When fastening the seat belt, guide it

slowly over the shoulder and pelvis.

2. Insert the seat belt tongue in the seat belt

buckle. The seat belt buckle must be heard

to engage.

Correct seat belt use

▷

Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis

and shoulder, close to the body and without

twisting.

Make sure that the seat belt is positioned

low at the hips in the area of the pelvis. The

seat belt must not press on the abdomen.

Unfastening the seat belt

1. Hold the seat belt firmly.

The seat belt must not be allowed to rub

against sharp edges, be routed over solid

or breakable objects or be trapped.

2. Press the red button on the seat belt

buckle.

▷

Avoid wearing bulky clothing.

3. Guide the seat belt back up to the auto-

matic reel.

Keep the seat belt taut by occasionally pull-

ing upwards on the upper body area.

Seat belt warning

Setting for automatic retracting seat

belts

General

Check whether the seat belts are fastened cor-

rectly.

▷

Draw the seat belt tongue attached to the

seat belt across the body and press it into

the seat belt buckle until a 'click' is heard.

The seat belt warning becomes active in the

following situations:

▷

Adjustment of the belt length is very im-

portant. To adjust the lap belt and check

whether the seat belt buckle has locked

correctly, pull upwards on the shoulder

strap until the lap belt fits tightly.

▷

When the seat belt on the driver's side or

on the passenger's side is not fastened.

When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-

ing.

When objects are lying on a seat.

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Display in the instrument cluster

Safety information

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-

minates after turning on the drive-ready state

and the seat belt warning is active.

WARNING

If the head restraints are removed or incor-

rectly adjusted, they cannot provide protec-

tive effect as intended and head and neck in-

juries may result. There is a danger of injury.

A Check Control message is shown where ap-

plicable. Check whether the seat belt has been

fastened correctly.

The displays may vary depending on the

equipment and national-market version.

▷

Before a journey, re-install any removed

head restraints on all occupied seats.

Icon

Meaning

▷

Adjust the head restraint so that its cen-

tre supports the back of the head at eye

level where possible.

Seat belt is not buckled.

▷

Adjust the distance so that the head re-

straint is as close as possible to the back

of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis-

tance by adjusting the backrest angle.

Seat belt is only buckled on the

corresponding seat.

Seat belt on the corresponding

seat is not buckled.

WARNING

Parts of the body can become trapped when

the head restraint is moved. There is a dan-

ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,

make sure that the movement range is kept

clear.

Safety function

In critical driving situations, for example full

braking, the front seat belts are tensioned au-

tomatically.

If the driving situation passes without an acci-

dent, the belt tension is slackened again.

WARNING

If the belt tension does not loosen automati-

cally, stop the vehicle and unfasten the seat

belt by pressing the red button in the seat belt

buckle. Fasten the seat belt again before con-

tinuing driving.

Objects on the head restraint impair the pro-

tective effect of the head restraint in the head

and neck area. There is a danger of injury.

▷

Do not fit any covers on the seats or

head restraints.

Do not hang objects such as coat hang-

ers directly on the head restraint.

Front head restraints

Only use accessories that have been

classified as safe for attaching to the

head restraint.

General

The current head restraint position can be

saved with the memory function.

▷

Do not use any accessories, for example

cushions, during the journey.

119

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Active head restraint

Adjusting the side sections

In the event of a severe rear-end collision, the

active head restraint automatically reduces the

distance to the head.

Check the active head restraint if it has been

subjected to an accident or is damaged, and

have it replaced if necessary.

Adjusting the height

Fold the side sections forwards to increase lat-

eral support in the rest position.

Removing the head restraints

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

WARNING

Press the switch up or down.

Adjusting the distance

If the head restraints are removed or incor-

rectly adjusted, they cannot provide protec-

tive effect as intended and head and neck in-

juries may result. There is a danger of injury.

▷

Before a journey, re-install any removed

head restraints on all occupied seats.

▷

Adjust the head restraint so that its cen-

tre supports the back of the head at eye

level where possible.

▷

Back: press the button and push back the

head restraint.

▷

Adjust the distance so that the head re-

straint is as close as possible to the back

of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis-

tance by adjusting the backrest angle.

Forward: pull the head restraint forwards.

After adjusting the distance, make sure that

the head restraint engages correctly.

120

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Folding down the head restraints

WARNING

Parts of the body can become trapped when

the head restraint is moved. There is a dan-

ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,

make sure that the movement range is kept

clear.

WARNING

▷

Backwards: press the button, arrow 1, and

fold back the head restraint.

Objects on the head restraint impair the pro-

tective effect of the head restraint in the head

and neck area. There is a danger of injury.

Forwards: fold the head restraint forwards

as far as it will go. Ensure that the head

restraint engages correctly.

▷

Do not fit any covers on the seats or

head restraints.

Do not hang objects such as coat hang-

ers directly on the head restraint.

Adjusting the height

Only use accessories that have been

classified as safe for attaching to the

head restraint.

▷

Do not use any accessories, for example

cushions, during the journey.

Folding down the head restraints

General

▷

Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide

the head restraint downwards.

The outer head restraints can be folded back

to improve rear visibility. Only fold back the

head restraint if no one is sitting on the seat in

question.

Up: push the head restraint upwards.

After adjusting the height, make sure that the

head restraint engages correctly.

Removing the head restraint

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Installing head restraints

After installation, make sure that the head re-

straint engages correctly.

121

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Cushions for the rear head

restraints

Overview

Only use the cushions with the vehicle at a

standstill.

1. Adjust the head restraint to a sufficient

height.

2. Attach the cushion and place the cushion

strap around the head restraint, arrow 1.

Icon

Meaning

Fold the exterior mirror in and out.

Adjust the exterior mirrors.

Select exterior mirror, automatic

parking function.

3. Close the press studs, arrow 2.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Press the key.

General

The selected exterior mirror moves

along with the button movement.

The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the

active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If

the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated

at a later time, the stored position is loaded

automatically.

Selecting the exterior mirror

To switch to the other mirror:

Push the switch.

The current exterior mirror adjustment can be

stored using the memory function.

Safety information

Malfunction

In case of an electrical failure, adjust the ex-

terior mirror by pressing on the edges of the

mirror glass.

WARNING

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than

they appear. The distance from road users

behind the vehicle could be incorrectly esti-

mated, for example when changing driving

lane. There is a risk of accident. Look over

your shoulder to estimate the distance from

following traffic.

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Activating the automatic parking

function

Folding in/folding out the exterior

mirror

1.

Push the switch to the driver's mir-

ror position.

NOTICE

Because of its width, the vehicle could sus-

tain damage in car washes. There is a risk

of material damage. Before washing, fold the

mirrors in manually or with the button.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

The automatic parking function is deactivated

when the trailer socket is occupied.

Press the key.

Deactivating the automatic parking

function

Push the switch to the front passenger's side

exterior mirror position.

The mirrors can be folded in at vehicle speeds

up to approx. 20 km/h/15 mph.

Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-

ful in the following situations:

Rear-view mirror with

automatic anti-dazzle

function

▷

In car washes.

In narrow streets.

Mirrors which are folded in automatically fold

out when the vehicle reaches a speed of ap-

proximately 40 km/h/25 mph.

General

The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.

Automatic heating

The function is controlled by photocells:

When required, both exterior mirrors are au-

tomatically heated when drive-ready state is

switched on.

▷

In the mirror glass.

On the back of the mirror.

Overview

Automatic dimming

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is dim-

med automatically. Photocells in the interior

mirror are used to control this function.

Automatic parking function

Principle

When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror

glass on the passenger's side is tilted down-

wards. When parking, for example, this gives

the driver a better view of the kerb or other

objects near the ground.

Operating requirements

▷

Keep the photocells clean.

▷

Do not obstruct the zone between the inte-

rior mirror and the windscreen.

123

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Steering wheel

Safety information

WARNING

Memory function

Principle

The memory function enables the following

settings to be stored and retrieved when re-

quired:

Adjusting the steering wheel while driving

may cause the steering wheel to move unex-

pectedly. You could lose control of the vehi-

cle. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust

the steering wheel when the vehicle is at a

standstill.

▷

Seat position.

Exterior mirror adjustment.

Steering wheel position.

Height of the Head-up display.

General

For each driver profile, two memory slots can

be assigned with different settings.

Electrical steering wheel adjustment

General

The following settings are not saved:

The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the

active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If

the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated

at a later time, the stored position is called up

automatically.

▷

Backrest width.

Lumbar support.

Safety information

The current steering wheel position can be

saved with the memory function.

WARNING

Using the memory function while driving may

cause the seat or steering wheel to move

unexpectedly. You could lose control of the

vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use

the memory function when the vehicle is at

standstill.

Temporarily, the steering wheel moves to the

highest position to facilitate getting into and

out of the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

WARNING

There is a risk of entrapment when the seats

are moved. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. Before making any adjust-

ment, make sure that the movement range of

the seat is clear.

Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel

to the correct forward/back position and height

for your seat position.

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Overview

The memory buttons are on the front doors.

Storing settings

1. Set the desired position.

2.

Press the button. The LED is illumi-

nated.

3. Press the desired Memory button 1 or 2

while the LED is illuminated. A signal

sounds.

Go to Settings

Press the desired Memory button 1 or 2.

The saved position is retrieved.

The operation is halted when a seat set-

ting switch or one of the memory buttons is

pressed again.

The adjustment of the seat position on the

driver's side is interrupted after a short time

while driving.

Seat climate control

Various air conditioning functions are available

for the seats.

For further information:

Air conditioning control, see page 300.

125

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Carrying children safely

Vehicle equipment

WARNING

Child restraint systems and their parts can

get very hot when exposed to direct sun-

light. Contact with hot parts can cause burns.

There is a danger of injury. Do not expose

the child restraint system to direct sunlight;

cover the child restraint system if necessary.

If required, allow the child restraint system to

cool down before transporting a child. Do not

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Important considerations

Safety information

WARNING

Children on the rear seat

General

Accident research has shown that the safest

place for children is on the rear seat.

Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle

can set the vehicle in motion and endanger

themselves or other road users, for example

by the following actions:

Wherever possible, children younger than

12 years old or shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft should

be transported only on the rear seats in child

restraint systems appropriate for their age,

weight and stature. Children aged 12 years and

older must be secured with a seat belt once a

suitable child restraint system is no longer an

option due to their age, weight or stature.

▷

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Opening and closing doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Operating vehicle equipment.

Safety information

There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-

hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-

cle key with you and lock the vehicle.

WARNING

Children shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft cannot

wear the seat belt correctly without using ad-

ditional child restraint systems. The protec-

tive effect of the seat belts may be restricted

or may even fail completely if the seat belts

are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is not worn

correctly, additional injuries can be caused,

for example in the event of an accident, brak-

ing or avoidance manoeuvre. There is a dan-

ger of injury or danger to life. Children shorter

WARNING

Hot vehicle can have fatal consequences,

in particular for children or pets. There is a

danger of injury or danger to life. Do not

leave anyone unsupervised in the vehicle, es-

pecially children or pets.

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

than 150 cm, 5 ft must be secured in suitable

child restraint systems.

Safety information

WARNING

Not for Australia:Children on the

front passenger seat

If child restraint systems and their attach-

ment systems have been damaged or sub-

jected to stresses in an accident, their pro-

tective effect may be restricted or may fail

completely. A child might not be adequately

restrained, for example in the event of an

accident, braking or avoidance manoeuvre.

There is a danger of injury or danger to life.

General

When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, make sure

that the front passenger airbag is deactivated.

If it is not possible to deactivate the front

passenger airbag, do not carry children in

rearward-facing child restraint systems on the

front passenger seat.

Do not continue to use child restraint systems

which are damaged or have been subjected

to stresses in an accident.

If attachment systems have been damaged

or subjected to stresses in an accident, have

them checked and replaced by an authorised

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

For further information:

Deactivation of the front passenger airbag, see

page 189.

Safety information

WARNING

DANGER

If the seat is not set properly or the child

seat has been installed incorrectly, the child

restraint system may have restricted or no

stability at all. There is a danger of injury

or danger to life. Make sure that the child

restraint system rests firmly against the seat

backrest. Wherever possible, adapt the back-

rest angle of all relevant seat backrests and

adjust the seats correctly. Make sure that

the seats and their backrests are correctly

engaged or locked. If possible and if neces-

sary, adjust the height of the head restraints

or remove them.

If triggered, an active front passenger airbag

can fatally injure a child in a child restraint

system which is mounted facing backwards.

There is a danger to life. Make sure that the

front passenger airbag is deactivated and the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is

illuminated.

Fitting child restraint

systems

General

Before installation

Make sure rear seat backrests are locked in

place before fitting child restraint systems.

Please comply with the operating and safety

instructions provided by the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching

and using child restraint systems.

Move rear seats to rearmost position to make

it easier to fit child restraint system.

127

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Third-row seating

Before fitting a child restraint system in the

third-row seating, observe the following, de-

pending on the equipment:

Not for Australia:On the front

passenger seat

Deactivating the airbag

▷

Roll up the luggage compartment cover

and remove the case.

DANGER

Lower the electric luggage compartment

cover.

If triggered, an active front passenger airbag

can fatally injure a child in a child restraint

system which is mounted facing backwards.

There is a danger to life. Make sure that the

front passenger airbag is deactivated and the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is

illuminated.

Remove the luggage compartment partition

net.

Move the seats and backrest of the sec-

ond-row seating all the way forwards.

Fold down and lock the relevant backrest of

the second row of seats.

Before installing a rearward-facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger seat,

make sure that the front passenger airbag is

deactivated. If the airbag cannot be deactiva-

ted, do not install a rearward-facing child re-

straint system.

The head restraints of the third-row seating

are put into the upper position.

Do not make any further changes to the set-

tings.

For Australia: installation of child

restraint systems

Please note the following warning because

your vehicle has been equipped with a front

airbag for the front passenger seat that cannot

be deactivated:

For further information:

Deactivation of the front passenger airbag, see

page 189.

Rearward-facing child restraint

systems

It is not recommended to use rear-

ward-facing child restraint systems on

the front passenger seat.

DANGER

If triggered, an active front passenger airbag

can fatally injure a child in a child restraint

system which is mounted facing backwards.

There is a danger to life. Make sure that the

front passenger airbag is deactivated and the

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is

illuminated.

Extreme hazard

Do not use rearward-facing child restraint

systems on a seat protected by an airbag in

front of it.

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

ISOFIX or i-Size child safety

seat fasteners

General

Please comply with the operating and safety

instructions provided by the, child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching

and using ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys-

tems.

Follow the note on the sun visor on the pas-

senger's side.

Never use rearward facing child restraint sys-

tems on a seat with an activated front airbag.

Use may result in death or serious injury to

children.

Suitable ISOFIX or i-Size child

restraint systems

For further information:

Suitable seats for child restraint systems, see

page 132.

Seat position and height

After installing a universal child restraint sys-

tem, move the front passenger seat as far

back as it will go and adjust it to the high-

est position. This seat position and height pro-

vides the best possible belt routing and protec-

tion in the event of an accident.

i-Size child restraint systems

General

i-Size is a legal regulation for child restraint

systems which is used for the approval of child

restraint systems.

After installing a universal child restraint sys-

tem, adjust the inclination of the seat backrest

to achieve the best possible belt routing.

The system represents a further development

of the ISOFIX child safety seat fasteners.

ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be at-

tached to anchors with i-Size markings.

If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is

in front of the child seat's seat belt guide, care-

fully move the front passenger seat forwards

until the best possible seat belt guide is ach-

ieved.

Icon

Meaning

If this icon is seen in the vehi-

cle, the vehicle has also been

approved in accordance with

i-Size. The icon shows the

mounts for the system's lower

anchors. The lower anchors

meet the European i-Size re-

quirements.

Backrest width

With adjustable backrest width: before instal-

ling a child restraint system on the front pas-

senger seat, fully open the backrest width. Do

not change the backrest width from this point

on and do not retrieve a seat position from the

memory.

The corresponding icon shows

the top tether eyelet.

129

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Safety information

ISOFIX child restraint systems

General

WARNING

ISOFIX is a legal regulation for child restraint

systems which is used for the approval of child

restraint systems.

If the child restraint system lower anchors are

not engaged correctly, the protective effect of

the child restraint system will be restricted.

There is a danger of injury or danger to life.

Make sure the lower anchor points have en-

gaged correctly and the child restraint system

rests firmly against the backrest.

ISOFIX child restraint systems can be attached

to mountings marked with ISOFIX.

Only certain ISOFIX child restraint systems are

permitted for use on the designated seats. The

associated size class and size category are

denoted by a letter or ISO reference on a plate

on the child seat.

WARNING

Icon

Meaning

The mounts for the lower anchors and the

attachment points for child restraint systems

are intended for attaching child restraint sys-

tems only. If other objects are attached, the

mounts or attachment points can be dam-

aged. There is a danger of injury or material

damage. Only attach child restraint systems

to the corresponding mounts for the lower

anchors or the attachment points.

If this icon is seen in the ve-

hicle, the vehicle has been

approved in accordance with

the ISOFIX standard. The icon

shows the mounts for the sys-

tem's lower anchors. The lower

mountings comply with ISOFIX

requirements.

With universal approval: the

corresponding icon shows the

top tether attachment point.

Position

Icon

Meaning

The corresponding icon shows

the fixtures for the lower ISO-

FIX anchors or i-Size mount-

ing.

Fixtures for lower anchors

General

Note the following when fitting child restraint

systems with integrated safety belt to the

mounts for the lower anchors:

The total weight of the child and child restraint

system must not exceed 33 kg, 73 lbs.

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Child restraint systems with

upper restraint strap

General

When attaching child restraint systems to the

upper attachment points, observe the informa-

tion, operating and safety instructions of the

child restraint system manufacturer.

The fixtures for the lower anchors are located

behind the marked covers. To expose the an-

chorage points, open the flaps upwards.

Safety information

WARNING

Before fitting child restraint systems

If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly

on the child restraint system, the protective

effect will be reduced. There is a danger of

injury. Make sure that the upper retaining

strap is not twisted and is not routed to the

upper attachment point over sharp edges.

Pull the seat belt away from the area of the

child seat mountings.

Fitting child restraint systems

1. Install child restraint system, see the manu-

facturer's instructions.

2. Make sure that the child restraint system

attachment correctly engages in the lower

anchor on both sides.

WARNING

If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the

protective effect of the child restraint system

will be restricted or lost. The rear seat back-

rest may fold forward in certain situations, for

example in the event of braking manoeuvre

or an accident. There is a danger of injury or

danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat

backrests are locked.

With comfort seats in the rear: fitting

child restraint systems

To facilitate installation, make additional set-

tings if necessary:

1. Tilt the backrest back slightly.

2. Install child restraint system, see the manu-

facturer's instructions.

3. Make sure that the child restraint system

attachment correctly engages in the lower

anchor on both sides.

WARNING

The mounts for the lower anchors and the

attachment points for child restraint systems

are intended for attaching child restraint sys-

tems only. If other objects are attached, the

mounts or attachment points can be dam-

aged. There is a danger of injury or material

damage. Only attach child restraint systems

to the corresponding mounts for the lower

anchors or the attachment points.

4. After installation, adjust the backrest for-

wards slightly, so that the child restraint

system rests lightly against the backrest.

131

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Attachment points for upper

retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap

to the attachment point

1. Move the seat of the second-row seating to

the base position.

Icon

Meaning

Adjusting the base position, see page 114.

2. Raise head restraint if necessary.

The corresponding icon shows

the top tether eyelet.

3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

or along both sides of the head restraint

mounts to the attachment point.

4. Guide the retaining strap between the seat

backrest and the luggage compartment

cover.

5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the

attachment point.

6. Pull the retaining strap taut.

Suitable seats for child

restraint systems

Depending on the equipment, there are two or

three attachment points for the upper retaining

strap of child restraint systems.

General

The legal provisions determining which child

seat is permitted for which age and body size

may vary from country to country. Please com-

ply with the relevant national legal provisions.

Routing the retaining strap

Additional information is available from an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

For detailed information about using child re-

straint systems:

Seats for child restraint systems, see

page 434.

1

Direction of travel

2

3

4

5

6

Head restraint

Seats and child restraint systems

The following section provides information on

which child restraint system is suitable for

which seat in the vehicle.

Hook of the upper retaining strap

Attachment point

Seat backrest

Left-hand drive vehicles, seats:

Upper retaining strap

132

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Seat

Airbag, front Mounting

passenger

1

3 a)

ON only for-

ward-facing

child restraint

system

OFF only

rearward fac-

ing child re-

straint sys-

tem

4, 6 – b)

5 – c, d)

f)

133

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Seat

Airbag, front Mounting

passenger

7, 9 – e)

a) Move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and adjust it to the highest position.

Then adjust the angle of the backrest to achieve the best possible belt routing.

b) When using child restraint systems on the rear seats, adjust the longitudinal direction of the

front seat if necessary and, if possible and necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the

rear seat.

c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.

d) The seat is not suitable for child restraint systems with a support stand.

e) When using child restraint systems in the third-row seating, move the second-row seating

forwards and lock the backrest in the folded-down position.

f) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.

Right-hand drive vehicle, seats:

Seat

Airbag, front Mounting

passenger

1 a)

ON only for-

ward-facing

child restraint

system

OFF only

rearward fac-

ing child re-

straint sys-

tem

3

134

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Seat

Airbag, front Mounting

passenger

4, 6 – b)

f)

5 – c, d)

7, 9 – e)

a) Move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and adjust it to the highest position.

Then adjust the angle of the backrest to achieve the best possible belt routing.

b) When using child restraint systems on the rear seats, adjust the longitudinal direction of the

front seat if necessary and, if possible and necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the

rear seat.

c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.

d) The seat is not suitable for child restraint systems with a support stand.

e) When using child restraint systems in the third-row seating, move the second-row seating

forwards and lock the backrest in the folded-down position.

f) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.

Icon

Meaning

Icon

Meaning

Not suitable for child restraint systems.

Suitable for ISOFIX child re-

straint systems.

Suitable for belted child restraint systems in the

Universal category.

Suitable for ISOFIX and i-Size

child restraint systems.

Suitable for child restraint systems in the semi-

universal category if the vehicle and seat are

given in the list of vehicle types from the manu-

facturer of the child restraint system.

Suitable for child restraint sys-

tems with an upper retaining

strap.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

the following child restraint systems:

Recommended child seats

▷

Maxi-Cosi Pebble 360.

Please comply with the operating and safety

instructions provided by the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching

and using child restraint systems.

Maxi-Cosi FamilyFix 360 Base.

With i-Size: Römer TRIFIX 2.

With ISOFIX: Römer Duo Plus.

135

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

▷

Maxi-Cosi 2wayPearl & 2wayFix.

danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat

backrests are locked.

Römer KIDFIX series.

For Australia:Child restraint

systems

WARNING

If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly

on the child restraint system, the protective

effect will be reduced. There is a danger of

injury. Make sure that the upper retaining

strap is not twisted and is not routed to the

upper attachment point over sharp edges.

General

In accordance with ADR 34/03, provisions

have been made to allow installation of a child

restraint system at each rear seat position.

The anchoring hooks which belong to the up-

per restraining strap of the child restraint sys-

tem - AS 1754, can be applied immediately to

the relevant mount.

Attachment points

Icon

Meaning

Please refer strictly to the installation instruc-

tions supplied with the child restraint system.

The corresponding icon shows

the top tether eyelet.

Each seat position is fitted with a head re-

straint.

Safety information

WARNING

Anchorages for child restraint systems are

designed to withstand only those loads im-

posed by correctly fitted child restraint sys-

tems. Under no circumstances are they to be

used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for

attaching other items or equipment to the ve-

hicle. After using and removing child restraint

systems, fold away the anchor brackets if

necessary.

Depending on the equipment, there are two

outer attachment points or three other attach-

ment points for child restraint systems with

tether straps.

WARNING

If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the

protective effect of the child restraint system

will be restricted or lost. The rear seat back-

rest may fold forward in certain situations, for

example in the event of braking manoeuvre

or an accident. There is a danger of injury or

136

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Carrying children safely

CONTROLS

Routing the retaining strap

Securing doors and

windows in the rear

General

In certain situations, for example when carry-

ing children, it may be advisable to secure the

rear doors and windows.

Doors

1

Direction of travel

2

3

4

5

6

Head restraint

Hook of the upper retaining strap

Attachment point

Seat backrest

Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap

to the attachment point

1. Move the seat of the second-row seating to

the base position, see page 114.

Push up the locking lever on the rear doors.

The respective door can now only be opened

from the outside.

2. Raise head restraint if necessary.

Rear safety switch

3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the head restraint mounts or along both

sides of the head restraint mounts to the

attachment point.

Middle seat: raise the head restraint if nec-

essary by pressing the button on the brack-

ets. Guide the upper retaining strap be-

tween the head restraint mounts or along

both sides of the head restraint mounts to

the attachment point.

4. Guide the retaining strap between the seat

backrest and the luggage compartment

cover.

Press the button on the driver's door.

Different functions are locked and can-

not be operated in the rear, for exam-

ple the window lifters.

5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the

attachment point.

6. Pull the retaining strap taut.

137

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

Driving

tion of travel and provides assistance when

driving off.

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Driving off

To drive off, press the accelerator pedal.

The parking brake is automatically released.

Depending on the vehicle load and driving sit-

uation or in trailer operation, the vehicle may

roll backwards a little.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Acoustic protection for pedestrians

Start/Stop button

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, acoustic protection for pedes-

trians generates continuous driving noise in

vehicles with electric or electrically assisted

drives.

Principle

Drive-ready state is switched on and off by

pressing the Start/Stop button.

▷

With a stationary vehicle and turned on

drive-ready state as soon as the selector

lever position P is exited.

General

Drive-ready state is switched on by pressing

the Start/Stop button with the brake applied.

▷

With electric driving up to 30 km/h/20 mph.

A loudspeaker system plays the noise outside

the vehicle. As a result, other road users, for

example pedestrians or cyclists, can detect the

vehicle better.

Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches

drive-ready state off again and standby state

is switched on.

For further information:

▷

Drive-ready state, see page 48.

Standby state, see page 47.

Automatic Start/Stop

function

Driving off

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

2. Select the drive position.

3. Drive off.

Principle

The Automatic Start/Stop function helps you

to save fuel. It does this by switching off the

engine when the vehicle stops, for example

in congestion or at traffic lights. Drive-ready

state remains switched on. For driving off, the

engine starts automatically.

When stopping

Selector lever positions D, S or R

On uphill gradients, the system prevents the

vehicle from rolling against the selected direc-

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

Functional limitations

General

The engine is not shut down automatically in

the following situations:

Each time the engine is started via the Start/

Stop button, the Automatic Start/Stop function

is switched to standby.

▷

On a steep downhill gradient.

The function is activated at low speeds.

The brake pedal has not been pressed hard

enough.

Engine shutdown

▷

When the outside temperature is high and

the automatic air conditioning is switched

on.

Operating requirements

The engine is automatically shut down when

stationary when the following conditions are

met:

▷

Interior is not heated or cooled to the de-

sired temperature.

Where there is a risk of condensation when

the automatic air conditioning is switched

on.

▷

Selector lever in selector lever position D.

Brake pedal remains pressed while the ve-

hicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is kept

stationary by Automatic Hold.

▷

Engine or other parts are not at operating

temperature.

▷

Driver's seat belt fastened or driver's door

closed.

▷

Engine cooling is required.

Sharp steering wheel angle or steering op-

eration.

Manual engine shutdown

If the engine was not switched off automati-

cally when the vehicle came to a stop, it can be

switched off manually:

▷

Vehicle battery charge state very low.

At high altitudes.

The bonnet is unlocked.

Hill Descent Control is activated.

Park Assist is activated.

▷

Rapidly press the brake pedal from the cur-

rent position.

▷

Engage selector lever in position P.

For stop-and-go traffic.

If all the operating requirements have been

met, the engine is stopped.

Selector lever position in N, S or R.

After reversing.

When using fuel with high ethanol content.

Air conditioning when the vehicle is

parked

The amount of air of the air conditioning is

reduced when the engine is not running.

Engine start

Operating requirements

For driving off, the engine starts automatically

under the following conditions:

Display in the instrument cluster

The display in the instrument

cluster indicates that the Au-

tomatic Start/Stop function is

ready for automatic engine start.

▷

By releasing the brake pedal.

With Automatic Hold activated: press the

accelerator pedal.

Driving off

Accelerate as usual after starting the engine.

139

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

Safety function

After an automatic shut down, the engine will

not restart automatically if one of the following

conditions is met:

Without mild hybrid technology: via

button

▷

Driver's seat belt unfastened and driver's

door open.

▷

Bonnet has been unlocked.

Several indicator lights illuminate for various

lengths of time.

The engine can only be started using the Start/

Stop button.

Press the key.

System limits

Even if you do not want to drive off, the en-

gine restarts automatically in the following sit-

uations:

▷

LED illuminates: Automatic Start/

Stop function is deactivated.

▷

The LED is off: Automatic Start/Stop func-

tion is activated.

▷

In case of excessive warming of the interior

when the air conditioning function is turned

on.

Without mild hybrid technology: via

iDrive

▷

In case of excessive cooling of the interior

when the heating is turned on.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Where there is a risk of condensation when

the automatic air conditioning is switched

on.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Drivetrain and chassis"

5. "Auto Start/Stop"

▷

Without mild hybrid technology:

In case of a steering operation.

6. Select the desired setting.

▷

When changing the selector lever position

from D or P.

Via selector lever position

The Automatic Start/Stop function is also de-

activated in selector lever position S.

In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-

tery.

When starting an oil level measurement.

Via Driving Experience Control

The Automatic Start/Stop function is also de-

activated in the SPORT drive mode of Driving

Experience Control.

Manually deactivating the system

Principle

The engine is not switched off automatically.

During an automatic engine shutdown, the en-

gine is started.

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

Parking the vehicle during

automatic engine shutdown

Safety information

During an automatic engine shutdown, the ve-

hicle can be parked safely, for example in order

to exit it.

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and

roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before

leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against

rolling away by, for example, applying the

parking brake.

1. Press the Start/Stop button.

▷

Drive-ready state is switched off.

Standby state is switched on.

Selector lever position P is automatically

engaged.

Selector lever positions

2. Apply the parking brake.

D Drive position

Selector lever position for all normal driving.

All gears for driving forwards are selected au-

tomatically.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations the Automatic Start/Stop

function is deactivated automatically for safety

reasons, for example if the absence of the

driver is detected.

R reverse gear

Only engage selector lever position R when the

vehicle is stationary.

Malfunction

The Automatic Start/Stop function no longer

shuts down the engine automatically. A Check

Control message is shown. It is possible to

continue driving. Have the system checked by

an authorised Service Partner or another quali-

fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

N Neutral

In selector lever position N, the vehicle can be

pushed or can roll without drivetrain, for exam-

ple in car washes.

P Park

Steptronic transmission

General

Selector lever position once the vehicle is

parked, for example. In selector lever posi-

tion P, the transmission blocks the drivetrain.

Principle

The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's

automatic transmission. With the shift paddle,

there is the option of changing gear manually if

required.

Only engage selector lever position P when the

vehicle is stationary.

P is engaged automatically

Selector lever position P is automatically en-

gaged in situations such as the following:

141

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

▷

After switching off the drive-ready state

when selector lever position R, D, or S is

engaged.

The selector lever returns to the centre po-

sition when released.

▷

After switching off the standby state when

selector lever position N is engaged.

While the vehicle is at a standstill and se-

lector lever position D, S, or R is engaged,

the driver's seat belt is unfastened, the driv-

er's door is opened and the brake is not

depressed.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-

lector lever position P is engaged and the

parking brake is engaged. The vehicle could

otherwise start to move.

Engaging selector lever position P

For further information:

Parking brake, see page 147.

Engaging selector lever positions

General

Apply the brake until ready to drive off, other-

wise the vehicle will move when drive position

or reverse gear is selected.

Press button P.

The transmission lock is engaged.

Operating requirements

The selector lever will only move from posi-

tion P to another selector lever position if drive-

ready state is switched on and the brake is

pressed.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General

In some situations, the vehicle may need to roll

a short distance without drivetrain, for example

in a conveyor car wash, or when being pushed.

It may not be possible to move out of selector

lever position P until all technical conditions

are met.

Engaging selector lever position N

Engaging selector lever position D, N,

R

1. Fasten the driver's seat belt.

NOTICE

The selector lever position P is automatically

engaged when standby state is switched off.

The wheels are locked. There is a risk of

material damage. Do not switch off standby

state if the vehicle is to roll, e.g. in conveyor

car washes.

2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired

direction, past a resistance point, if needed.

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

Activating the Sport programme

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

the brake.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake and

switch off Automatic Hold.

3. Press the brake.

4. Engage selector lever position N.

5. Switch off drive-ready state.

Standby state then remains switched on

and a Check Control message is shown.

The vehicle can now roll.

Pull the selector lever out of selector lever po-

sition D to D/S.

Selector lever position P is automatically en-

gaged after approximately 35 minutes.

The gear selected is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, for example S1.

If there is a fault, it may not be possible to

change the selector lever position.

The Sport programme of the transmission is

activated.

Unlock the parking lock electronically if neces-

sary.

For further information:

Ending Sport programme

Pull the selector lever to D/S.

Unlocking the parking lock electronically, see

page 143.

D is shown in the instrument cluster.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum per-

formance.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is

displayed, for example P.

Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the

regular full-throttle position; some resistance

will be felt.

Sport programme S

Unlocking the parking lock

electronically

Principle

In the Sport programme, the gear shift points

and gear shift times are configured for more

sporty driving. For example, the transmission

shifts up later and the gearshift times are

shorter.

General

Unlock the transmission lock electronically, e.g.

to manoeuvre the vehicle out of a danger area

in the event of a fault.

Before unlocking the parking lock, secure the

vehicle to prevent it from rolling away, for ex-

ample with a chock.

143

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

▷

Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is

shown in the instrument cluster.

Engaging selector lever position N

1. Press the Start/Stop button three times

quickly; do not press the brake when doing

so.

While pulling and holding the right shift

paddle, pull the left shift paddle.

2. Press the brake.

Permanent manual mode

In Sport programme S, pulling a shift paddle

causes the system to switch permanently to

manual mode M.

3. Press the selector lever to position N.

A corresponding Check Control message is

shown.

Position N is displayed on the selector

lever.

The gear selected is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, for example M1.

4. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger and

then secure it against rolling away.

It is possible to change to automatic mode:

▷

Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is

shown in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

While pulling and holding the right shift

paddle, pull the left shift paddle.

Pull the selector lever to D/S.

Principle

If M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-

tionary, the transmission will no longer shift

back to M1. These shift characteristics are re-

tained until M1 is engaged manually or manual

mode M is exited.

The shift paddles on the steering wheel enable

the gears to be changed manually.

General

Gearshift

Shifting gears

Gear shifting is only carried out at the appro-

priate rotational speed and vehicle speed.

Even in manual mode, the transmission

switches automatically in certain situa-

tions, e.g. when speed limits are reached.

Temporary manual mode

In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-

dle causes the system to switch to manual

mode temporarily.

▷

To shift up: pull the right shift paddle.

To shift down: pull the left shift paddle.

The gear selected is also displayed in the in-

strument cluster, for example D1.

The gear selected appears briefly in the instru-

ment cluster, followed by the gear currently in

use.

The transmission reverts to automatic mode

from manual mode after a certain period of

time of moderate driving without acceleration

or gear shifts using the shift paddles.

It is possible to change to automatic mode:

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

For further information:

Advanced mode

Running in, see page 338.

General

Operating requirements

Depending on the equipment, the Steptronic

transmission offers an advanced mode with

adapted shift characteristics.

Launch Control is available when the engine

is at operating temperature. The engine is at

operating temperature after an uninterrupted

journey of at least 10 km, 6 miles.

▷

Automatic downshift to the lowest possible

gear.

If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the

Steptronic transmission automatically shifts

down to the lowest possible gear.

Start up with Launch Control

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

Avoid automatic upshifting in manual

mode.

2.

Press the button.

The Steptronic transmission does not shift

up automatically in manual mode when

speed limits are reached.

3. Activate TRACTION on the control display.

4. Engage selector lever position S.

5. Press the brake firmly with the left foot.

There is no downshift for kickdown.

6. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond

the resistance at the full-throttle position

and hold, kickdown.

Activating advanced mode

Advanced mode is active in manual mode

A destination flag is shown in the instru-

ment cluster.

when Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

Depending on the equipment, the advanced

mode can also be activated in manual mode

as follows:

7. The engine speed for pulling away is adjus-

ted. Wait briefly until the engine speed is

constant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this

position.

▷

"SPORT PLUS": drive mode is selected.

Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

8. Release the brake within 3 seconds of the

destination flag illuminating.

Launch Control

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifts are automatic as long as the desti-

nation flag is displayed and the accelerator

pedal is not released.

Principle

When the ambient conditions are dry, Launch

Control permits optimised acceleration on a

road surface that offers plenty of grip.

Using again during a journey

Once Launch Control has been used, the

transmission requires a short time to cool

down before Launch Control can be used

again. Launch Control adapts to the ambient

conditions when used again.

General

Using Launch Control causes premature com-

ponent wear, as this feature subjects the vehi-

cle to very high stresses and loads.

When driving off with Launch Control, do not

turn the steering wheel.

Do not use Launch Control when running in.

145

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

After using Launch Control

To support driving stability, re-activate Dy-

namic Stability Control as soon as possible.

Deactivating manually

▷

Pull and hold the right shift paddle until

SPRINT is no longer shown in the instru-

ment cluster.

System limits

An experienced driver may be able to achieve

better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode

without Launch Control.

▷

While pulling and holding the right shift

paddle, pull the left shift paddle.

Press the selector lever from position S to

position D.

Steptronic sport

transmission: sprint function

Driving Experience Control

Principle

The Driving Experience Control influences,

among other things, the characteristics of the

driving dynamics of the vehicle.

Principle

Depending on the equipment, the sprint func-

tion can be used when the driver is about to

accelerate. The sprint function prepares the

drivetrain for the acceleration.

Various drive modes allow the vehicle to be

adapted to suit the situation.

General

The following systems are influenced, for ex-

ample:

Activating the sprint function makes the vehi-

cle's response characteristics more dynamic.

▷

Drivetrain.

Activating

1. Pull and hold the left shift paddle until

SPRINT is shown in the instrument cluster.

Suspension.

Steering.

Display in the instrument cluster.

Cruise Control.

▷

The transmission changes down to the

lowest possible gear and switches to

manual mode M.

Overview

▷

A dynamic setting is activated for the

drivetrain.

Buttons in the vehicle

2. Change gears manually.

Deactivating automatically

The sprint function ends automatically if the

vehicle is driven moderately for a certain

amount of time.

146

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

ECO PRO

Button

Drive mode

The ECO PRO drive mode provides a con-

sumption-optimised setting.

SPORT

SPORT PLUS

SPORT INDIVIDUAL

INDIVIDUAL configuration

COMFORT

General

For some drive modes there is another individ-

ually adjustable mode.

ECO PRO

The most recent custom configuration is acti-

vated when the drive mode is called up again.

ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

Displays in the instrument cluster

Configuring and resetting

The selected drive mode is

shown in the instrument cluster.

For example, ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive

mode:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

Activating/deactivating the drive

mode

Press the button of the desired drive mode

repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

4. "Drivetrain and chassis"

5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"

6. Select the desired setting.

To reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default

setting:

When the drive mode is changed, the current

drive mode is deactivated.

"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"

Activating INDIVIDUAL

Press the button of the desired drive mode

several times.

Drive modes in detail

COMFORT

The COMFORT drive mode is a balanced

setting between sporty and consumption-opti-

mised driving.

Parking brake

Principle

SPORT

The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-

cle from rolling away when it is parked.

The SPORT drive mode is a dynamic setting

for greater agility with an optimised suspen-

sion.

SPORT PLUS

The SPORT PLUS drive mode is a dynamic

setting for maximum agility with an adapted

drivetrain.

147

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

Safety information

Overview

Button in the vehicle

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and

roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before

leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-

cle is secured against rolling away:

▷

Apply the parking brake.

Turn the front wheels towards the kerb

on uphill or downhill gradient.

Parking brake

▷

Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill

or downhill gradient, for example with a

chock.

Applying the parking brake

When the vehicle is stationary

WARNING

Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle

can set the vehicle in motion and endanger

themselves or other road users, for example

by the following actions:

Pull the switch.

The LED is illuminated.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated red.

▷

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

The parking brake is engaged.

Opening and closing doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Operating vehicle equipment.

While driving

The parking brake can be used as an emer-

gency braking function while driving:

There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-

hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-

cle key with you and lock the vehicle.

Pull and hold the switch. The vehicle

brakes hard for as long as the switch is

pulled.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated red, a signal

sounds and the brake lights illuminate.

A Check Control message is shown.

Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stationary.

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

Engaging the parking brake

automatically

1. Switch on standby state.

In some situations, the parking brake is en-

gaged automatically, for example, by Auto-

matic Hold.

2.

Pull the switch with the brake ap-

plied or the selector lever in position P and

then press it.

In selector lever position N, the parking brake

will not be engaged automatically.

The procedure can take a few seconds. Any

sounds that occur are normal.

The indicator light extinguishes as

soon as the parking brake is opera-

tional again.

Release the parking brake

Releasing the parking brake manually

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

Automatic Hold

2.

Press the switch with the brake ap-

plied or the selector lever in position P.

Principle

The LED and the indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-

matically applying and releasing the brake, for

example in stop-and-go traffic.

Releasing the parking brake

automatically

The parking brake is automatically released on

when you drive off.

The vehicle is held automatically when at a

standstill.

On upward gradients, it prevents the vehicle

from rolling back when driving off.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

General

Malfunction

If a parking brake has failed or malfunctioned,

secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

away before leaving the vehicle.

The parking brake is released automatically

when the following conditions are met:

▷

Drive-ready state is switched off.

If the driver’s door is open for more than

one second and no pedal is pressed during

this time.

A Check Control message is shown.

After getting out, secure the vehicle to prevent

it from rolling away, for example with a chock.

▷

If the moving vehicle is brought to a stand-

still with the parking brake.

After an open circuit

To restore the operability of the parking brake

after a power failure, an initialisation may be

required.

Safety information

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and

roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before

leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

149

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-

cle is secured against rolling away:

Activate Automatic Hold

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

▷

Apply the parking brake.

Turn the front wheels towards the kerb

on uphill or downhill gradient.

2.

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated.

▷

Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill

or downhill gradient, for example with a

chock.

The indicator light illuminates green.

Automatic Hold is activated.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last

selected setting is retained.

WARNING

Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle

can set the vehicle in motion and endanger

themselves or other road users, for example

by the following actions:

Automatic Hold holds the vehicle

Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s

door is closed.

▷

Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the parking brake.

Once the vehicle has stopped, it is au-

tomatically secured from rolling away

once the indicator light lights up green.

Opening and closing doors or windows.

Engaging selector lever position N.

Operating vehicle equipment.

Driving off

To drive off, press the accelerator pedal.

There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-

hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-

cle key with you and lock the vehicle.

The brake is released automatically and the

parking brake indicator light is extinguished.

Automatic parking brake application

The parking brake is applied automatically if

drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle

is exited while Automatic Hold is holding the

vehicle.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

The indicator light changes from green

to red.

The parking brake is not applied automatically

if drive-ready state was switched off while the

vehicle was rolling to a stop. Automatic Hold is

temporarily deactivated in this case.

Deactivate Automatic Hold

Automatic Hold

Press the key.

The LED is extinguished.

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

The indicator light extinguishes.

Automatic Hold is deactivated.

Indicating a turn briefly

Press the lever as far as the resistance point

and hold it there for as long as you wish to

indicate a turn.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,

also depress the brake when deactivating.

High-beam headlight,

headlight flasher

Turn indicators

Press the lever forwards or pull it back.

Turn indicator in exterior mirror

To ensure that the indicator lamps in the ex-

terior mirrors can be seen, do not fold in the

exterior mirrors while driving and while the turn

indicators or hazard warning lights are operat-

ing.

Indicating

▷

High-beam headlight on, arrow 1.

The high-beam headlight is illuminated

when the low-beam headlight is switched

on.

High-beam headlight off/headlight flasher,

arrow 2.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the high-

beam headlight is switched on.

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

One-touch signalling

Briefly tap the lever up or down.

Wiper system

Safety information

WARNING

The duration of the one-touch signalling can

be set.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Exterior lighting"

If the windscreen wipers start moving when

they are folded away from the windscreen,

parts of the body may become trapped or the

vehicle may be damaged. There is a danger

of injury or material damage. Make sure that

the vehicle is switched off when the wipers

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. "One-touch indicator"

6. Select the desired setting.

151

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

are folded away from the windscreen, and

that the windscreen wipers are in contact

with the windscreen when switching on.

When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wip-

ers switch to normal speed.

If a journey is interrupted with the wiper sys-

tem switched on: when the journey is resumed,

the windscreen wipers continue operating at

the previous level.

NOTICE

The wiper blades can wear out or become

damaged prematurely when wiping on dry

glass for longer periods of time. The wiper

motor may overheat. There is a risk of mate-

rial damage. Do not use the wipers when the

glass is dry.

Switching off the wiper system and

flick wiping

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,

switching them on may cause the wiper

blades to tear off and the wiper motor to

overheat. There is a risk of material damage.

Defrost the windscreen before switching on

the windscreen wipers.

Press the lever down.

▷

To switch off: press lever downwards until

position 0 is reached.

▷

To flick wipe: press the lever downwards

from position 0.

Switching on the wiper system

The lever returns to position 0 when re-

leased.

Rain sensor

Principle

The rain sensor automatically controls the

wiper operation depending on the rain inten-

sity.

Press the lever upwards to the desired posi-

tion.

General

▷

Rest position of the windscreen wipers, po-

sition 0.

The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di-

rectly in front of the interior mirror.

▷

Rain sensor, position 1.

Normal wiper speed, position 2.

When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wip-

ers switch to intermittent operation.

▷

Fast wiper speed, position 3.

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

▷

Upwards: high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Safety information

Downwards: low sensitivity of the rain sen-

sor.

NOTICE

In car washes, the wipers may inadvertently

start moving if the rain sensor is activated.

There is a risk of material damage. Deacti-

vate the rain sensor in car washes.

Window washer system

Safety information

WARNING

Activating the rain sensor

At low temperatures, the washer fluid can

freeze onto the windscreen and restrict visi-

bility. There is a risk of accident. Only use

the washer systems if there is no possibility

of the washer fluid freezing. Use antifreeze

additive if required.

NOTICE

If the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the

washer pump cannot operate as intended.

There is a risk of material damage. Do not

use the washer system with the washer fluid

reservoir empty.

Press the lever upwards once from position 0,

arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

If there is frost, wiping may not start.

Cleaning the windscreen

Deactivating the rain sensor

Press the lever back to position 0.

Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain

sensor

Pull the lever.

The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-

screen and the windscreen wipers are turned

on briefly.

Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity

of the rain sensor.

153

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving

CONTROLS

Windscreen washer jets

Safety information

The windscreen washer jets are automatically

heated when standby state is switched on.

WARNING

If the windscreen wipers start moving when

they are folded away from the windscreen,

parts of the body may become trapped or the

vehicle may be damaged. There is a danger

of injury or material damage. Make sure that

the vehicle is switched off when the wipers

are folded away from the windscreen, and

that the windscreen wipers are in contact

with the windscreen when switching on.

Rear wiper

Switching on rear wiper

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,

switching them on may cause the wiper

blades to tear off and the wiper motor to

overheat. There is a risk of material damage.

Defrost the windscreen before switching on

the windscreen wipers.

Turn the outer switch upwards.

▷

Rest position of the windscreen wiper, posi-

tion 0.

▷

Intermittent operation, arrow 1. Engaging

reverse gear activates continuous opera-

tion.

Cleaning the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

▷

In rest position: turn the switch downwards,

arrow 3. The switch returns to the rest posi-

tion when released.

▷

In intermittent operation: turn the switch

further, arrow 2. The switch returns to the

intermittent position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid

filling level in the reservoir is low.

Windscreen wipers fold-out position

Principle

The wipers can be folded out from the wind-

screen in the fold-out position. This is neces-

sary for example when replacing the wiper

blades or to keep them away from the wind-

screen when there is frost.

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving

CONTROLS

Folding out the windscreen wipers

1. Switch on standby state.

2. Press the wiper lever down and hold until

the windscreen wipers stop in an approxi-

mately vertical position.

3. Lift the windscreen wipers completely away

from the windscreen.

Folding down the windscreen wipers

1. Fold the windscreen wipers fully down onto

the windscreen.

2. Switch on standby state and press and

hold the wiper lever down again.

The windscreen wipers move back to the

rest position and are operational once

again.

155

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

Displays

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Overview

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Instrument cluster

Principle

Instrument cluster

The instrument cluster comprises various digi-

tal displays, such as speedometer, time, range,

temperature displays or indicator and warning

lights.

Indication ranges in the instrument

cluster

General

The layout of the instrument cluster adapts

to the respective drive mode. The positions of

some displays may vary, e.g. the selector lever

indication.

The displays in the instrument cluster can

sometimes differ from the illustrations in the

Owner's Handbook.

1

Speedometer

2

Driver assistance systems 232

Parking assistance systems 263

Driver Attention Camera 224

Check Control 166

Safety information

3

4

WARNING

If the displays in the instrument cluster fail,

the vehicle must not be used. There is a risk

of accident or material damage. Immediately

park the vehicle safely. If drive-ready state is

switched off and on again, the malfunction

may rectified and it is possible to continue

driving. If the malfunction cannot be rectified,

have the system checked by an authorised

Selector lever indication 141

Optimum shift indicator 168

Selection lists 167

5

6

Power display 168

Revolution counter 169

Engine temperature 169

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

Select the menu using the arrow buttons on

the steering wheel as necessary.

7

Outside temperature 170

Central display area 170

Shift Lights 170

8

3. Select the required setting using the

knurled wheel on the steering wheel.

9

Drive mode 146

10 Speed Limit Info 232

Speed Limit Assist 255

11 Time 174

Settings

Individual displays can be set individually, e.g.

a second actual speed.

12 Fuel level indicator 174

Range 174

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Displays"

For further information:

4. "Instrument cluster"

5. Select the desired setting.

Indicator and warning lights, see page 159

Operating elements on the steering

wheel

Live Vehicle

Operating

element

Function

Principle

Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your

own vehicle with different information, e.g. ve-

hicle status or energy flow indicators.

Display the menu bar in the in-

strument cluster.

Press the corresponding arrow

button to move the selection.

General

Depending on the driving situation, suitable

information is shown on the control display.

Fault statuses are not taken into account.

Turn the knurled wheel: scroll

the selection up or down.

Press the knurled wheel: con-

firm the selection.

Adaptive content

The following is displayed in alternating order

and, if applicable, depending on the selected

drive mode:

Configuring the layout

In COMFORT drive mode, the layout can be

individually configured and displayed in the in-

strument cluster.

▷

Vehicle status, see page 175.

Current driving condition, see page 175.

Sport displays, see page 176.

Trip data, see page 171.

1.

Press the button on the steering

xOFFROAD display, see page 297.

wheel.

A menu bar is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Static content

The following content can be displayed contin-

uously on the control display regardless of the

driving situation and set drive mode.

2. "LAYOUT"

157

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

▷

Vehicle status.

Overview

Trip data.

xVIEW display, see page 228.

xOFFROAD display.

Configuring the display

In the Live Vehicle menu, it is possible to

choose between an adaptive display and static

content.

1.

Apps menu

The head-up display displays are projected

onto the windscreen by a protective glass. The

protective glass is located between the steer-

ing wheel and the windscreen.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Live Vehicle"

4. "Content"

5. Select the desired setting.

Configuring a view

The views for the Head-up display can be set

independently of the display in the instrument

cluster, for e.g. a reduced view.

BMW Head-up display

Principle

The Head-up display projects important infor-

mation in the driver's field of view, for example

the speed.

1.

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

A menu bar is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

General

2. "HEAD-UP"

Depending on the equipment: the height of the

Head-up display can be saved with the mem-

ory function.

Select the menu using the arrow buttons on

the steering wheel as necessary.

3. Select the required setting using the

knurled wheel on the steering wheel.

Follow the instructions on cleaning the head-

up display in the Care chapter.

Display

Turning the Head-up display on/off

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-up display"

5. "Head-up display"

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

separately, for instance information on driver

assistance.

Overview

The following information is displayed in the

Head-up display:

1.

Apps menu

▷

Speed.

2. "Vehicle apps"

Navigation instructions.

Check Control messages.

Sport displays.

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-up display"

5. Select the desired setting.

Shift Lights.

Special windscreen

The windscreen is an integral part of the sys-

tem.

Efficiency Coach.

Lists and messages.

Driver assistance systems.

The shape and coating of the special wind-

screen enable the system to function.

Some of this information is only shown briefly

when needed.

In the event of damage, have the special wind-

screen replaced by an authorised Service Part-

ner or another qualified Service Partner or a

specialist workshop.

Visibility of the display

The visibility of the information shown on

the Head-up display can be affected by the

following:

▷

Seat position.

Indicator and warning lights

Objects on the protective glass of the head-

up display.

Principle

▷

Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the

head-up display.

The indicator and warning lights in the instru-

ment cluster display the status of some func-

tions in the vehicle. The indicator and warning

lights indicate faults in monitored systems.

Dirt on the inside or outside of the wind-

screen.

▷

Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.

Wet roads.

General

The indicator and warning lights can be illumi-

nated in various combinations and colours.

Adverse lighting conditions.

If the image is distorted, have the default set-

tings checked by an authorised Service Partner

or another qualified Service Partner or a spe-

cialist workshop.

When switching on drive-ready state, the func-

tionality of some lights is checked and they

illuminate briefly.

Red lights

Settings

Individual settings can be entered for the

Head-up display, for example for the height,

brightness or illustration. In addition, individual

displays in the Head-up display can be set up

Seat belt warning

Seat belt is not buckled.

For further information:

Seat belt warning, see page 118.

159

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

Airbag system

Warning light is illuminated briefly: this

indicates that the entire airbag system

and seat belt tensioners are opera-

Pedestrian warning

Warning light is illuminated: risk of colli-

sion with a person has been detected.

Increased awareness is required.

tional when the vehicle is switched on.

The warning light is illuminated continuously:

there is a malfunction. Have the system

checked immediately by an authorised Service

Partner or another qualified Service Partner or

a specialist workshop.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-

lision with a person is imminent. Intervene im-

mediately yourself according to the situation.

For further information:

Airbags, see page 187.

Warning function for pedestrians, see

page 198.

Parking brake

Collision Warning

The parking brake is engaged.

For further information:

Warning light is illuminated: risk of col-

lision, for example with a vehicle. In-

creased awareness is required.

Parking brake, see page 147.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-

lision with a vehicle is imminent. Intervene im-

mediately yourself according to the situation.

Brake system

Brake pads are worn or there is a fault

in the brake system.

For further information:

Warning function in the rear-end collision sit-

uation, see page 195.

The braking force assistance may be

faulty. A higher pedal force may be required

during braking.

Crossroads Warning: vehicle detected

from the right

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an

authorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Warning light is illuminated: risk of colli-

sion with crossing vehicle from the right

has been detected. Increased aware-

ness is required.

Emergency Stop Assistant

The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-

gered.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-

lision with a crossing vehicle is imminent. In-

tervene immediately yourself according to the

situation.

For further information:

Emergency Stop Assistant, see page 216.

For further information:

Risk of collision

Warning function at road junctions, see

page 199.

Warning light is illuminated or flashes

in conjunction with an acoustic signal if

a collision is imminent.

For further information:

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

Grab the steering wheel with your hands.

For further information:

Crossroads Warning: vehicle detected

from left

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Warning light is illuminated: risk of colli-

sion with crossing vehicle from the left

has been detected. Increased aware-

ness is required.

Yellow lights

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-

lision with a crossing vehicle is imminent. In-

tervene immediately yourself according to the

situation.

Anti-lock Braking System

There is a malfunction or the system

is faulty. The Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) is not available.

For further information:

Ease of steering may be restricted during full

braking.

Warning function at road junctions, see

page 199.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an

authorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Distance control

Warning light flashes and an acous-

tic signal sounds: brake and perform

avoidance manoeuvre, if necessary.

For further information:

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), see page 226.

For further information:

Brake system

Distance control, see page 242.

The brake linings are worn or there is a

fault in the brake system.

Assisted Driving Mode

Have the system checked by an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

The warning light flashes and a signal

sounds:

The system is switching off or an inter-

ruption of the system is imminent.

Assisted Driving Mode

For further information:

The warning light is illuminated and a

signal sounds: a system interruption is

imminent.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Assisted Driving Mode: hands not on

the steering wheel

The warning light flashes: a lane boundary has

been crossed.

For further information:

The warning light is illuminated and a

signal sounds:

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Hands are not holding the steering

wheel. A system interruption is imminent.

Assisted Driving Mode: hands not on

the steering wheel

The system reduces the speed to a standstill if

applicable.

Hands are not holding the steering

wheel. System remains active.

The system may possibly not perform any

supporting steering wheel movements.

161

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

Grab the steering wheel with your hands.

For further information:

Flat tyre monitor

The warning light is illuminated: the flat

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

tyre monitor reports a flat tyre or a tyre

pressure loss.

Reduce your speed and carefully stop the vehi-

cle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering

manoeuvres.

Front-collision warning restricted or

failed

Depending on the equipment and na-

tional-market version: functional limita-

tion detected, e.g. due to system limi-

tations of the camera or system failure. It is

possible to continue driving. Where applicable,

observe the information from Check Control

messages.

For further information:

Flat Tyre Monitor, see page 380.

Tyre Pressure Monitor

The warning light is illuminated: the

Tyre Pressure Monitor reports a flat

tyre or a tyre pressure loss. Note the

information in the Check Control message.

For further information:

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

Warning light flashes and is then illuminated

continuously: the system is unable to detect

flat tyres or tyre pressure losses.

Dynamic Stability Control

Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control is regulating the drive and

brake forces. The vehicle is being sta-

bilised. Reduce speed and adjust the driving

style to the road conditions.

▷

Fault due to systems or devices with the

same radio frequency: the system is auto-

matically reactivated upon leaving the field

of interference.

▷

For tyres with special approval: the Tyre

Pressure Monitor was unable to complete

the reset. Reset the system again.

Warning light is illuminated: Dynamic Stability

Control has failed or is initialising. The driving

stabilisation is restricted or has failed.

Wheel without wheel electronics is fitted: if

necessary have it checked by an authorised

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

If the warning light is continuously illuminated,

have the system checked immediately by an

authorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

▷

Malfunction: have the system checked by

an authorised Service Partner or another

qualified Service Partner or a specialist

workshop.

For further information:

Dynamic Stability Control, see page 226.

Dynamic Stability Control deactivated

or Dynamic Traction Control activated

For further information:

Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 373.

Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated

or Dynamic Traction Control is activa-

ted.

Steering system

The steering system may be faulty.

For further information:

Have the system checked by an au-

thorised Service Partner or another

▷

Dynamic Stability Control, see page 226.

Dynamic Traction Control, see page 228.

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-

shop.

Rear fog light

Rear fog light is switched on.

For further information:

Integral Active Steering, see page 230.

Rear fog light, see page 184.

Engine warning light

Acoustic protection for pedestrians

Engine malfunction.

Acoustic protection for pedestrians has

failed. Increased caution when ma-

noeuvring.

Have the vehicle checked by an author-

ised Service Partner or another quali-

fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

In case of repeated malfunctions, have the

system checked by an authorised Service Part-

ner or another qualified Service Partner or a

specialist workshop.

For further information:

Socket for on-board diagnosis, see page 405.

For further information:

Lane Departure Warning

Acoustic protection for pedestrians, see

page 138

Depending on equipment and national-

market version:

Warning light is illuminated: functional

limitation detected, for example, due to low

sun or system failure. It is possible to continue

driving. Where applicable, observe the infor-

mation from Check Control messages.

Green lights

Turn indicators

The turn indicator is switched on.

Warning light flashes: a warning is issued ac-

tively. The system does not carry out any

steering interventions.

If the indicator light flashes more rap-

idly than usual, a turn indicator bulb

has failed.

For further information:

Lane Departure Warning, see page 203.

Turn indicators, see page 151.

Lane change warning restricted or

failed

Side lights

The side lights are switched on.

For further information:

Depending on equipment and national-

market version:

Side light, low-beam headlight, see

page 179.

Functional limitation detected, e.g. due

to dirty radar sensors or the system has failed.

It is possible to continue driving. Where ap-

plicable, observe the information from Check

Control messages.

Low-beam headlight

The low-beam headlight is switched

on.

For further information:

Lane Change Warning, see page 207.

For further information:

Side light, low-beam headlight, see page 179.

163

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

Automatic Hold, see page 149.

High-beam Assistant

Low-beam headlight is switched on

and the High-beam Assistant is activa-

ted.

Automatic Hold: vehicle secured

against rolling away

The high-beam headlight is switched on and

off automatically according to traffic situation.

The vehicle is automatically secured

against rolling away after stopping.

For further information:

High-beam Assistant, see page 182.

Automatic Hold, see page 149.

Lane Departure Warning

Manual Speed Limiter

Depending on equipment and national-

market version:

Indicator light illuminates: the system is

switched on.

Indicator light illuminates: the system is

switched on. A lane marking has been detec-

ted on at least one side of the vehicle. The sys-

tem is ready to intervene and issue warnings.

Indicator light flashes: set speed limit is

exceeded.

For further information:

Manual Speed Limiter, see page 237.

The system can perform steering interven-

tions.

Cruise Control

Indicator light flashes: the system actively is-

sues a warning. If necessary, the system per-

forms a steering intervention.

The system is active.

For further information:

Cruise Control, see page 239.

For further information:

Lane Departure Warning, see page 203.

Distance control

Lane Change Warning

Indicator light illuminates: system has

detected a vehicle ahead. The vehicle

symbol goes out if no vehicle in front is

detected.

Depending on vehicle equipment and

national-market version: the system

is switched on. Warnings are issued

within the system limits and, if necessary,

steering interventions are carried out.

Indicator light flashing: vehicle in front has

driven off.

For further information:

Lane Change Warning, see page 207.

Distance control, see page 242.

Automatic Hold: vehicle is held

automatically

Speed Limit Assist

The detected speed limit can be ap-

plied with the SET button. As soon as

the speed limit has been adopted, a

green tick is displayed.

Automatic Hold is ready to operate.

The vehicle is held automatically when

at a standstill.

For further information:

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

Speed Limit Assist, see page 255.

▷

High-beam headlight, see page 151.

High-beam Assistant, see page 182.

Assisted Driving Mode

Grey lights

The system is helping the driver keep

the vehicle in driving lane.

Manual Speed Limiter

For further information:

The system is interrupted.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

For further information:

Manual Speed Limiter, see page 237.

Lane Change Assistant: lane change in

progress

Cruise Control

Green arrow symbol for lane-chang-

ing: the system is carrying out a lane

change.

The system is interrupted.

For further information:

Cruise Control, see page 239.

Lane Change Assistant, see page 252.

Distance control

Lane Change Assistant Lane: lane

change not possible

Indicator light illuminates: the system is

interrupted.

Grey line for lane boundary on the ap-

propriate side: the system has detected

the lane change request. Lane change

not currently possible.

Indicator light flashes: the requirements

for operation of the system are no longer being

met. The system has been deactivated but will

continue to brake until you actively take over

by depressing the brake or accelerator pedal.

For further information:

Lane Change Assistant, see page 252.

For further information:

Distance control, see page 242.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

The system is active.

Assisted Driving Mode

For further information:

System is on standby and does not

make any steering wheel movement.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, see

page 253.

The system activates automatically

when all operating requirements are met.

For further information:

Blue lights

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

High-beam headlight

The high-beam headlight has been

switched on.

Front-collision warning switched off

Depending on vehicle equipment and

national-market version: the system is

switched off.

For further information:

165

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

For further information:

Distance control, see page 242.

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

Lane Departure Warning

The system can be activated.

For further information:

Depending on equipment and national-

market version:

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, see

page 253.

Warning light is illuminated: the system

is switched off or automatically deactivated, for

example, because DSC OFF is activated.

Warning light flashes: a warning is issued ac-

tively. The system does not carry out any

steering interventions.

Check Control

Principle

For further information:

Check Control monitors vehicle functions and

alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys-

tems.

Lane Departure Warning, see page 203.

Lane change warning restricted

General

Depending on equipment and national-

market version:

A Check Control message is displayed as a

combination of indicator or warning lights and

text messages in the instrument cluster and, if

applicable, in the Head-up display.

The system is switched on. No warn-

ings are issued temporarily. At least one func-

tional requirement has not been met, for ex-

ample the minimum speed has not been

reached.

An acoustic signal may also be output and a

text message shown on the control display.

For further information:

Hiding Check Control messages

An arrow symbol next to the Check Control

message indicates whether the Check Control

message can be hidden.

Lane Change Warning, see page 207.

Lane change warning switched off

Depending on vehicle equipment and

national-market version: the system is

switched off.

To hide Check Control messages, press

the left arrow button on the steering

wheel.

For further information:

Lane Change Warning, see page 207.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed

permanently and remain until the fault has

been repaired. If a number of malfunctions

have occurred at the same time, the messages

are displayed in succession.

White lights

Cruise Control with distance control

No display of distance control as the

accelerator pedal is being pressed.

Permanently displayed Check Control mes-

sages may be temporarily hidden. After ap-

For further information:

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

prox. 8 seconds, these messages are auto-

matically displayed again.

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Check Control"

5. Select the required text message.

6. Select the desired setting.

Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are automati-

cally hidden after approximately 20 seconds.

The Check Control messages remain stored

and can be displayed again.

Messages displayed at the end of the

journey

Certain messages displayed when driving are

displayed again when drive-ready state is

switched off.

Displaying saved Check Control

messages

1.

Apps menu

Selection lists

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Vehicle status"

Principle

4. "Check Control"

The instrument cluster or the Head-up display

can show lists for certain functions and can be

used for operation where applicable.

5. Select the required text message.

Display

▷

Entertainment source.

Current audio source.

Recent calls list.

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is

displayed or saved.

If applicable, the relevant menu is opened on

the control display.

Text messages

Displaying and using the list

The selection lists can be displayed and op-

erated using the operating elements on the

steering wheel.

Text messages and an icon in the instrument

cluster explain what a Check Control message

means and what the indicator and warning

lights signify.

Operating

elements

Function

Supplementary text messages

Additional information, for example the cause

of the fault and any action required, can be

called up via Check Control.

Turn the knurled wheel: dis-

play the entertainment list or

scroll up or down in the list.

With urgent text messages, the added text will

be automatically displayed on the control dis-

play.

Press the knurled wheel: con-

firm the selection.

Press the corresponding arrow

button to change the enter-

tainment source.

It is possible to select additional assistance de-

pending on the Check Control message.

1.

Apps menu

To display the last calls list.

2. "Vehicle apps"

167

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

Display

Example Description

In permanent manual mode M:

Optimal gear is engaged.

With shift paddles: temporary

manual mode.

With shift paddles: Sport pro-

gramme.

An example:

Switching instruction.

To change the track or entertainment source

after calling up the entertainment list, use the

arrow keys on the steering wheel. Press the

knurled wheel to confirm the selection.

For further information:

Shift paddles, see page 144

Turn the knurled wheel up or down to select

the desired entry in the list. Press the knurled

wheel to confirm the selection.

Power display

Depending on the equipment, the list in the

instrument cluster may differ from the figure.

Principle

The power display indicates the currently

drawn drive power as a percentage.

Optimum shift indicator

Activating/deactivating power

display

Depending on the selected drive mode or the

individually configured layout, the power dis-

play or revolution counter is displayed.

Principle

The optimum shift indicator recommends the

gear that best suits the current driving situa-

tion. The use of the optimal gear supports an

efficient driving style.

Display

General

Depending on the equipment and the national-

market version, the optimum shift indicator is

active in manual mode M.

Displays

Information on upshifting, downshifting or the

engaged gear is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

For vehicles without optimum shift indicator,

the gear engaged is shown.

Needle in the arrow 1 area: display of the en-

ergy recuperation achieved, for example during

deceleration, CHARGE.

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

Needle in the area of arrow 2: drive power as a

percentage, POWER.

The display of the revolution counter is varia-

ble and depends on the selected drive mode.

Reduced speed range

Reduced drive power

The available drive power may be reduced due

to certain factors. The power display is auto-

matically adjusted as necessary.

The available speed range may be reduced

due certain factors, example a cold drivetrain.

The revolution counter display is automatically

adjusted depending on the available speed

range.

In addition, icons on the power display and

in the revolution counter indicate if the drive

power has been reduced.

Standby state and drive-

ready state

Icon

Description

Blue icon: cold drive system.

White icon: increased drive sys-

tem temperature, for example

due to long-lasting or high

power requirements when driv-

ing uphill.

OFF is shown in the instru-

ment cluster. The drivetrain is

switched off and standby state

switched on.

Depending on equipment and

national-market version:

READY is shown in the instru-

ment cluster. The Automatic

Start/Stop function is ready for

an automatic engine start.

Restriction of drive power set

by BMW Digital Key.

System-related functional limi-

tation.

For further information:

▷

Vehicle operating condition, see page 46.

A Check Control message will

be shown as necessary.

Automatic Start/Stop function, see

page 138.

Revolution counter

Engine temperature

General

Display

It is vital to avoid rotational speeds in the red

warning zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is

interrupted to protect the engine.

▷

Cold engine: the needle is in

the blue temperature range,

close to the limit position

of the temperature display

and the WARM-UP text is

displayed.

Activating/deactivating the

revolution counter

The revolution counter is displayed depending

on the selected drive mode or the individually

configured layout.

169

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

Drive at moderate rotational

speed and vehicle speed.

or in the Head-up display in combination with

the revolution counter.

▷

Normal operating temperature: the needle

is located in the centre or left half of the

temperature display.

Operating requirements

▷

Manual mode M must be activated.

Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-

ature range. A Check Control message is

also displayed.

▷

Advanced mode must be enabled.

For further information:

Advanced mode, see page 145.

For further information:

Display

Coolant level, see page 401.

Outside temperature

General

If the display drops to +3 ℃, 37 ℉ or lower, a

signal sounds.

A Check Control message is shown.

There is an increased risk of black ice.

Yellow fields illuminate successively to indicate

when a gearshift is due.

Safety information

▷

Shift gear at the latest when all fields light

up red.

WARNING

When the maximum engine speed is

reached, the entire display flashes red and

the fuel supply is limited to protect the en-

gine.

Even at temperatures above +3 ℃, 37 ℉

there may be an increased risk of black ice,

for example on bridges or on shaded sec-

tions of road. There is a risk of accident. At

low temperatures, adjust driving style to the

weather conditions.

Central display area

Displayable content

The following settings can be selected:

Shift Lights

▷

Reduced view.

Principle

Trip data, see page 171.

Shift Lights indicate the suitable upshift point

at which fast acceleration values can be ach-

ieved.

Assisted View, see page 173.

Route preview of the navigation system.

Map view of the navigation system.

G-Meter, see page 174.

General

The Shift Lights are active in manual mode M

and can be displayed in the instrument cluster

Entertainment.

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

▷

Augmented View.

Trip data

Depending on the equipment, Augmented

View in the instrument cluster enables the

visualisation of driver assistance systems in

the real vehicle environment.

Principle

The display of trip data provides various infor-

mation about the trip, e.g. the average con-

sumption or the trip distance.

Grey lines indicate the recommended mini-

mum distance to the vehicle in front when

Cruise Control is deactivated.

General

Android Auto©.

The trip data can be shown on the control dis-

play and in the instrument cluster.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, selected functions of a

compatible smartphone can also be dis-

played, for example, map views.

Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle

menu, the trip data is shown dynamically or

continuously on the control display.

Some contents for the central display area can

also be configured as a view in the Head-up

display.

The values can be displayed and reset de-

pending on different intervals.

For further information:

Display on the control display

Head-up display, see page 158.

Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain-

ment and Communication, see page 6.

General

The following trip data is shown on the control

display:

Configuring the central display area

The contents for the central indication range in

the instrument cluster can be individually con-

figured, for example, the display of trip data.

▷

Set interval for displaying the trip data.

Average fuel consumption as a function

of the set interval.

▷

Driving time depending on the set inter-

val.

1.

Press the button on the steering

Distance covered, depending on the set

interval.

wheel.

A menu bar is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

The distance covered in the coasting

drive state.

2. "CONTENT"

Displaying trip data continuously

Select the menu using the arrow buttons on

the steering wheel as necessary.

1.

Apps menu

3. Select the required setting using the

knurled wheel on the steering wheel.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Live Vehicle"

4. "Content"

5. "Journey data"

171

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

Display in the instrument cluster

Information on consumption and distance cov-

ered can be displayed on the instrument clus-

ter.

Configuring the trip data display

The intervals for displaying the trip data in the

instrument cluster and on the control display

can be configured.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Time period for journey data"

5. "Values"

6. Select the desired setting:

▷

"Since start of journey ( )": the values

are reset automatically if the vehicle is

at a standstill for approximately four

hours.

▷

Current consumption, arrow 1.

Average consumption, arrow 2.

Distance covered depending on the config-

ured interval, arrow 3.

▷

"Since last refuel ( )": the values are re-

set automatically after refuelling with a

significant amount of fuel.

This icon is displayed when the vehicle

is in coasting driving condition.

▷

"Since factory": the values since leaving

the factory are displayed.

▷

Total kilometres, arrow 4.

"Since Individual ( )": the values since

the last manual reset are displayed. The

values can be reset at any time.

Current consumption

The display of the current consumption allows

you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.

for driving economically and in an environmen-

tally friendly manner.

Resetting average values manually

The following interval can be reset manually at

any time:

Mild hybrid technology: depending on the

equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted when

driving slowly or even when the vehicle is sta-

tionary and the engine continues to run. In this

case, the combustion engine is electrically op-

erated.

"Since Individual ( )"

Use the key on the left steering column lever:

1. Press the key.

Average consumption

The average fuel consumption is displayed de-

pending on the setting of the intervals for dis-

playing the trip data.

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

The trip data is displayed.

Safety information

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

2. Press and hold the button until the values

are reset.

Via iDrive:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

General

3. "System settings"

The Assisted View display can be configured in

the central indication range and displayed.

4. "Time period for journey data"

5. "Reset Individual"

For further information:

Central display area, see page 170.

The average values and counters are reset.

Once the average values and counters have

been reset, the following interval is automati-

cally activated:

Display

"Since Individual ( )"

Assisted View

Principle

With Assisted View, information on driver as-

sistance systems can be displayed on the in-

strument cluster with a vehicle animation.

An example with active driver assistance: the

indicator and warning lights for the distance

control and the Lane Change Assistant indi-

cate a lane change to the next lane. At the

same time, the lane change to the next lane is

shown with animation in the Assisted View.

Information on parking and manoeuvring is

displayed in Assisted View whenever Park As-

sist is enabled.

System limits

The detection capability of the system is limi-

ted.

Only objects detected by the system are taken

into account.

173

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

For further information:

4. "Date and time"

▷

Cameras, see page 41.

5. Select the desired settings.

Radar sensors, see page 42.

Fuel level indicator

G-Meter

Principle

The current filling level of the fuel tank is dis-

played.

General

The G-Meter shows the longitudinal and lat-

eral forces acting on the vehicle occupants

during a journey.

General

The vehicle inclination may cause the display

to fluctuate.

The display can be configured in the central

indication range of the instrument cluster.

For further information:

Refuelling, see page 360.

The values are automatically reset after each

start of the journey.

For further information:

Display

Central display area, see page 170.

An arrow next to the fuel pump

symbol indicates on which side

of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is

located.

Manually resetting G-Meter values

1. Display G-Meter in the instrument cluster.

2. Press and hold the knurled wheel

The current range is displayed

as a numerical value.

on the steering wheel until the val-

ues are reset.

Range

Date and time

Principle

The range shows what distance can be cov-

ered with the amount of fuel currently in the

tank.

Various settings can be configured for the dis-

play of date and time, for example the date

format.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the time zone can be set and

the automatic time setting can be activated.

The automatic time setting automatically up-

dates the time, date and, if necessary, the time

zone.

General

The estimated range available with the re-

maining fuel is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

A Check Control message is displayed briefly if

the remaining range is low. A small remaining

range means that the engine functions are not

always ensured if a sporty driving style is em-

ployed, e.g. when cornering fast.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

If the range drops below approximately 50 km,

30 miles the Check Control message is dis-

played continuously.

Displaying the vehicle status

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Vehicle status"

Safety information

Overview

NOTICE

If the range drops below 50 km, approx.

30 miles, the engine may no longer be sup-

plied with sufficient fuel. The engine functions

are no longer ensured. There is a risk of ma-

terial damage. Refuel in good time.

Icon

Description

"Flat Tyre Monitor": Status of

the Flat Tyre Monitor, see

page 380.

"Tyre Pressure Monitor": sta-

tus of the Tyre Pressure Mon-

itor, see page 373.

Display

The current range is displayed

as a numerical value on the fuel

level indicator.

"Engine oil level": Electronic oil

measurement, see page 398.

"AdBlue": BMW Diesel

with BluePerformance, see

page 394.

"Check Control": to display

saved Check Control mes-

sages, see page 166.

Selecting the units of

measurement

"Service requirements": to dis-

play service requirements, see

page 176.

Depending on the national-market version, it

is possible to select the units of measurement

for various values, for example, consumption,

distances and temperature.

1.

Apps menu

Current driving condition

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Units"

General

The current driving condition is displayed dy-

namically while driving in the Live Vehicle

menu on the control display.

5. Select the desired setting.

The following states can be displayed:

Vehicle status

▷

Driving.

Coasting driving condition: "EFFICIENT

COASTING".

General

The status can be displayed and actions per-

formed for several systems, such as for Check

Control.

▷

"CHARGING BATTERY"

With mild hybrid technology:

175

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Displays

CONTROLS

▷

Adaptive recuperation.

Operating requirements

Depending on the situation, additional in-

formation on adaptive recuperation may be

displayed.

▷

SPORT drive mode is selected.

▷

The following setting is selected for Live

Vehicle: "Adaptive content"

Efficient coasting with the engine switched

off.

Display

For further information:

The sport displays are displayed in the Live

Vehicle menu on the control display.

▷

Adaptive recuperation, see page 355.

Coasting, see page 356.

The following information is displayed:

▷

Torque.

Operating requirements

Power.

▷

COMFORT or ECO PRO drive mode is se-

lected.

Charging pressure.

Engine oil temperature.

▷

The following setting is selected for Live

Vehicle: "Adaptive content"

Service requirements

Display

Principle

The function shows the current service require-

ments and related maintenance jobs.

General

After switching on, the next service appoint-

ment or the distance remaining until your next

servicing is displayed briefly on the instrument

cluster if necessary.

An example:

The current service requirements can be read

out from the vehicle key by a service advisor.

The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.

The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-

cle is decelerating, arrow 2.

Display

More detailed information on the maintenance

work required can be displayed on the control

display.

Sport displays

1.

Apps menu

Principle

The sport displays primarily assist a sporty

driving style.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Service requirements"

Maintenance routines and any statutory in-

spections required are displayed.

5. Select the desired entry.

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Displays

CONTROLS

Icons

Entering deadlines

Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can

be entered.

Icon

Description

Maintenance has been carried

out on time.

Ensure that the date and time are set correctly

in the vehicle.

1.

Apps menu

Maintenance has been carried

out later than scheduled.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Vehicle status"

Maintenance has not been car-

ried out.

4. "Service requirements"

5. "Vehicle inspection"

6. "Date:"

7. Select the desired setting.

Service history

Principle

Completed maintenance work can be dis-

played on the control display.

General

Have maintenance work carried out by an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop. The

maintenance work carried out is entered in the

vehicle data. The function is available as soon

as a maintenance visit has been logged in the

vehicle data.

Displays

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Service requirements"

Essential maintenance routines and any

statutory inspections required are dis-

played.

5. "Service history"

6. Select an entry to display more detailed in-

formation.

177

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Lights

CONTROLS

Lights

Functions via iDrive

Vehicle equipment

Icon

Function

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Automatic driving lights control.

Low-beam headlight.

Side lights.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Lights and lighting

Exterior lights off.

Overview

Buttons in the vehicle

Buttons on the vehicle key

Icon

Function

Interior lighting.

Parts of the exterior lights.

Home lights.

Icon

Function

Automatic driving lights

control

Exterior lights menu.

Principle

Automatic driving lights control.

Low-beam headlight.

Exterior lights off.

Depending on ambient brightness, the system

switches the low-beam headlight on or off au-

tomatically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight

and in rain or snow.

Rear fog light.

General

The headlights may also be switched on when

the sun is low against a blue sky.

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Lights

CONTROLS

If the low-beam headlight is switched on man-

ually, the automatic driving lights control is de-

activated.

3. "Exterior lighting"

4. "Side light"

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated.

Activating the automatic driving

lights control

The vehicle is illuminated all round.

Press the button on the light switch.

Do not leave the side lights on for extended

periods of time, as this could drain the vehicle

battery and it may no longer be possible to

switch on drive-ready state.

The LED in the button illuminates.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the low-

beam headlight is switched on.

Switching off the side lights

The side lights can be switched off as follows:

System limits

The automatic driving lights control is no sub-

stitute for using your own judgement to assess

the light conditions.

▷

Press and hold the

light switch.

button on the

▷

Switch off the lights via iDrive.

Switch on drive-ready state.

The sensors are unable to recognise fog or

hazy weather, for example. In such situations,

switch on the lights manually.

After switching on drive-ready state, the

automatic driving lights control is activated.

Low-beam headlight

Side lights, low-beam

headlights,

Switching on the low-beam headlight

Press the button on the light switch.

General

The low-beam headlight illuminates if drive-

ready state is switched on.

If the driver's door is opened when drive-ready

state is switched off, the exterior lights are

switched off automatically after a given time.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated.

Side lights

To switch on the low-beam headlight as soon

as the standby state is switched on, press the

button again.

General

The side lights can only be switched on in the

low speed range.

Switching off the low-beam headlight

Switching on the side lights

Depending on the national-market version, the

low-beam headlight may be switched off in the

low speed range:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

179

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Lights

CONTROLS

Depending on the settings, the interior

lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will

be turned on.

▷

Press and hold the

light switch.

button on the

The function is not available for the first

10 seconds after locking.

Switch off the lights via iDrive.

Welcome Light Carpet

Welcome light

Principle

With the welcome light, the exterior lights are

automatically turned on for a limited time when

approaching or unlocking the vehicle.

General

Depending on the equipment, the exterior

lights of the vehicle can be individually adjus-

ted.

The light source is located in the position indi-

cated.

Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.

Activating/deactivating welcome

light

1.

Apps menu

Home lights

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Exterior lighting"

Principle

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

With the home lights, the exterior lights are

automatically turned on for a limited time after

leaving the vehicle in order to illuminate the

area around the vehicle.

5. Depending on the equipment, select the

desired setting:

▷

"Welcome and goodbye"

When unlocking the vehicle, individual

lighting functions are turned on.

Switching on the home lights

▷

After switching off drive-ready state, press

the turn indicator lever forwards briefly.

▷

"BMW Iconic Glow"

The radiator grille lighting settings are

only available while at a standstill and

with drive-ready state switched off.

▷

Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approximately 1 second.

Turning on the welcome light

Activate the home lights function for the button

of the vehicle key:

▷

Automatically on approach.

▷

During unlocking.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

▷

With the vehicle locked, press the

button on the vehicle key.

3. "Doors and windows"

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Lights

CONTROLS

4. "Vehicle key"

Adaptive lighting functions

5. Select the desired setting.

Principle

Setting the duration

Adaptive lighting functions makes it possible to

illuminate the road responsively.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Exterior lighting"

General

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. "Home lights"

The adaptive lighting functions consist of one

system or multiple systems, depending on the

equipment:

6. Select the desired setting.

▷

Adaptive Headlights.

Variable light distribution.

Cornering light.

Daytime driving lights

Roundabout light.

General

The daytime driving lights illuminate when

drive-ready state is switched on.

Activating the adaptive light

functions

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the rear

daytime driving lights are switched on.

Press the button on the light switch.

The LED in the button illuminates.

The adaptive lighting functions are active

when drive-ready state is switched on.

Activating/deactivating daytime

driving lights

In some countries, daytime driving lights are

compulsory, in which case the daytime driving

lights cannot be deactivated at the front.

Adaptive Headlights

1.

Apps menu

General

2. "Vehicle apps"

The high-beam headlight follows the road

ahead in response to the steering wheel angle

and other parameters.

3. "Exterior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. Depending on equipment or national-mar-

ket version:

Anticipatory Adaptive Headlights

The high-beam headlight is adapted to the di-

rection of travel ahead even before entering or

leaving a bend.

▷

"Daytime driving lights"

"Rear daytime driving lights"

"BMW Iconic Glow"

S-bend lights

The high-beam headlight is kept as straight as

possible when driving around S-bends.

181

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Lights

CONTROLS

Variable light distribution

Roundabout light

Shortly before driving onto a roundabout, the

cornering light is activated on both sides. The

edge of the road is illuminated more effec-

tively. Shortly before leaving a roundabout, the

cornering light is switched off again on both

sides.

Principle

The variable light distribution enables better

illumination of the road.

General

The light distribution is adjusted automatically

depending on speed and navigation data, if

necessary.

Adaptive headlight range

control

Urban lights

Adaptive headlight range control compensates

for acceleration and braking manoeuvres and

vehicle load conditions to prevent oncoming

vehicles from being dazzled.

The light beam from the low-beam headlight is

extended at the sides.

Motorway beam pattern

The range of the low-beam headlight is in-

creased.

High-beam Assistant

Principle

Cornering light

High-beam Assistant detects other road users

in good time and activates or deactivates the

high-beam according to traffic situation.

Principle

When turning off or on tight bends, for example

hairpin bends, up to a certain speed, a corner-

ing light is added to illuminate the inside area

of the bend.

General

High-beam Assistant ensures that the high-

beam headlight is switched on when the traffic

situation allows. The system does not switch

on the high-beam headlight at low speed

range.

General

The cornering light is switched on automati-

cally depending on the steering wheel angle or,

where applicable, activation of the turn indica-

tors.

The system responds to the lights of oncoming

traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to

ambient lighting, for example in built-up areas.

When reversing, the cornering light is activated

automatically irrespective of the steering wheel

angle.

The high-beam headlight can be switched on

and off manually at any time.

If equipped with Selective Beam, the high-

beam headlight is not switched off for oncom-

ing vehicles or vehicles driving ahead of you.

Instead, the system masks only those areas

of the beam which would otherwise dazzle on-

coming traffic or traffic driving ahead. In this

Hairpin lights

The cornering light is also switched on before

entering hairpin bends.

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Lights

CONTROLS

case, the blue indicator light continues to illu-

minate.

Deactivating High-beam Assistant

Depending on the equipment: if the headlights

have been converted, High-beam Assistant

may only function to a restricted extent.

For further information:

Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 184.

Operating requirements

▷

Automatic driving lights control is activated.

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

▷

The low-beam headlight is switched on.

Activating High-beam Assistant

System limits

High-beam Assistant cannot replace the driv-

er's own judgement as to when to use the

high-beam headlight. Therefore activate the

dipped headlights manually if the situation re-

quires it.

In the following situations, the system will not

operate or its operation will be restricted and

your intervention may be required:

▷

In extremely adverse weather conditions

such as fog or heavy precipitation.

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

▷

When detecting poorly lit road users such

as pedestrians, cyclists, horse riders or car-

riages and when trains or ships are close to

the road, or when animals are crossing the

road.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the low-

beam headlight is switched on.

The system will switch automatically between

low-beam headlight and high-beam headlight.

▷

On tight bends, on steep brows or hollows

of hills, when there is crossing traffic or if

the view of oncoming vehicles on a motor-

way is partly obstructed.

The blue indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster illuminates if the high-

beam headlight is switched on by the

system.

▷

In poorly lit towns or where there are highly

reflective signs.

If a journey is interrupted with High-beam As-

sistant activated: when the journey is resumed,

High-beam Assistant remains activated.

If the area of windscreen in front of the in-

terior mirror is covered with condensation,

dirt, stickers, labels, etc.

The High-beam Assistant is deactivated by

switching the high-beams on and off manually.

To reactivate High-beam Assistant, press the

button on the turn indicator lever.

183

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Lights

CONTROLS

cle's country of registration, you will need to

prevent the dazzling effect of your headlights.

Fog light

Rear fog light

Converting the headlights

1.

Apps menu

Operating requirements

The low-beam headlight must be switched on

before the rear fog light can be activated.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Exterior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Additional settings"

5. "Right/left-hand traffic"

6. Select the desired setting.

Switching the rear fog light on/off

Press the key.

Depending on the national-market version,

the parking brake must be applied.

The yellow indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster illuminates when the rear

fog light is switched on.

System limits

The availability of the High-beam Assistant

might be restricted.

If automatic driving lights control has been

activated, the low-beam headlight switches

on automatically when the rear fog light is

switched on.

The availability of the adaptive lighting func-

tions might be restricted.

Instrument lighting

Bad weather light

Principle

Operating requirements

The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-

ness and with turned on side light or low-beam

headlight.

The bad weather light provides optimised illu-

mination of the road when visibility conditions

are poor, for example in fog or rain. The light

distribution from the low-beam headlight is

adapted to the visibility conditions.

Adjusting the brightness

1.

Apps menu

Activating/deactivating the bad

weather light

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Interior lighting"

The bad weather light is activated when the

automatic driving light system or the rear fog

light is switched on.

4. "Cockpit brightness at night"

5. Select the desired setting.

Left-hand/right-hand traffic

Interior lighting

General

When driving in countries where vehicles drive

on the opposite side of the road to your vehi-

Depending on the equipment, the interior

lights, the footwell lights, door entry lighting,

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Lights

CONTROLS

ambient lighting and loudspeaker lighting are

controlled automatically.

Depending on the equipment, there are read-

ing lights located at the front and in the rear

beside the interior lights.

Overview

Via iDrive:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Interior lighting"

4. "Reading light"

5. Tap the desired seat.

Ambient lighting

Reading lights

Interior lights

General

Depending on the equipment, the lighting for

some of the interior lights can be adjusted.

Activating/deactivating ambient

light

Switching interior lights on/off

Using the button:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Press the key.

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Ambient lighting"

To switch off permanently: press and hold the

button for approximately 3 seconds.

The interior lights in the rear can be switched

on and off independently. The button is loca-

ted on the headliner in the rear.

Turning ambient lighting on/off

The ambient lighting is switched on when the

vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the

vehicle is locked.

Via iDrive:

1.

Apps menu

If the ambient lighting was deactivated using

iDrive, it is not switched on when the vehicle is

unlocked.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Interior lighting"

4. "Reading light"

Selecting the colour

5.

Tap the icon.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Switching reading lights on/off

Using the button:

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Colour"

Press the key.

6. Select the desired setting.

185

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Lights

CONTROLS

Adjusting the brightness

Loudspeaker lighting

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Principle

3. "Interior lighting"

Some loudspeakers in the vehicle are illumina-

ted.

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Brightness"

General

6. Select the desired setting.

When the loudspeakers are muted, the loud-

speaker lighting turns off. When the ambient

lighting effects are activated, the loudspeakers

light up white.

Dynamic light

Individual actions, for example incoming calls

or detected obstacles when doors are open,

are indicated by light effects. If the ambient

light is deactivated, the light effects are still

displayed.

Turning loudspeaker lighting on/off

The loudspeaker lighting is switched on when

the vehicle is unlocked and switched off when

the vehicle is locked.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Lighting events"

6. Select the desired setting.

Reduced for journey at night

Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced

when the vehicle is driven in the dark.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Interior lighting"

4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Reduced for night driving"

Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting

If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or

the sun protection is closed, the lighting is

switched off.

186

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Safety

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Vehicle equipment

For further information:

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Airbags

1

Front airbag, driver

3

4

Head airbag

Side airbag

2

Front airbag, front passenger

Depending on the national-market version:

Front airbags

In a side-on crash, the side airbag in the rear

protects the bodies of the vehicle occupants in

the outer rear seats in the side chest and pelvic

area.

Front airbags protect the driver and front pas-

senger in the event of a head-on collision

where the protection of the seat belts alone

would no longer be sufficient.

Head airbag

Side airbag

The head airbag protects the head in the event

of a side-on crash.

In a side-on crash, the side airbag protects the

side of the body in the chest and pelvic area.

187

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

Do not glue the airbag covers and do not

cover or modify them in any way.

Protective effect

General

Do not use the front airbag cover on the

passenger's side as a tray.

Airbags are not activated in every collision sit-

uation, for example, in minor accidents.

Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or

other objects to the front seats that are not

specifically suited for seats with integrated

airbag versions.

Information for optimum airbag

protective effect

▷

Do not hang items of clothing, for example

coats or jackets, over the backrests.

WARNING

Do not modify individual components or

wiring. This also applies to the covers of the

steering wheel, the dashboard and seats.

If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy-

ment area of the airbag is restricted, the air-

bag system cannot provide the intended level

of protection or may cause additional injuries

when it deploys. There is a danger of injury or

danger to life. Observe the following for opti-

mum protective effect of the airbag system.

▷

Do not dismantle the airbag system.

Even if all this information is observed, injuries

resulting from contact with the airbag cannot

be entirely ruled out in every situation.

The noise caused by the deployment of an

airbag may lead to temporary hearing loss in

vehicle occupants sensitive to noise.

▷

Keep a distance from the airbags.

Always grip the steering wheel at the steer-

ing wheel rim. Place your hands in the

3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to mini-

mise the risk of injury to hands or arms

when the airbag deploys.

Operational readiness of the airbag

system

▷

Adjust the seat and steering wheel so the

driver can reach over the steering wheel di-

agonally. Select the settings so that, when

reaching over, the shoulders stay in contact

with the backrest and the upper body stays

as far away from the steering wheel as

possible.

Safety information

WARNING

Individual components of the airbag system

may be hot after airbag deployment. There

is a danger of injury. Do not touch individual

components.

▷

Make sure that the front passenger is sit-

ting correctly, i.e. with their feet and legs in

the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.

WARNING

▷

Make sure that vehicle occupants keep

their head away from the side airbag.

Work carried out incorrectly can cause the

airbag system to fail, malfunction or deploy

accidentally. If there is a malfunction, the air-

bag system might not deploy as intended

in an accident, even if the impact is of the

appropriate severity. There is a danger of in-

jury or danger to life. Have the airbag system

tested, repaired or removed and disposed of

Do not place any other persons, pets or ob-

jects between the airbags and occupants.

Keep the dashboard and windscreen area

on the passenger's side clear, for example

do not attach adhesive foil or covers and

do not fit brackets for navigation devices or

mobile phones, for example.

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

by an authorised Service Partner or another

qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-

shop.

General

The availability of the function depends on the

vehicle equipment and country.

The front passenger airbag can be deactiva-

ted and reactivated via iDrive on the control

display. An indicator light shows the operating

status.

Display in the instrument cluster

When drive-ready state is switched on,

the warning light in the instrument

cluster illuminates briefly to indicate

that the entire airbag system and the seat belt

tensioners are operational.

Operating requirements

▷

Drive-ready state is switched off.

Standby state is switched on.

The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

Malfunction

▷

The warning light does not illu-

minate after drive-ready state is

switched on.

Deactivating the front passenger

airbag

1.

Apps menu

▷

The warning light is permanently illumina-

ted.

2. "Vehicle apps"

Have the system checked by an authorised

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

3. "Passenger airbag"

4. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

5. Check the operation of the front passenger

airbag using the indicator light and confirm.

Adjusting the front seat position

The front passenger airbag is deactivated. The

driver airbag remains active.

To maintain the accuracy of the seat position,

calibrate the electric front seats as soon as

a corresponding message is displayed on the

control display.

If a rearward-facing child restraint system is

removed from the front passenger seat, reacti-

vate the front passenger airbag so that it can

deploy as intended in the event of an accident.

For further information:

Seats, see page 109.

Activating the front passenger

airbag

Deactivating the front

passenger airbag

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Passenger airbag"

4. "PASSENGER AIR BAG ON"

Principle

When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, the

front passenger airbag can be deactivated via

iDrive.

5. Check the operation of the front passenger

airbag using the indicator light and confirm.

The front passenger airbag is reactivated and

deploys in appropriate situations.

189

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Front passenger airbag indicator

light

Safety information

The indicator light for the front passenger air-

bag in the headliner shows the operating sta-

tus of the front passenger airbag.

WARNING

The system may trigger inadvertently if con-

tact is made with individual components of

the hinges and bonnet locks. There is a dan-

ger of injury or material damage. Do not

touch individual components of the hinges

and bonnet locks.

After switching on standby state, the light illu-

minates briefly and then shows whether the

airbag is activated or deactivated.

Display

Function

When the front passenger air-

bag is activated, the indicator

light illuminates for approx. 1

minute and then goes out.

WARNING

Modifications to the pedestrian protection

can lead to a failure, a malfunction or acci-

dental triggering of the pedestrian protection

system. There is a danger of injury or danger

to life. Do not modify the pedestrian protec-

tion, its individual components or its wiring.

Do not dismantle the system.

When the front passenger air-

bag is deactivated, the indica-

tor light remains illuminated.

Check the status of the indicator light before

and also while driving when the front passen-

ger seat is occupied.

WARNING

Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a

failure, malfunction or accidental triggering of

the system. If there is a malfunction, the sys-

tem might not trigger as intended in an acci-

dent, even if the impact is of the appropriate

severity. There is a danger of injury or danger

to life. Have the system tested, repaired or

removed and disposed of by an authorised

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

Active pedestrian protection

Principle

The active pedestrian protection raises the

bonnet if the front of the vehicle collides with

a pedestrian.

General

When triggered, the pedestrian protection cre-

ates deformation space underneath the bon-

net in readiness for the subsequent head

impact. Sensors underneath the bumper are

used for detection.

WARNING

If the system has been triggered or is dam-

aged, its functionality will be restricted or it

may no longer work at all. There is a danger

of injury or danger to life.

The system’s gas pressure springs are only

approved for a certain period of time. Check

the gas pressure springs during maintenance

and replace them as necessary.

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

If the system has been triggered or is dam-

aged, have it checked and replaced at an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Collision warning systems

General

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has

different systems that can help prevent an im-

minent collision.

NOTICE

▷

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

Exit warning, see page 201.

Opening the bonnet when the pedestrian

protection has triggered may damage the

bonnet or the pedestrian protection. There is

a risk of material damage. Do not open the

bonnet after the Check Control message is

displayed. Have it checked by an authorised

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

Lane Departure Warning, see page 203.

Lane Change Warning, see page 207.

Side collision warning, see page 210.

Road Priority Warning, see page 212.

Wrong-way Warning, see page 215.

Rear Collision Prevention, see page 212.

Emergency Stop Assistant, see page 216.

System limits

The active pedestrian protection is only

triggered at speeds between approximately

30 km/h, 18 mph and 55 km/h, 34 mph.

Safety information

For safety reasons, the system may also trig-

ger in rare instances where impact with a pe-

destrian cannot be excluded beyond all doubt,

for example in the following situations:

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

▷

Collision with objects such as a skip or a

boundary post.

▷

Collision with animals.

Stone impact.

Driving into a snow drift.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is shown.

WARNING

The system has been triggered or is

faulty.

Displays and warnings do not relieve you

of your personal responsibility. System limits

can mean that warnings or system respon-

ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-

correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of

accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

intervene actively if the situation warrants it.

Immediately drive at moderate speed to an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop to

have the system checked and repaired.

191

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

The system only takes into account objects

within the detection range of the installed sen-

sors and that are detected by the system.

Turning on/turning off collision

warning systems

Depending on the national-market version,

some of the systems are automatically active

after every driving off.

Depending on the equipment, the area is

monitored by cameras or radar sensors.

For this reason, the system may fail to respond

or only respond after a delay.

The following functions are adjustable.

1.

Apps menu

System limits of the sensors

For further information:

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. Select the desired settings.

Front-collision warning

Resetting settings

The settings of the collision warning systems

can be reset to the default settings for vehicle

delivery.

Principle

The front-collision warning can help prevent

accidents. If an accident cannot be avoided,

the system may help reduce the severity of the

accident.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

The system can issue a warning of a possible

risk of collision and may activate the brakes

independently.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Reset to recommended settings"

General

Depending on the equipment version, the

front-collision warning system includes the

following functions:

System limits

▷

Warning function in rear-end collision situa-

tions, see page 195.

Safety information

Warning function for oncoming traffic, see

page 196.

WARNING

Due to system limitations, the system may

not respond at all, or may respond too late,

incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Observe the in-

formation on the system limits and intervene

actively if necessary.

Warning function for turning with oncoming

traffic, see page 197.

Warning function for pedestrians, see

page 198.

Warning function at road junctions, see

page 199.

Evasion Assistant, see page 200.

Detection capability

The detection capability of the system is limi-

ted.

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Safety information

Speed range

The system issues a warning of a possi-

ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.

5 km/h/3 mph.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

The system is temporarily disabled at speeds

over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.

Some functions are deactivated earlier.

As soon as the speed drops below these val-

ues again, the system is activated.

Turning the front-collision warning

on/off

Switching on the system automatically

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically active after every driv-

ing off.

WARNING

Displays and warnings do not relieve you

of your personal responsibility. System limits

can mean that warnings or system respon-

ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-

correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of

accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

intervene actively if the situation warrants it.

Switching the system on manually

The system is activated when the warning

time is set.

For further information:

Setting the warning time, see page 194.

Switching the system off manually

Depending on the national-market version, the

setting can only be made at a vehicle standstill

or in the very low speed range.

WARNING

Individual functions may malfunction when

tow-starting or towing away with activa-

ted front-collision warning or Cruise Control

switched on. There is a risk of accident. Turn

off the front-collision warning and Cruise

Control before tow-starting or towing away.

If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed

successively on the control display.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Front collision warning"

7. "Off"

Sensors

Depending on the equipment, the system is

controlled by the following sensors:

▷

Camera behind the windscreen.

Front radar sensor.

Side radar sensors, front.

193

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Setting the warning time

Icon

Meaning

1.

Apps menu

Risk of collision, for example, with a

pedestrian.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

Risk of collision, for example, with an

oncoming or a vehicle driving in front.

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Front collision warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Risk of collision, e.g. with a crossing

vehicle from the right.

The higher the sensitivity of the warning time

settings the more warnings are displayed. The

system may therefore also issue more early or

unfounded warnings and reactions.

Risk of collision, e.g. with a crossing

vehicle from the left.

General risk of collision.

The system checks for visual impairments. De-

pending on equipment, the Driver Attention

Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the

driver's gaze behaviour. Visibility conditions

and field of vision also affect the timing of the

warnings.

The display of the respective indicator light

and warning light may vary because the sys-

tem may detect multiple objects.

Display in the instrument cluster

Warning function

The front-collision warning warns on different

warning levels, depending on the respective

hazardous situation.

The following indicator lights and warning

lights are shown in the instrument cluster and,

depending on the equipment, in the Head-up

display:

In the event of a system warning, the driver

must intervene immediately and in accordance

with the situation.

Icon

Meaning

Depending on equipment and na-

tional-market version:

▷

A red warning light is illuminated:

A hazardous situation has been detected.

Increased awareness is required.

Functional limitation detected, for ex-

ample, due to system limits of the

cameras or system failure. It is pos-

sible to continue driving. Where appli-

cable, observe the information from

Check Control messages.

A red warning light flashes:

There is a risk of collision. Intervene your-

self immediately.

A warning signal sounds:

System limits of the cameras, see

page 41.

There is a risk of collision. Intervene your-

self immediately.

Depending on equipment and na-

tional-market version:

Automatic brake intervention:

Depending on the equipment and situation

in case of an imminent danger of collision,

the system can also intervene with an auto-

matic brake intervention and automatically

The system is switched off.

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a

complete standstill.

The system only takes into account objects

within the detection range of the installed sen-

sors and that are detected by the system.

When the brake pedal is pressed quickly and

hard, the maximum brake force of the vehicle

is used.

Depending on the equipment, the area is

monitored by cameras or radar sensors.

For this reason, the system may fail to respond

or only respond after a delay.

Automatic brake intervention

In case of a risk of collision, the system can

assist with an automatic brake intervention, if

necessary.

System limits of the sensors

For further information:

At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a

standstill.

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

In the event of automatic brake intervention,

Dynamic Stability Control may be activated au-

tomatically.

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality

in situations such as the following:

A brake intervention can be cancelled by suf-

ficiently stepping on the accelerator pedal, re-

leasing the brake pedal or with an active steer-

ing wheel movement.

▷

In tight bends.

With restriction of the driving stability con-

trol systems.

▷

Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

Depending on the equipment and situation,

the brake intervention can occur at speeds of

up to approx. 250 km/h/155 mph.

At speeds above approx. 210 km/h/130 mph,

only a brief brake intervention will occur.

Warning function in rear-end

collision situations

System limits

Principle

Safety information

The warning function in rear-end collision sit-

uations warns of a possible risk of collision and

may brake independently.

WARNING

If an accident cannot be avoided, the system

helps to reduce the collision speed.

Due to system limitations, the system may

not respond at all, or may respond too late,

incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Observe the in-

formation on the system limits and intervene

actively if necessary.

Detection capability

The detection capability of the system is limi-

ted.

195

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

System limits

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected,

or only detected with a delay, for instance:

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

▷

Slow driving vehicle in front being ap-

proached at high speed.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-

prox. 5 km/h/3 mph. The timing of these warn-

ings may vary depending on the current driving

situation.

Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating

heavily.

Vehicles with unusual rear design.

The driver’s own driving behaviour is taken

into account in the responses of the system.

If an active driving style is detected, warnings

and brake interventions are output less fre-

quently.

Warning function for

oncoming traffic

Principle

The Warning function for oncoming traffic can

issue a warning of a possible risk of collision

with oncoming vehicles and apply the brakes

independently, if needed.

Safety information

Follow the Safety Information in Chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

If an accident cannot be avoided, the system

helps to reduce the collision speed.

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

General

Icon

Meaning

Collision Warning with a detected ve-

hicle.

General risk of collision.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene

personally.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

For further information:

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-

prox. 5 km/h/3 mph. The timing of these warn-

ings may vary depending on the current driving

situation.

Warning function for turning

with oncoming traffic

Principle

There is a risk of an accident with oncoming

vehicles when turning across the oncoming

lane. The system can issue a warning of a

possible risk of collision and may activate the

brakes independently.

Safety information

Follow the Safety Information in Chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

If an accident cannot be avoided, the system

helps to reduce the collision speed.

General

Icon

Meaning

Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-

hicle is detected.

General risk of collision.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene

personally.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

In case of a risk of collision, a brake interven-

tion is triggered.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds

from approx. 5 km/h/3 mph. The timing of

these warnings may vary depending on the

current driving situation.

For further information:

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

System limits

Safety information

Follow the Safety Information in Chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

Detection range

For example the following might not be detec-

ted:

▷

Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.

Vehicles with an unusual front view.

197

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Meaning

If an accident cannot be avoided, the system

helps to reduce the collision speed.

Icon

Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-

hicle is detected.

General

General risk of collision.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene

personally.

For further information:

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range on a straight line.

System limits

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

Detection range

For example the following might not be detec-

ted:

▷

Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.

Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.

Vehicles with an unusual front view.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range when turning off.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with pedestrians at speeds above

approx. 5 km/h/3 mph.

Upper speed limit

The system is active when the own speed is

below approx. 25 km/h/15 mph.

Safety information

Follow the Safety Information in Chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

Warning function for

pedestrians

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

person, a warning light is displayed.

Principle

The warning function for pedestrians warns

of the risk of collision with pedestrians and cy-

clists at speeds that are common in towns and

cities. The system may brake automatically if

necessary.

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Upper speed limit

Icon

Meaning

Depending on the equipment, the system re-

acts to pedestrians when your own speed is up

to 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.

Risk of collision with a pedestrian.

General risk of collision.

Warning function at road

junctions

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene

personally.

Principle

The warning function at road junctions can

warn of a possible risk of collision with crossing

traffic at intersections and junctions at speeds

that are common in towns and cities. The sys-

tem may brake automatically if necessary.

For further information:

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

System limits

If an accident cannot be avoided, the system

helps to reduce the collision speed.

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

General

Detection range

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

Vehicles that cross the vehicle's direction of

travel can be detected by the system as soon

as these vehicles enter the detection range of

the sensors.

The detection range consists of the following

parts:

▷

Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.

With side radar sensors in front: side areas,

arrows 2.

A warning is given at road junctions and cross-

roads if there is a risk of collision with crossing

traffic.

For example the following might not be detec-

ted:

The system issues a warning of a possible risk

of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-

prox. 5 km/h/3 mph.

▷

Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of their contour or posture.

The timing of these warnings may vary de-

pending on the current driving situation.

▷

Pedestrians with insufficient height.

199

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Upper speed limit

Safety information

The system responds to crossing vehicles

when your own speed is below approx.

80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.

Follow the Safety Information in Chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

Evasion Assistant

Icon

Meaning

Principle

Risk of collision with crossing vehicle

from right.

The Evasion Assistant can support the driver

in making evasive manoeuvres in certain situa-

tions, for example, when obstacles or persons

suddenly appear.

Risk of collision with crossing vehicle

from left.

General

General risk of collision.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene

personally.

For further information:

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

The system issues warnings and intervenes to

provide support if there is a possibility to take

an avoidance manoeuvre to the side.

System limits

General

Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in

front of the vehicle. Depending on the equip-

ment, the areas next to the vehicle are also

monitored.

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

Detection range

For example the following might not be detec-

ted:

The system uses a detected free space for

avoidance by safely supporting the avoidance

manoeuvre carried out by the driver with auto-

matic steering movements.

▷

Crossing vehicles concealed by buildings,

for example.

Safety information

Follow the Safety Information in Chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

▷

Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.

Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-

tions.

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

Slow driving vehicle in front being ap-

proached at high speed.

Operating requirements

▷

Front-collision warning is active.

Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating

heavily.

▷

Sensors detect adequate space around the

vehicle.

▷

Vehicles with unusual rear design.

Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected

vehicle or person, a warning light is displayed.

Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.

Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of their contour or posture.

Icon

Meaning

▷

Pedestrians with insufficient height.

Warning when a vehicle is detected.

Exit warning

Warning when a person is detected.

Warning for unknown obstacles.

Principle

The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.

The system can warn the passengers when

they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-

sion with approaching objects is detected.

Warning function with evasion

support

If the vehicle approaches another object at a

high differential speed, a warning is displayed

if there is an immediate risk of collision.

General

Intervene in case of a warning.

The system provides support for the driver's

avoidance manoeuvres if there is a risk of colli-

sion.

A message in the instrument cluster and, de-

pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-

play signals the evasion support.

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind the vehicle.

System limits

Depending on the equipment, the area in front

of the vehicle is also monitored. For this pur-

pose, two further radar sensors are located in

the front bumper.

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Front-collision warning”.

The system monitors the area around the ve-

hicle for a limited time after getting in or after

parking.

Detection range

For example the following might not be detec-

ted:

A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-

ous warning functions.

201

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Exit warning"

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the Chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Sensors

7. "Warning tone"

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

Displays

▷

Side radar sensors, rear.

Warning light in the exterior mirror

Depending on the equipment: side radar

sensors, front.

Turning the exit warning on/off

Switching on the system automatically

The exit warning activates automatically after

departure if the function was turned on at the

end of the last journey.

Switching the system off manually

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns

of a possible collision.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Exit warning"

7. "Off"

Ambient lighting

Depending on the equipment, warnings are

also indicated by the ambient lighting in the

interior.

Warning function

Adjusting the exit warning

Advance warning

1.

Apps menu

In the event of an advance warning, the warn-

ing light in the exterior mirror is illuminated.

Depending on the equipment, the ambient

lighting also flashes.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Exit warning"

An object was detected in the opening range.

Increased awareness is required.

Acute warning

7. Select the desired setting.

In the event of an acute warning, the warning

light in the exterior mirror flashes and, depend-

ing on the equipment, the ambient lighting also

flashes. An acoustic signal also sounds.

Switching the warning signal on/off

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

202

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

There is a risk of collision when opening the

doors.

General

System limits

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Detection range

For example the following might not be detec-

ted:

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

▷

Fully or partially hidden objects.

Stationary or very slow objects.

Pedestrians.

The system issues a warning starting at a min-

imum speed. The minimum speed is country-

specific and displayed on the control display.

Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-

ter. In addition, the steering wheel is vibrating.

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality

in situations such as the following:

The system does not issue a warning if the

driver indicates in the corresponding direction

before leaving the driving lane.

▷

The speed of an approaching vehicle is too

fast or too slow.

Safety information

▷

In curves.

In case of fully or partially hidden objects.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the layout of

the road and the traffic situation. There is a

risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to

the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic sit-

uation and intervene actively if the situation

warrants it. In the event of a warning, do

not move the steering wheel unnecessarily

abruptly.

Lane Departure Warning

with active return

Principle

The Lane Departure Warning issues a warning

if the vehicle leaves the road or its driving lane.

An automatic steering intervention may help in

keeping the vehicle in its lane.

WARNING

Displays and warnings do not relieve you

of your personal responsibility. System limits

can mean that warnings or system respon-

ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-

correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of

accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

203

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

intervene actively if the situation warrants it.

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane departure warning"

7. "Off"

Operating requirements

The lane marking must be detected by the

camera in order for the Lane Departure Warn-

ing to be active.

Setting the Lane Departure Warning

Setting the warning time

1.

Apps menu

The areas of the sensors must be clean and

clear.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

Sensors

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane departure warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Depending on the equipment, the system is

controlled by the following sensors:

▷

Camera behind the windscreen.

Front radar sensor.

▷

"Expanded"

Side radar sensor, front.

Side radar sensor, rear.

If the system detects that the vehicle is

about to leave the lane or cross a lane

marking, a warning is issued. The sys-

tem performs a steering intervention.

Turning the Lane Departure

Warning on/off

▷

"In dangerous situations"

If the lane marking is interrupted: if driv-

ing over the lane is detected as uninten-

tional or the radar sensors detect an on-

coming vehicle, a warning is issued and

steering intervention is carried out.

Switching on the system automatically

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically active after every driv-

ing off.

If the lane markings are solid, depend-

ing on the national-market version: if the

system detects that the vehicle is unin-

tentionally leaving the lane or crossing a

lane marking, a warning is issued and a

steering intervention is performed.

Switching the system on manually

The system is activated when the warning

time is set.

For further information:

Setting the warning time, see page 204.

Adjusting the strength of the steering

wheel vibration

Switching the system off manually

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the switch-off must be con-

firmed successively on the control display.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

1.

Apps menu

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

204

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

6. "Vibration intensity"

Icon

Meaning

7. Select the desired setting.

The warning light is illuminated yel-

low: functional limitation detected, for

example, due to low sun or system

failure. It is possible to continue driv-

ing. Where applicable, observe the

information from Check Control mes-

sages.

The setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

Depending on the national-market

version: switch steering intervention

on/off

1.

Apps menu

The warning light flashes yellow: a

warning is issued actively. The sys-

tem does not carry out any steering

interventions.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane departure warning"

7. "Steering intervention"

The warning light is illuminated grey:

the system is switched off or auto-

matically deactivated, for example,

because DSC OFF is activated.

Depending on the national-market version,

steering intervention is automatically active

whenever you drive off.

The warning light flashes grey: a

warning is issued actively. The sys-

tem does not carry out any steering

interventions.

Display in the instrument cluster

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, different system statuses are

displayed in the instrument cluster.

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

tem in Assisted View is displayed on the in-

strument cluster.

Icon

Meaning

For further information:

The indicator light is illuminated

green: the system is switched on. A

lane marking has been detected on

at least one side of the vehicle. The

system is ready to intervene and is-

sue warnings. The system can per-

form steering interventions.

Assisted View, see page 173.

Warning function

When leaving the driving lane

If the vehicle leaves the driving lane and a

lane boundary is detected, the steering wheel

vibrates depending on the steering wheel vi-

bration setting.

The indicator light flashes green: the

system actively issues a warning. If

necessary, the system performs a

steering intervention.

In addition, the indicator light flashes

green.

If the turn indicator is switched on in the corre-

sponding direction before changing lanes, no

warning is issued.

205

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Steering intervention

In trailer operation

Depending on the national-market version and

equipment: if a lane boundary is crossed in the

speed range up to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph,

the system may respond with an active steer-

ing intervention in addition to the steering

wheel vibration. The system is helping the

driver keep the vehicle in driving lane. Steering

intervention can be felt at the steering wheel,

and can be overridden manually at any time.

If the trailer socket is occupied or the trailer

operation is activated, for example during op-

eration with a trailer, no steering intervention

takes place.

When a bicycle carrier or load carrier is used

on the trailer tow hitch, this limitation does

not apply when trailer operation is activated

accordingly on the control display.

For further information:

When steering intervention is active,

the indicator light flashes green.

Towing a trailer, see page 348.

Cancellation of the warning

For example, the warning or an active steering

intervention is cancelled in the following situa-

tions:

For example, steering intervention is sup-

pressed in the following situations:

▷

If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or brak-

ing heavily.

▷

Automatically after a few seconds.

On returning to the correct lane.

▷

On indicating.

If the hazard warning lights are switched

on.

If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or brak-

ing heavily.

▷

In driving situations with high driving dy-

namics.

▷

If the hazard warning lights are switched

on.

When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-

ing the driving stability.

▷

On indicating.

When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-

ing the driving stability.

While Dynamic Stability Control is restric-

ted.

▷

Directly after a steering intervention by the

vehicle systems.

Directly after a steering intervention by the

vehicle systems.

▷

With manual steering intervention.

Warning signal

Possibly when another driver assistance

system is activated.

Depending on the national-market version: in

the event of multiple active steering interven-

tions by the system within 3 minutes with-

out the driver's intervention at the steering

wheel during the steering intervention itself, an

acoustic warning will sound. A short warning

signal will sound at the second steering inter-

vention. A longer warning signal sounds from

the third steering intervention onwards.

▷

No lane boundary detected.

When the system limits are reached.

System limits

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

A Check Control message is also displayed.

The warning signal and Check Control mes-

sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality

in situations such as the following:

General

▷

When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-

ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane

boundaries, for example, in areas where

there are roadworks.

▷

With lane boundaries that are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.

▷

In tight corners or on narrow roads.

The system is operational after a minimum

speed has been reached and uses radar sen-

sors to monitor the area behind and adjacent

to the vehicle.

With lane boundaries that are not white.

With lane boundaries that are covered by

objects.

▷

If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle

ahead.

The minimum speed is country-specific and

displayed in the Lane Change Warning menu.

Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

The system indicates when vehicles are in the

blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from

the rear in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The

warning light in the exterior mirror is illumina-

ted at a dimmed level.

When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-

ing the driving stability.

While Dynamic Stability Control is restric-

ted.

In the previously named situations, the system

will warn prior to a lane change. The warn-

ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the

steering wheel vibrates.

A Check Control message may be displayed

if functionality is restricted. Depending on the

national-market version, a yellow warning light

is also illuminated.

When turning at a speed of up to approx.

20 km/h, approx. 12 mph, the steering wheel

will not vibrate.

Lane Change Warning with

active return

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the Chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Principle

Lane Change Warning detects vehicles in the

blind spot, or if vehicles are approaching from

behind in the adjacent lane.

Sensors

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns

in different stages.

▷

Camera behind the windscreen.

Side radar sensors, rear.

An automatic steering intervention may help in

keeping the vehicle in its lane.

Depending on the equipment: side radar

sensors, front.

207

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Depending on the national-market

version: switch steering intervention

on/off

Operating requirements

The areas of the sensors must be clean and

clear.

1.

Apps menu

Turning the Lane Change Warning

on/off

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

1.

Apps menu

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane change warning"

7. "Steering intervention"

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane change warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Display in the instrument cluster

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, different system statuses are

displayed in the instrument cluster.

Adjusting the Lane Change Warning

Icon

Meaning

Setting the warning time

The indicator light is illuminated

green: the system is switched on.

Warnings are issued within the sys-

tem limits and, if necessary, steering

interventions are carried out.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane change warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

The warning light is illuminated grey:

the system is switched on. No warn-

ings are issued temporarily. At least

one functional requirement has not

been met, for example the minimum

speed has not been reached.

Adjusting the strength of the steering

wheel vibration

1.

The warning light is illuminated yel-

low: functional limitation detected, for

example, due to dirty radar sensors

or system failure. It is possible to

continue driving. Where applicable,

observe the information from Check

Control messages.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Vibration intensity"

7. Select the desired setting.

The indicator light is illuminated grey:

the system is switched off.

The setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

tem in Assisted View is displayed on the in-

strument cluster.

Steering intervention

Depending on the national-market version: if

there is no response to the steering wheel vi-

brations and a lane boundary is crossed at

speeds of up to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph,

the system responds with an active steering

intervention if necessary. The steering inter-

vention helps to return the vehicle to its driving

lane. Steering intervention can be felt at the

steering wheel, and can be overridden man-

ually at any time.

For further information:

Assisted View, see page 173.

Warning function

Warning light in the exterior mirror

The steering intervention is carried out from

a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-

played on the control display.

Brief flashing of the warning light

Brief flashing of the warning light in exterior

mirror during vehicle unlocking serves as sys-

tem self-test.

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns

of a possible collision.

System limits

Advance warning

The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror

indicates when vehicles are in the blind spot or

are approaching from the rear.

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Acute warning

Upper speed limit

In the event of an acute warning, the steering

wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the

exterior mirror flashes brightly.

The system is temporarily disabled at speeds

over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.

The system is activated again at speeds under

approx. 250 km/h, approx. 155 mph.

An acute warning is issued if the following con-

ditions are met:

Warning displays

▷

Another vehicle is located in the critical

area.

Depending on the selected setting for warn-

ings, for example the warning time, it is pos-

sible that more or fewer warnings will be

displayed. As a result, there may also be an in-

creased number of premature warnings about

critical situations.

Your own vehicle is approaching the other

lane.

Depending on the system setting when the

turn indicator is turned on.

The warning stops when the other vehicle has

left the critical area.

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality

in situations such as the following:

209

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

The speed of the approaching vehicle is

much faster than your own speed.

General

▷

In tight corners or on narrow roads.

The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,

for instance by stickers.

Depending on the national-market version, the

steering intervention may be restricted, for ex-

ample in the following situations:

▷

When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-

ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane

boundaries, for example, in areas where

there are roadworks.

Radar sensors monitor the area adjacent to

the vehicle from a minimum speed up to ap-

proximately , 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph.

▷

With lane boundaries that are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.

The minimum speed is country-specific and

displayed on the control display.

▷

With lane boundaries that are not white.

With lane boundaries that are covered by

objects.

If another vehicle is detected adjacent to the

vehicle – and there is a risk of a side collision

– the system helps the driver to avoid a col-

lision. For this purpose, the system issues a

warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-

ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating

steering wheel. An active steering intervention

is performed by the system if necessary.

▷

If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle

ahead.

▷

If the camera is impaired.

Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

A Check Control message may be displayed

if functionality is restricted. Depending on the

national-market version, a yellow warning light

is also illuminated.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the Chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

The system may be restricted or inactive when

the trailer socket is occupied or when the trailer

operation is activated, for example, when oper-

ating with a trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check

Control message is shown.

Operating requirements

The camera behind the windscreen detects the

position of the lane boundaries.

The lane boundaries must be detected by the

camera in order for the side collision warning

with steering intervention to be active.

Side collision warning

Sensors

Principle

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

The side collision warning helps to avoid an

imminent side collision.

▷

Camera behind the windscreen.

Side radar sensors, front.

Side radar sensors, rear.

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Turning the side-collision warning

on/off

Warning function

Warning light in the exterior mirror

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Side collision warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Adjusting the strength of the

steering wheel vibration

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns

of a possible collision.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Acute warning

If there is a risk of collision, the warning light

in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering

wheel starts vibrating.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Vibration intensity"

7. Select the desired setting.

A Check Control message is displayed at the

same time.

The setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

Steering intervention

Depending on the national-market version, an

active steering intervention takes place if nec-

essary to prevent a collision and keep the vehi-

cle in its own lane. Steering intervention can be

felt at the steering wheel, and can be overrid-

den manually at any time.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

tem in Assisted View is displayed on the in-

strument cluster.

For further information:

System limits

Assisted View, see page 173.

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality

in situations such as the following:

▷

In tight corners or on narrow roads.

When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-

ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane

211

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

boundaries, for example, in areas where

there are roadworks.

▷

The hazard warning lights are switched on

if appropriate.

▷

With lane boundaries that are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.

PreCrash functions are triggered if appro-

priate.

▷

With lane boundaries that are not white.

With lane boundaries that are covered by

objects.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the Chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

▷

If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle

ahead.

Sensors

Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

The system is controlled via the radar sensors

at the side in the rear.

A Check Control message may be displayed if

functionality is restricted.

Switching Rear Collision Prevention

on/off

The system is automatically activated at the

start of each journey.

The system is inactive when the trailer socket

is occupied or when the trailer operation is

activated, for example, when operating with a

trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check Control mes-

sage is shown.

The system is deactivated in the following sit-

uations:

Rear Collision Prevention

▷

When reversing.

If the trailer socket is occupied or trailer op-

eration is activated, for example when op-

erating with a trailer or bicycle carrier.

Principle

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, Rear Collision Prevention can

respond to vehicles approaching from behind.

System limits

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Functional limitations

The function may be restricted if the speed of

the approaching vehicle is much higher or sim-

ilar to the own speed.

Road Priority Warning

Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-

hicle.

Principle

If a vehicle is approaching from behind at a

relevant speed, the system can respond as fol-

lows:

The Road Priority Warning provides support

in situations where road signs or traffic lights

indicate that the driver must give way.

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

General

Sensors

The system uses a camera behind the wind-

screen to evaluate the road signs and traffic

lights.

The system is controlled by the camera behind

the windscreen.

Turning the Road Priority Warning

on/off

The navigation system forwards information

regarding the road layout to the system.

A warning is given if a right-of-way is about to

be violated in the following traffic situations, for

example:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

▷

At a road junction.

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Give way warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

At a T-junction.

On an entry slip road slip road.

At a roundabout.

In the event of a red traffic light.

Starting from a variable minimum speed, the

system issues warnings from and up to ap-

proximately 80 km/h/50 mph.

Setting the warning time

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

The following road signs are taken into ac-

count for the Road Priority Warning:

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Give way warning"

7. Select the desired setting.

Signs Meaning

Give way signs:

An advance warning is issued for

these road signs.

The selected setting is saved and adopted for

the next journey.

Stop signs.

An advance warning and an acute

warning are issued for these road

signs.

Warning function

General

The system warns in two stages:

Red traffic lights result in output of an

advance warning and an acute warn-

ing.

▷

Advance warning: visually by means of an

icon in the instrument cluster.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the Chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Acute warning: visually by means of an icon

in the instrument cluster and with an addi-

tional acoustic signal.

The timing of the warnings may vary depend-

ing on the current driving situation and the set

warning time.

Operating requirements

The road priority situation must be unambig-

uously directed by road signs or light signal

systems.

213

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

Advance warning

System limits

If there is a risk that road priority is about to be

ignored, one of the following icons appears in

the instrument cluster:

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

Icon

Meaning

Give way.

No Warning

The system provides no warning in situations

such as the following:

Stop.

▷

In road priority situations without “Give

Way” signs, “Stop” signs or red light signal

systems.

Red traffic light.

At road junctions with relevant traffic lights

that illuminate yellow or green.

When an advance warning is issued, intervene

as appropriate for the situation; for example,

by braking.

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality

in situations such as the following:

▷

If road signs or light signal systems are un-

clear.

Acute warning

If there is an imminent risk that right-of-way is

about to be ignored, an acoustic signal sounds

and one of the following icons appears in the

instrument cluster:

If road signs or light signal systems are fully

or partially concealed or soiled.

If road signs or light signal systems are dif-

ficult to read or rotated.

Icon

Meaning

If road signs or light signal systems are too

small or too large.

Stop.

With road signs that do not correspond to

the standard.

Red traffic light.

If road signs are detected that apply to a

merging or parallel road.

If the road signs or road layouts are specific

to one country.

When an acute warning is issued, immediately

intervene as appropriate for the situation; for

example, by braking.

At road junctions with flashing light signal

systems.

Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

Display in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, the warning is

displayed in the Head-up display at the same

time as in the instrument cluster.

In the case of navigation data that is inva-

lid, outdated or not available.

The system may not be available or may

only be available to a limited extent is some

countries.

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-

ter and, depending on the equipment, in the

Head-up display.

Wrong-way Warning

Principle

The Wrong-way Warning issues a warning if

the driver is about to drive the wrong way, for

example on motorways, roundabouts and one-

way streets.

System limits

General

Follow the limits of the system in the chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

General

Depending on the equipment, the system will

check the traffic situation based on navigation

data and road signs.

No Warning

The system provides no warning if the road

layout is not indicated by road signs, for exam-

ple.

The system will take into account road signs

such as the following:

▷

No entry.

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality,

or give no Wrong-way Warning at all, in situa-

tions such as the following:

Roundabout.

Direction arrows: keep right/left signs.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the Chapter

“Collision warning systems”.

▷

If the road signs are ambiguous.

If the road signs are fully or partially cov-

ered or soiled.

▷

If the road signs are poorly visible or twis-

ted.

Operating requirements

The road layout ahead must be unambigu-

ously indicated by road signs.

▷

If the road signs are too small or too large.

With road signs that do not correspond to

the standard.

Sensors

▷

If road signs are detected that apply to a

merging or parallel road.

The system is controlled by the camera behind

the windscreen.

If the road signs or road layouts are specific

to one country.

Turning Wrong-way Warning on/off

Depending on the national-market version, the

Wrong-way Warning is automatically activated

after each start of the journey.

Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-

ready state using the Start/Stop button.

In the case of navigation data that is inva-

lid, outdated or not available.

It may not be possible to use the system in

all countries.

Warning function

A warning is displayed and an acoustic

signal sounds, for example when the

vehicle is travelling in the wrong direc-

tion on a motorway, roundabout or one-way

street.

215

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be ac-

tivated via voice input.

Emergency Stop Assistant

For further information:

Principle

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see

page 59.

If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle

safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to

bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.

An immediate emergency call can be triggered

on the control display.

The following is performed automatically when

the Emergency Stop Assistant is activated:

General

The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated au-

tomatically.

▷

A display is shown in the instrument clus-

ter.

If the system is activated, the vehicle is

brought to a standstill within its own lane by

means of lane tracking.

▷

The system takes control of the vehicle until

the vehicle comes to a standstill.

▷

The hazard warning lights are switched on.

Safety information

Depending on the equipment, an emer-

gency call is triggered at standstill.

WARNING

Activating/deactivating the

Emergency Stop Assistant

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess your physical

condition correctly. Increasing inattention or

fatigue might not be detected, or may not be

detected in good time. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and

alert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Emergency stop"

7. Select the desired setting.

Operating requirements

▷

Emergency Stop Assistant is activated via

iDrive.

Cancelling the Emergency Stop

Assistant

At any time during the process, the driver can

cancel the Emergency Stop Assistant function

by actively taking control of the vehicle.

The function is activated from a speed of

approx. 70 km/h, approx. 43 mph.

The Driver Attention Camera detects driver

activity.

For example, the system is cancelled in the

following situations:

Activating the Emergency Stop

Assistant

If the system detects that the driver is no lon-

ger driving the vehicle safely or is ignoring

warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is ac-

tivated automatically. The activated system is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

▷

With strong countersteering.

On indicating.

If the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.

When the hazard warning lights are

switched off.

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

If the system is interrupted on the control

display.

General

When changing the selector lever position,

if the vehicle was already at a standstill.

When the vehicle is at a standstill

As soon as the vehicle is at a standstill, the

system configures the following settings:

▷

The vehicle is secured to prevent it from

rolling away.

The area behind to the vehicle is monitored by

sensors.

▷

The interior lights are switched on.

The central locking system is unlocked.

Depending on the equipment, the area in front

of the vehicle is also monitored.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The system indicates when other road users

are approaching.

Icon

Status

In case of a risk of collision when driving in re-

verse, the system will provide assistance with

an automatic brake intervention.

Emergency Stop Assistant has trig-

gered.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

System limits

The system cannot replace the abilities of a

safe driver.

Safety information

The Emergency Stop Assistant may have re-

stricted functionality in situations such as the

following:

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

▷

If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by

the steering wheel.

▷

If the driver is wearing sunglasses with high

protection against infrared light.

Crossing-traffic Warning

with brake function

Principle

At blind exits or when leaving bay parking

spaces, the Crossing-traffic Warning detects

other road users approaching from the side

earlier than is possible from the driver's seat.

Sensors

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

217

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

▷

Side radar sensors, rear.

Warning function

Depending on the equipment: side radar

sensors, front.

General

The control display shows the corresponding

image, an acoustic signal may sound, and the

warning light in the exterior mirror flashes.

Activating/deactivating Crossing-

traffic Warning

In case of a brake intervention, a message is

displayed on the control display, which will be

closed after a brief period of time.

The system must be activated on the control

display for the Crossing-traffic Warning and

brake intervention to switch on automatically.

1.

Apps menu

Visual warning

2. "Vehicle apps"

Warning light in the exterior mirror

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

6. "CROSSING-TRAFFIC WARNING"

7. Select the desired setting.

Turning on the Crossing-traffic

Warning automatically

The system must be activated on the control

display. As soon as Park Distance Control or a

camera view is active and a selector lever po-

sition is engaged, the system is automatically

switched on.

The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes

if other vehicles are detected by the rear sen-

sors when the vehicle is reversing.

The system is switched on at the rear when

reverse gear is engaged.

Display in the Park Distance Control view

Depending on the equipment, the front system

is turned on when a drive position is engaged.

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically active when the vehi-

cle is started.

Turning off the Crossing-traffic

Warning automatically

The system is automatically turned off, for ex-

ample, in the following situations:

In the Park Distance Control view, the relevant

boundary area flashes red if the sensors detect

vehicles.

▷

If walking speed is exceeded.

When a certain distance covered is excee-

ded.

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Display in the camera image

▷

Other objects that hide cross traffic are in

the capture range of the sensors.

If the trailer socket is occupied or trailer

operation is activated, the Crossing-traffic

Warning is not available for the area behind

the vehicle.

Dynamic brake lights

Principle

Depending on the direction of travel, the view

to the front or rear is displayed in the camera

image.

The brake lights flash to warn road users be-

hind the vehicle that emergency braking is be-

ing performed.

The relevant boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera view flashes red if the sensors detect

vehicles.

General

Yellow lines, arrow 2, indicate the bumper of

your vehicle.

Acoustic warning

In addition to the visual warning, an acoustic

signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into

the respective direction.

Depending on the national-market version, the

acoustic signal will already sound when the

drive position is engaged.

▷

Normal braking: brake lights illuminate.

Heavy braking: brake lights flash.

Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill,

the hazard warning lights are activated.

System limits

System limits of the sensors

For further information:

To switch off the hazard warning lights:

▷

Accelerate.

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

Press the hazard warning lights button.

Functional limitations

The function can be restricted, for example, in

the following situations:

BMW Drive Recorder

▷

In tight bends.

Principle

Crossing objects are moving at a very slow

or a very fast speed.

The BMW Drive Recorder saves short video

recordings of the vehicle surroundings in order

to document the traffic situation, for example.

219

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

General

Operating requirements

Video recordings can be saved in different

ways:

▷

Standby state or drive-ready state is

switched on.

▷

Automatic saving of recordings.

▷

BMW Drive Recorder is activated.

Privacy Policy has been accepted.

Recording type was selected.

The function makes it possible to document

the accident or theft of the vehicle with the

corresponding recording type set.

Recording duration was selected.

▷

Manual saving of recordings.

Theft notification:

The function makes it possible to document

traffic situations with the correspondingly

set recording type.

▷

The theft notification was activated in the

Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-

corder menu.

The cameras of the assistance systems are

used for recording, e.g. panorama view.

▷

Data transfer is activated.

My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-

vice.

In addition, the following journey parameters

are saved:

▷

My BMW App is linked with the Connected-

Drive account.

▷

Date.

Time.

Privacy Policy has been accepted.

Speed.

GPS coordinates.

Activating/deactivating the BMW

Drive Recorder

The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated

before using the recording function for the first

time.

Data protection

The reliability of the recording and the use of

video recordings depend on the legal regula-

tions in the country where the system is to be

used. The user is responsible for the use of the

system and for complying with the provisions

that apply in each case.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. Accept data protection policy.

5. "Settings"

Before using for the first time, the vehicle man-

ufacturer recommends checking that there are

no legal or official restrictions on using the sys-

tem in the state or country in question. Addi-

tionally, the legality of using the system should

be checked at regular intervals, especially if the

vehicle frequently crosses borders.

6. "Allow recording"

7. Select the desired setting.

Recording functions

Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed

of the system. Information about the system

must also be provided if the vehicle is passed

on to anyone else.

Automatic recording

The recording is automatically saved when the

vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.

▷

In case of accident:

220

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-

onds before and after the save function

was triggered.

Playing and managing recordings

Saved video recordings can be played, expor-

ted and deleted.

▷

In case of theft:

For your own safety, the video recording is

only shown on the control display if the speed

is below approximately 3 km/h, 2 mph. In the

case of some national-market versions, the

video recording is only shown with the parking

brake applied or with the selector lever in posi-

tion P.

Depending on the selected recording dura-

tion setting, the system saves the recording

after it has been triggered.

When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-

sage is sent to the My BMW App.

After saving the recording, a video in re-

duced quality can be downloaded to a mo-

bile device.

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic

recording may occur.

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Recordings"

5. Select the desired recording.

6. If necessary, select camera.

Manual recording

Using the button

Settings

Recording type

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the desired setting.

Press and hold the button.

Recording duration

1.

Apps menu

2. "All apps"

Via iDrive

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Settings"

Start the recording:

1.

Apps menu

5. Select the desired setting.

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Recording"

Recording on a mobile device

Principle

5. "Start recording"

Stop the recording: "Stop recording".

Depending on the equipment, video recordings

can be stored directly on a mobile device, for

example a smartphone or USB storage.

The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-

onds before and after the save function was

triggered.

221

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

General

System limits

The length of the video that can be stored de-

pends on the available memory capacity on

the mobile device.

In the event of a serious accident, recordings

may not be saved if, for example, the damage

to the vehicle is too extensive or the power

supply was interrupted.

Operating requirements

In the case of USB drives that have been over-

written multiple times, there may be limitations

when exporting recordings.

▷

Privacy Policy has been accepted.

▷

BMW Drive Recorder is activated.

In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-

tomatically when the alarm system has been

triggered.

To transfer recordings to a mobile device:

▷

Depending on the equipment version, a

mobile device is connected to the vehicle

via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth audio or a USB

storage device is connected.

Theft notification and video download may be

restricted or unavailable if the Internet connec-

tion is weak or missing.

▷

My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-

vice.

My BMW App is linked with the Connected-

Drive account.

Active Protection

Principle

Recording

In critical situations, Active Protection prepares

the passengers and the vehicle for a potential

imminent accident.

The recording can be started and stopped

manually.

Start the recording:

General

1.

Apps menu

Depending on the equipment and the national-

market version, Active Protection consists of

different PreCrash functions.

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Recording"

The system detects critical driving situations

which could potentially lead to an accident.

Such critical driving situations include:

5. "Start recording"

Stop the recording: "Stop recording".

▷

Full braking.

Cameras

Different cameras can be selected.

Severe understeering.

Severe oversteering.

1.

Apps menu

Certain functions of some systems installed in

the vehicle can – within the system limits –

cause Active Protection to trigger:

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Settings"

▷

Front-collision warning: automatic brake in-

tervention.

5. "Cam. selection"

6. Select the desired camera.

Front-collision warning: brake power assis-

tance.

Rear Collision Prevention: detects impend-

ing rear collisions.

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

Safety information

PostCrash – iBrake

WARNING

Principle

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility. System limits may mean

that critical situations are not detected relia-

bly or in good time. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

intervene actively if the situation warrants it.

In certain accident situations, PostCrash iBrake

can automatically bring the vehicle to a stand-

still without the driver having to intervene.

General

PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of an-

other collision and its consequences.

At a standstill

Once the vehicle has come to a halt, the brake

is released automatically.

Function

Depending on the equipment, the driver’s and

front passenger’s seat belt straps are auto-

matically tightened once after driving off, if the

seat belt is fastened.

Decelerating the vehicle harder

In certain situations, it may be necessary to

bring the vehicle to a standstill more quickly

than is possible with automatic braking.

Depending on the equipment and require-

ments, in critical accident situations, the

following individual functions become active as

required:

To do so, brake quickly and firmly. This will

briefly increase the brake pressure to a higher

level than that achieved with the automatic

brake function. Automatic braking is interrup-

ted.

▷

Automatic pre-tensioning of the front seat

belts.

▷

The windows are automatically closed.

The windows remain open by a gap.

▷

Automatic closing of the glass sunroof/pan-

oramic glass sunroof.

Cancelling automatic braking

In certain situations, it may be necessary to

cancel automatic braking, for example if an

avoidance manoeuvre is required.

The sun protection is also closed.

Automatic positioning of the backrest of the

front passenger seat.

Cancel automatic braking:

If the critical driving situation passes without

an accident occurring, the tension in the front

seat belts is slackened again. If the belt ten-

sion does not slacken automatically, stop the

vehicle and unfasten the seat belt by pressing

the red button on the seat belt buckle. Fasten

the seat belt again before continuing driving.

All other systems can be restored to the de-

sired setting.

▷

By depressing the brake pedal.

By depressing the accelerator pedal.

Attentiveness Assistant

Principle

The Attentiveness Assistant can detect de-

creasing attentiveness or the onset of fatigue

in the driver on long monotonous journeys,

for example on motorways. The system rec-

ommends taking a break.

223

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Safety

CONTROLS

6. "Attentiveness Assistant"

7. Select the desired setting.

Safety information

WARNING

Display

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess your physical

condition correctly. Increasing inattention or

fatigue might not be detected, or may not be

detected in good time. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and

alert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions.

If the driver shows signs of decreasing atten-

tiveness or of fatigue, a note is shown on the

control display with the recommendation to

take a break.

The following settings can be selected during

the display.

The system is reset approximately 45 minutes

after the vehicle is stopped. A break recom-

mendation can only be displayed again after

this time has elapsed.

Function

The system is switched on every time drive-

ready state is switched on.

System limits

Once the journey has started, the system

adapts to the driver so that any decrease in

attention or fatigue can be detected.

The function of the system may be restricted. If

the function is restricted, no warning or a false

warning is issued. The system may have re-

stricted functionality in the following situations:

This process takes into account the following

criteria, for example:

▷

If the time is set incorrectly.

▷

Personal driving style, for example steering.

When the speed is predominantly below

approx. 65 km/h, 40 mph.

Driving conditions, for example time of day,

duration of journey.

▷

If a sporty driving style is adopted, for ex-

ample sharp acceleration or fast cornering.

▷

Depending on the equipment: attentive-

ness of the driver through the Driver Atten-

tion Camera.

In active driving situations, for example fre-

quent lane changes.

The system is active from approx. 65 km/h,

40 mph and can also display a recommenda-

tion to take a break.

▷

In poor road condition.

In strong crosswinds.

Break recommendation

Driver Attention Camera

Setting break recommendations

Break recommendation can also be switched

on or off and adjusted via iDrive.

Principle

A camera in the instrument cluster monitors

the driver activity and, depending on the equip-

ment, the driver's direction of view.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

General

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

For support by assistance systems, the atten-

tion of the driver is analysed by evaluating the

head position and eye opening of the driver.

224

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Safety

CONTROLS

To guarantee full functionality, ensure that the

Driver Attention Camera has an unobstructed

field of view.

Overview

Depending on the equipment, the instrument

cluster has up to three infrared light sources.

Depending on the light conditions, these light

sources can be visible when the vehicle is in

the standby state.

System limits

The Driver Attention Camera may have re-

stricted functionality in situations such as the

following:

▷

If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by

the steering wheel.

▷

If the driver is wearing sunglasses with high

protection against infrared light.

225

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment

Brake Assist

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

When the brake pedal is pressed quickly,

Brake Assist automatically provides the max-

imum possible braking force assistance. This

keeps the stopping distance as short as pos-

sible in full braking situations. This takes full

advantage of the Anti-lock Braking System.

For further information:

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal

during full braking.

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Anti-lock Braking System

Dynamic Stability Control

Principle

The Anti-lock Braking System prevents the

wheels from locking during braking.

Principle

The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep

the vehicle on a steady course by reducing

drive power and by brake intervention on indi-

vidual wheels.

Steering control is retained even during full

braking, which enhances active road safety.

General

The Anti-lock Braking System is ready when-

ever you switch on drive-ready state.

The system detects the following unstable

driving conditions, for example:

▷

Loss of traction at the rear which can lead

to oversteering.

Malfunction

The warning light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated.

▷

Loss of grip at the front wheels which can

lead to understeering.

A Check Control message is shown.

Safety information

▷

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is not

available.

WARNING

The ease of steering is restricted in the

event of full braking.

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an

authorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Deactivating/activating the system

1.

Press the button to open the selec-

tion.

WARNING

2. "DSC OFF"

When driving with a roof load, for example

with roof bars, the higher centre of gravity

can mean that driving safety is no longer

guaranteed in critical driving situations. There

is a risk of accident or material damage.

Driving with roof load only with activated Dy-

namic Stability Control.

The Dynamic Stability Control is deactiva-

ted.

3.

Press the button again to reactivate

Dynamic Stability Control.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Overview

Display when Dynamic Stability

Control is deactivated.

Button in the vehicle

Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic

Stability Control is deactivated.

Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Sta-

bility Control is regulating the driving

power and brake forces. The vehicle is

being stabilised. Decrease speed and adjust

driving style to the road conditions.

Dynamic Stability Control

Warning light is illuminated: Dynamic

Stability Control has failed or is initial-

ising. The driving stabilisation is restric-

ted or has failed.

Activating/deactivating Dynamic

Stability Control

If the warning light is continuously illuminated,

have the system checked immediately by an

authorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

General

After switching on drive-ready state, Dynamic

Stability Control is activated automatically.

Driving stability during acceleration and cor-

nering is restricted if Dynamic Stability Control

is deactivated.

Automatic programme change

Dynamic Stability Control can be activated au-

tomatically by the front-collision warning, de-

pending on the situation. Deactivate the front-

collision warning if necessary.

To support driving stability, re-activate Dy-

namic Stability Control as soon as possible.

For further information:

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

227

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Activating/deactivating Dynamic

Traction Control

Dynamic Traction Control

Principle

1.

Press the button to open the selec-

Dynamic Traction Control is a drive-optimised

variant of Dynamic Stability Control.

tion.

2. "Traction": Dynamic Stability Control is acti-

vated.

In special road conditions, for example on un-

cleared, snow-covered roads or on loose sur-

faces, the system ensures maximum drive, but

with restricted driving stability.

3.

Press the button again to reactivate

Dynamic Stability Control.

General

Maximum traction is provided when Dynamic

Traction Control is activated. Driving stability is

restricted when accelerating and cornering.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Display when Dynamic Traction

Control is activated.

Activating Dynamic Traction Control briefly

may be useful in the following situations:

▷

When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.

Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic

Traction Control is activated.

When driving off in deep snow or on a loose

surface.

When driving with snow chains.

Automatic programme change

In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control

is activated automatically:

Overview

Button in the vehicle

▷

When the distance control is activated.

In case of a brake intervention by the front-

collision warning. Deactivate the front-colli-

sion warning if necessary.

▷

If the suspension control system fails.

In the event of a flat tyre.

For further information:

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

Dynamic Stability Control

BMW xDrive

Principle

BMW xDrive is the vehicle's all-wheel drive

system. The interaction of BMW xDrive and

other suspension control systems, for exam-

228

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

ple, Dynamic Stability Control, further optimi-

ses traction and driving dynamics.

Hill Descent Control

Principle

General

Hill Descent Control provides assistance when

descending hills by regulating vehicle speed

on steep downhill gradients, for example when

driving off-road.

BMW xDrive distributes the driving power var-

iably to the front and rear axles according to

the driving situation and road condition.

The xOffroad package also adapts the all-

wheel drive system to the applicable xOFF-

ROAD driving mode.

General

When the system is active, the vehicle moves

at a speed set by the driver without the brake

pedal having to be pressed.

Display on the control display

In the Live Vehicle menu, information about

BMW xDrive can be displayed under the

following view:

While Hill Descent Control regulates vehicle

speed, the system automatically distributes

brake force to the individual wheels. Driving

stability and ease of steering are improved.

If required, the Anti-lock Braking System pre-

vents the wheels from locking.

"xVIEW"

The following information is displayed:

▷

Distribution of drive torques to wheels.

Hill Descent Control can be activated below

approx. 40 km/h, approx. 25 mph.

Longitudinal inclination: specified in per-

cent.

Speeds between approx. 3 km/h, approx.

2 mph and approx. 30 km/h, approx. 20 mph

can be set. When driving downhill, the system

reduces the speed to the set value, within the

physical limits.

▷

Transverse inclination: specified in degrees.

Graphic of the wheel angle.

With navigation system: elevation at current

position.

▷

Self-levelling suspension of the two-axle

ride level control.

Hill Descent Control provides support when

driving in selector lever positions D, N and R.

For further information:

Overview

Live Vehicle, see page 157.

Button in the vehicle

M Sport differential

The M Sport differential actively and steplessly

locks the rear axle differential according to the

driving situation. This prevents an individual

rear wheel from spinning, thus providing opti-

mum traction in all driving situations.

It is the driver's responsibility to adopt a driving

style that is appropriate to the situation.

Hill Descent Control

229

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Activating/deactivating Hill Descent

Control

Increasing or reducing speed

Using the Cruise Control rocker switch

To activate the system

The set speed can be changed using the

Cruise Control rocker switch on the steering

wheel.

Press the key.

Speeds between approx. 3 km/h,

2 mph and approx. 30 km/h, 20 mph

are adopted as the set speed.

While Hill Descent Control is regulating the

speed, the following functions are deactivated:

▷

The front-collision warning.

The emergency braking function of Active

Park Distance Control.

For further information:

▷

Press the rocker switch upwards: the speed

is increased in increments.

▷

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

Active Park Distance Control, see page 278.

Press the rocker switch upwards and hold it

there: the speed increases while the rocker

switch is pressed.

Deactivating the system

Press the button again.

▷

Press the rocker switch downwards: the

speed is decreased in increments.

The system is automatically disabled

at speeds above approx. 40 km/h, ap-

prox. 25 mph.

Press the rocker switch downwards and

hold it there: the speed decreases while the

rocker switch is pressed.

Display in the instrument cluster

With the brake pedal

While the Hill Descent Control regulates vehicle

speed, the set speed can be reduced by press-

ing the brake pedal.

An icon and the selected set

speed are displayed.

▷

Display green: Hill Descent

Control is active. The system

brakes the vehicle.

Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction, a message ap-

pears in the instrument cluster.

▷

Display grey: Hill Descent Control is ready.

Display in the Head-up display

The status of Hill Descent Control can also be

displayed in the Head-up display.

Integral Active Steering

Principle

The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-

noeuvrability of the vehicle and makes a more

230

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

direct steering response possible. Driving sta-

bility is also increased at high speeds.

The steering system may be faulty. The Inte-

gral Active Steering support may no longer be

provided.

General

▷

Larger steering movements are required at

low speeds.

The Integral Active Steering is a combination

of the variable steering gear ratio of the front

axle and the active rear-wheel steering.

The response of the vehicle is more sensi-

tive in higher speed ranges.

The rear-wheel steering increases manoeu-

vrability at low speeds by turning the rear

wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the

front wheels.

Drive cautiously and think well ahead.

Have the system checked by an authorised

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in

the same direction as the front wheels. The re-

sulting benefits include smooth lane changes.

In critical driving situations, Integral Active

Steering can stabilise the vehicle by automat-

ically steering the rear wheels, for example

when oversteering.

Setting

The system offers various settings.

With the drive modes of the Driving Experience

Control, the system can be set to comfortable

or dynamic.

For further information:

Driving Experience Control, see page 146.

Operation with snow chains

In order to guarantee freedom of movement of

the wheels when operating with snow chains,

rear-wheel steering must be turned off when

snow chains are mounted.

For further information:

Rear-wheel steering with snow chains, see

page 373.

Malfunction

The warning light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated.

A Check Control message is shown.

231

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

5. "Safety and warnings"

Vehicle equipment

6. "Speed warning"

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

7. "Warning above:"

8. Select the desired setting.

Setting the current speed as the

speed limit warning

For further information:

1.

Apps menu

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Speed warning"

7. "Adopt current speed"

Speed limit warning

Principle

The speed limit warning can be used to set a

speed limit. A warning will be issued when this

speed limit is exceeded.

Speed Limit Display with

no-overtaking indicator

General

The warning is repeated if the set speed limit

is exceeded again after dropping below it by

5 km/h/3 mph.

Speed Limit Info

Principle

Activating/deactivating the speed

limit warning

Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid

speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if

necessary, the Head-up display and possibly

supplementary signs.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Speed warning"

General

The camera located near the interior mirror de-

tects road signs at the edge of the road as well

as variable overhead signs.

Depending on the national-market version,

road signs with supplementary signs, for ex-

ample, for wet road conditions, are taken into

account and compared with the vehicle's on-

board data, for example, the windscreen wiper

signal. The road sign and associated supple-

mentary signs are then displayed in the instru-

Setting the speed

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

ment cluster and the Head-up display, if appli-

cable, or ignored, depending on the situation.

Some supplementary signs are taken into ac-

count in the speed limit evaluation, but are not

displayed in the instrument cluster.

▷

In countries where overtaking restrictions

are primarily shown by road markings.

▷

On routes without road signs.

In the case of railway crossings, lane mark-

ings and other situations which indicate

an overtaking restriction but which are not

signposted to this effect.

The system may also show speed limits that

apply to routes that are not marked if the navi-

gation system has current map data.

Depending on the equipment, an additional

icon with distance information may also be dis-

played to indicate the end of the no-overtaking

indicator.

In order for Speed Limit Info to function cor-

rectly, the current map data must be installed

for the country in which the vehicle is operated.

For information on the current map version

and map update, see Map update in the chap-

ter Navigation system.

Safety information

Speed limits for trailer operation are displayed

when the trailer socket is occupied or when the

trailer operation has been activated via iDrive.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Depending on the equipment, an approved

maximum speed can be set up for trailer oper-

ation, which will be taken into account for the

display of speed limits.

For further information:

▷

Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Enter-

tainment, Communication, see page 6.

▷

Trailer operation, see page 344.

No-overtaking indicator

Sensors

The system is controlled by the camera behind

the windscreen.

Principle

Overtaking restriction signs and end of restric-

tion signs which have been detected by the

camera are indicated by corresponding icons

in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, the

Head-up display.

Displaying Speed Limit Info

General

The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden

via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending

on the national-market version, Speed Limit

Info is continuously displayed in the instrument

cluster.

General

The system considers overtaking restrictions

and ends of restrictions that are indicated by

means of road signs.

It will not display anything in the following sit-

uations:

Displaying Speed Limit Info

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

233

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. "Warning when speeding"

No-overtaking indicator

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. "Speed limits"

Icon

Description

8. "Show current limit"

No overtaking.

Display

End of overtaking restriction.

General

Depending on the national-market version,

supplementary signs and no-overtaking indi-

cators are displayed together with Speed Limit

Info.

Supplementary signs

Icon

Description

Speed Limit Info

Speed limit with time limit.

Icon

Description

The speed limit only applies in

wet conditions.

Present speed limit.

The speed limit only applies in

snow.

No data available on the cur-

rent speed limit.

The speed limit only applies in

fog.

Speed Limit Info unavailable.

The speed limit applies for the

exit junction on the left.

The speed limit applies for the

exit junction on the right.

The display flashes if the detected speed limit

has been exceeded. Depending on the na-

tional-market version, an acoustic signal also

sounds.

The speed limit only applies

when towing a trailer.

Depending on the equipment:

speed limit with unrecognised

supplementary sign.

The warning if the maximum permissible

speed is exceeded can be activated or deacti-

vated via iDrive:

1.

Apps menu

Speed Limit Display with Anticipatory

Indicator

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, an additional icon with dis-

tance information may indicate that a change

in speed limit is ahead. The Anticipatory Indi-

cator must be activated for Speed Limit Assist.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

234

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Temporary speed limits may also be dis-

played, for example at construction sites. Tem-

porary speed limits can only be displayed if

the following services are selected in the data

protection menu for the navigation system:

▷

If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle

ahead.

When overtaking buses or trucks with road

sign stickers.

▷

If there are electronic road signs.

▷

"Learning map"

"Map update"

If road signs are detected that apply to a

parallel road.

For further information:

▷

If the road signs or road layouts are specific

to one country.

▷

Speed Limit Assist, see page 255.

Data protection, see page 72.

Cruise Control Systems

Settings

1.

Apps menu

Principle

The Cruise Control Systems provide support

when driving.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

General

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. Select the desired setting.

Depending on the equipment, the Cruise Con-

trol Systems include the following individual

systems.

▷

Manual Speed Limiter, see page 237.

Cruise Control, see page 239.

System limits

System limits of the sensors

For further information:

Distance control, see page 242.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, see page 253.

▷

Camera, see page 41.

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the individual systems are en-

hanced with additional functions.

Functional limitations

Functionality may be restricted or incorrect in-

formation may be displayed in some situations

such as:

Some functions can be operated via voice in-

put.

▷

Road signs are fully or partially concealed

by objects, stickers or paint.

For further information:

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see

page 59.

Road signs do not correspond to the stand-

ard.

In areas that are not included in the map

data of the navigation system.

In the event of invalid, outdated or unavail-

able map data of the navigation system.

If there are navigation discrepancies, for ex-

ample due to changes in road layout.

235

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Safety information

Button Function

Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Rocker switch: to set the speed.

Turning on/selecting Cruise Control

Systems

1.

Turn on: press the button.

2.

Select: when the system active,

press the button repeatedly until the de-

sired Cruise Control System is displayed in

the toolbar in the instrument cluster.

WARNING

Individual functions may malfunction when

tow-starting or towing away with activa-

ted front-collision warning or Cruise Control

switched on. There is a risk of accident. Turn

off the front-collision warning and Cruise

Control before tow-starting or towing away.

Icon

Cruise Control System

Manual Speed Limiter.

Cruise Control.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Distance control.

Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control

with Distance Control, Steering Assis-

tant with tracking.

Switch last active Cruise Control

System on/off.

Select the desired Cruise Control

System.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus: system

for traffic queues.

To store the current speed.

The activated system is shown in green.

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the

suggested speed manually.

The system is shown in white if the system can

be activated.

Continue Cruise Control Systems

with the saved setting.

The system is greyed out if the system has

failed or if the functional requirements are not

met.

236

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the

resistance point, the set speed is increased

or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.

Interrupting Cruise Control Systems

automatically

Depending on the system, Cruise Control Sys-

tems are interrupted automatically, for exam-

ple, in the following situations:

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past

the resistance point, the set speed changes

by 10 in the km/h display or 5 in the mph

display in the speedometer.

▷

When exiting selector lever position D to P,

N or R.

▷

When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-

ing the driving stability.

Display in the instrument cluster

▷

While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.

Display in the speedometer

While Dynamic Traction Control is activa-

ted.

A mark is displayed on the

speedometer for the set speed.

▷

When braking manually.

▷

Green marker: system is ac-

tive.

Interrupting Cruise Control Systems

manually

▷

Grey mark: the system is in-

terrupted.

Press the key.

▷ No marker: system is switched off.

Notifications

Continuing Cruise Control Systems

In addition to the respective indicator lights,

notifications are displayed for some functions.

Press the key.

The scope of notifications can be set.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Turning off Cruise Control Systems

automatically

The Cruise Control Systems turn off automati-

cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Notifications"

Switching off Cruise Control

Systems manually

7. Select the desired setting.

Press the key.

Manual Speed Limiter

The Cruise Control Systems are turned

off and the displays go out.

Principle

The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set

a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-

cle from exceeding speed limits.

Adjusting speed values

Press the rocker switch on the steering

wheel up or down repeatedly until the

desired value is set.

237

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

When switching on at a standstill or driving

at low speed, 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the

speed limit.

General

The system allows speeds of 30 km/h/20 mph

and above to be set as a speed limit. Below

the set speed limit, the vehicle can be driven

without restriction.

The speedometer marker is set to the appro-

priate speed.

When the speed limit is switched on, the drive

mode may be changed or Dynamic Stability

Control activated.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Turning the Cruise Control System

on/off

The Cruise Control System can be turned off or

cancelled automatically or manually.

Switch last active Cruise Control

System on/off.

For further information:

Select the desired Cruise Control

System.

Cruise Control Systems, see page 235.

Changing the speed limit

To store the current speed.

Press the rocker switch repeatedly up

or down until the desired speed limit is

set.

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the

suggested speed manually.

Continue Cruise Control Systems

with the saved setting.

If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-

ally exceeded, for example when driving down-

hill, there is no active brake intervention.

Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.

Rocker switch: to set the speed.

When Speed Limit Assist is not active, the cur-

rent speed can be stored by pressing a button:

Press the key.

Exceeding of speed limit

The system gives a warning if the current

speed exceeds the set speed limit.

Operation

Switching on the speed limiter

You can intentionally exceed the speed limit.

To intentionally exceed the set speed limit,

press the accelerator pedal all the way down.

1.

If necessary, press the button.

The limit automatically becomes active again

as soon as the current speed falls below the

set speed limit.

2.

If necessary, press the button re-

peatedly until the speed limiter is selected.

The current speed or a higher speed that has

already been stored is adopted as the speed

limit.

238

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded

Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, some system

information can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

Visual warning

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster flashes as long as the vehicle

is travelling above the set speed limit.

Cruise Control

Principle

Acoustic warning

Cruise Control allows a set speed to be speci-

fied using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The set speed is then maintained by the sys-

tem. It does this by automatically accelerating

and braking the vehicle as necessary.

▷

A warning sounds if you inadvertently ex-

ceed the set speed limit.

▷

If the speed limit is reduced to below the

current speed during the journey, the signal

sounds after a little time.

▷

No signal sounds if you intentionally exceed

the speed limit by fully pressing the acceler-

ator pedal.

General

The system can be activated starting at

30 km/h/20 mph.

Depending on the vehicle setting, the char-

acteristics of Cruise Control may change in

certain areas; for example, acceleration may

change depending on the drive mode.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Display in the speedometer

▷

Green marker: system is ac-

tive.

Safety information

Grey mark: the system is in-

terrupted.

WARNING

No marker: system is

switched off.

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Indicator light

Icon

Description

Indicator light illuminates: the system

is switched on.

Indicator light flashes: set speed limit

is exceeded.

Grey indicator light: the system is in-

terrupted.

WARNING

The risk of accident may increase if the sys-

tem is used in certain situations, such as:

239

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

On stretches of road with many corners

and bends.

Turning on the Cruise Control

In vehicles with distance control: change the

mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control

without distance control.

▷

In heavy traffic.

If the road is icy, if there is fog or snow,

in wet conditions or on a loose road sur-

face.

For further information:

Distance control, see page 242.

There is a risk of accident or material dam-

age. Only use the system if it is possible to

drive at a constant speed.

In vehicles without distance control: turn on the

Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering

wheel.

WARNING

1.

If necessary, press the button.

The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-

take or called up accidentally. There is a risk

of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

intervene actively if the situation warrants it.

2.

If necessary, press the button re-

peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.

Cruise Control is active. The current speed is

maintained and stored as the set speed.

The indicator lights are illuminated in the in-

strument cluster and the marker in the speed-

ometer is positioned at the current speed.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

When Cruise Control is switched on, the drive

mode may be changed or Dynamic Stability

Control activated.

Switch last active Cruise Control

System on/off.

Turning the Cruise Control System

on/off

The Cruise Control System can be turned off or

cancelled automatically or manually.

Select the desired Cruise Control

System.

For further information:

To store the current speed.

Cruise Control Systems, see page 235.

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the

suggested speed manually.

Setting the speed

Continue Cruise Control Systems

with the saved setting.

To maintain/store the speed

While the system is interrupted, press

the rocker switch up or down once.

Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.

Rocker switch: to set the speed.

When the system is switched on, the current

speed is maintained and stored as the set

speed.

The stored speed is displayed on the speed-

ometer.

240

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

When Speed Limit Assist is not active, the cur-

rent speed can also be stored by pressing a

button:

▷

When the system is switched off.

When drive-ready state is switched off.

At the current speed

Press the key.

Press the button to continue Cruise

Control at the current speed.

Changing the speed

Speed Limit Assist: at the suggested

speed

Press the rocker switch repeatedly up

or down until the set speed is set.

If the system is active, the displayed

speed is stored and the vehicle adjusts to the

stored speed when the road is clear.

When a speed is suggested, press the

button to accept the Cruise Control at

the suggested speed.

The maximum speed which can be set de-

pends on the vehicle.

Displays in the instrument cluster

When the rocker switch is pressed to the re-

sistance point and then held there: the vehicle

accelerates or decelerates without the need to

press the accelerator pedal.

Display in the speedometer

▷

Green marker: system is ac-

tive, the marker shows the

set speed.

When the rocker switch is released, the vehicle

maintains the final speed. Pressing beyond the

resistance point accelerates the vehicle more

rapidly.

▷

Grey marker: system is inter-

rupted; the marker shows the

stored speed.

▷

No marker: system is switched off.

Resuming Cruise Control

Indicator light

At the stored speed

If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be re-

sumed by calling up the stored speed.

Icon

Description

No indicator light: the system is

switched off.

Before calling up the stored speed, make sure

that the difference between the current speed

and the stored speed is not too great. Other-

wise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or accel-

eration may occur.

Green indicator light: the system is

active.

With the system interrupted, press the

button.

Grey indicator light: the system is in-

terrupted.

Cruise Control is resumed with the stored val-

ues.

Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, some system

information can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

In the following instances, the stored speed

value is deleted and therefore cannot be called

up again:

241

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

System limits

Safety information

The set speed is also maintained when driving

downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set

speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough

drive power.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Depending on the drive mode, it is possible

that the vehicle will drive faster or slower than

the set speed setting in some situations; for

example, on downhill or uphill gradients.

Distance control

Principle

With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-

cle driving ahead can be set in addition to the

Cruise Control.

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and

roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before

leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

General

When the road ahead is clear, the system

maintains the set speed. The vehicle acceler-

ates or brakes automatically.

Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-

cle is secured against rolling away:

If there is a vehicle driving in front, the sys-

tem adapts the speed of your vehicle in order

to maintain the set distance from the vehicle

ahead. The speed is adapted as far as the

given situation allows.

▷

Apply the parking brake.

Turn the front wheels towards the kerb

on uphill or downhill gradient.

▷

Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill

or downhill gradient, for example with a

chock.

The distance can be set in several stages and

for safety reasons is dependent on the respec-

tive speed.

If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill and

drives off again shortly afterwards, the system

is able to comprehend this as far as given con-

ditions allow.

WARNING

The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-

take or called up accidentally. There is a risk

of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

intervene actively if the situation warrants it.

Otherwise, independent drive-off, for example,

by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by

pressing the button for the speed setting on

the steering wheel.

242

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Sensors

WARNING

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

There is a risk of accident if the difference in

speed relative to other vehicles is too great.

This may occur, for example, in the following

situations:

▷

Camera behind the windscreen.

Front radar sensor.

For further information:

▷

When quickly approaching a slowly mov-

ing vehicle.

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

If another vehicle suddenly veers into the

vehicle's own driving lane.

Use

The system can be used to optimum effect on

well-constructed roads.

When quickly approaching stationary ve-

hicles.

The maximum speed which can be set is limi-

ted and depends on the vehicle and its equip-

ment, for example.

There is a danger of injury or danger to life.

Observe the traffic situation and intervene

actively if the situation warrants it.

Depending on the equipment, higher set

speeds can also be selected after switching to

Cruise Control without Distance Control.

Overview

The system can also be activated when the

vehicle is at a standstill.

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Turning on Cruise Control with

distance control

Switch last active Cruise Control

System on/off.

1.

If necessary, press the button.

Select the desired Cruise Control

System.

2.

If necessary, press the button re-

peatedly until distance control is selected.

To store the current speed.

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the

suggested speed manually.

Cruise Control with distance control is active.

The current speed is maintained and stored as

the set speed.

Continue Cruise Control Systems

with the saved setting.

The selected distance to a vehicle driving in

front is maintained.

Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.

Rocker switch: to set the speed.

The indicator lights are illuminated in the in-

strument cluster and the marker in the speed-

ometer is positioned at the current speed.

When Distance Control is switched on, the

drive mode may be changed or Dynamic Sta-

bility Control activated.

243

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Before calling up the stored speed, make sure

Setting the speed

The speed can be set with the buttons on the

steering wheel.

that the difference between the current speed

and the stored speed is not too great. Other-

wise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or accel-

eration may occur.

For further information:

Cruise Control, see page 239.

For further information:

Cruise Control, see page 239.

Interrupting Cruise Control with

distance control automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the

following situations:

Distance

Safety information

▷

When braking manually.

Selector lever position D is disengaged.

While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility. System limits may mean

that deceleration is performed too late. There

is a risk of accident or material damage. Pay

close attention to the traffic situation at all

times. Adapt the distance to suit traffic and

weather conditions and comply with the pre-

scribed safe distance by braking if necessary.

While Dynamic Traction Control is activa-

ted.

▷

When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-

ing the driving stability.

Driver's seat belt and driver's door are

opened.

The system has not detected any objects

for an extended period, for example, on a

road with very little traffic without curb or

shoulder markings.

Adjusting the distance

1.

Apps menu

▷

The detection range of the radar is im-

paired, for example, by contamination or

heavy precipitation.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

After an extended stationary period, if the

vehicle was decelerated to a standstill by

the system.

6. "Distance control"

7. "Distance"

Turning the Cruise Control System

on/off

8. Select the desired setting.

The Cruise Control System can be turned off or

cancelled automatically or manually.

Adapting the distance automatically

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version: the system can be configured

so that the distance to the vehicle in front is

adapted automatically. The system takes into

For further information:

Cruise Control Systems, see page 235.

Resuming Cruise Control

If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be re-

sumed by calling up the stored speed.

244

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

account the traffic situation and ambient con-

ditions, e.g. poor visibility.

Display in the speedometer

▷

Green marker: system is ac-

tive, the marker shows the

set speed.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

▷

Grey marker: system is inter-

rupted; the marker shows the

stored speed.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

▷

No marker: system is switched off.

6. "Distance control"

7. "Situational distance control"

Indicator lights and warning lights

Switching between Cruise Control

with/without distance control

Icon

Description

White indicator light:

No display of distance control be-

cause the accelerator pedal is being

pressed.

Safety information

WARNING

The indicator light is illuminated

green.

The system will not respond to traffic travel-

ling in front of you, but instead maintains the

stored speed. There is a risk of accident or

material damage. Adjust the set speed to the

traffic conditions and brake if necessary.

Vehicle ahead detected.

The vehicle symbol goes out if no ve-

hicle in front is detected.

The indicator light is illuminated

green:

Switching the Cruise Control mode

Turning Cruise Control without distance control

on or off:

Preceding vehicle has driven off.

The indicator light is illuminated grey:

The system is interrupted.

1.

Apps menu

The indicator light flashes grey:

2. "Vehicle apps"

The requirements for system opera-

tion are no longer being met.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

The system has been deactivated

but will continue to brake until you

actively take over by depressing the

brake or accelerator pedal.

6. "Distance control"

7. "Switch to cruise control"

The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.

Warning light flashes red and an

acoustic signal sounds:

Displays in the instrument cluster

Brake and take avoidance manoeu-

vre if necessary.

General

Depending on the equipment, the displays in

the instrument cluster may vary.

245

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

At speeds below 80 km/h/50 mph, vehicles on

motorways are only overtaken with an adjus-

ted differential speed.

Assisted View

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

The driver can overtake or accelerate at any

time by pressing the accelerator pedal.

Switching the function on/off:

For further information:

Assisted View, see page 173.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Displays in the Head-up display

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

Set speed

Depending on the equipment, some system

information can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

6. "Distance control"

7. Depending on the national-market version:

▷

"Avoid overtaking on the left"

"Avoid overtaking on the right"

Distance information

The icon is shown if your vehicle is too

close to the vehicle ahead.

System limits

The distance information is active under the

following circumstances:

System limits of the sensors

For further information:

▷

Cruise Control with distance control

switched off.

▷

Cameras, see page 41.

Radar sensors, see page 42.

▷

Display in the Head-up display selected.

Head-up display, see page 158.

Distance too close.

Detection range

▷

Speed above approximately 70 km/h,

40 mph.

Preventing overtaking

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the function assists in avoiding

unintended overtaking on motorways.

The system can be set to avoid overtaking in

the slower lane.

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-

tection range.

The setting applies to speeds exceeding

80 km/h/50 mph.

The system's detection capability and auto-

matic braking capacity are limited.

When the set speed is significantly higher than

the speed in the adjacent lane, passing or

overtaking may still be possible even if the

function is switched on.

For example, two-wheel vehicles may not be

detected.

246

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

bends may not be anticipated in advance,

moderate your speed when cornering.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the

following situations:

The system has a restricted detection range.

Situations can arise on tight bends where a

vehicle driving in front will not be detected or

will be detected very late.

▷

For pedestrians or similarly slow road

users.

▷

Depending on the equipment, at red traffic

lights.

▷

For crossing traffic.

For oncoming vehicles.

Vehicles cutting in

When your vehicle is approaching a bend, the

curvature may cause the system to respond

temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. If the

system responds by decelerating the vehicle,

you may compensate for this by accelerating

briefly. When the accelerator pedal is released

again, the system will resume control of the

vehicle's speed.

If another vehicle suddenly cuts in front of you,

the system might not be able to restore the se-

lected distance automatically. In some circum-

stances, it may also not be possible to restore

the selected distance if you are driving signifi-

cantly faster than vehicles in front, for example

when rapidly approaching a lorry. If a vehicle

is clearly detected in front of you, the system

prompts you to intervene by braking, and if

necessary by taking avoidance manoeuvre.

Driving off

The vehicle cannot drive off automatically in

some situations, for example:

▷

On steep upward gradients.

Before bumps or rises in the road.

When towing a heavy trailer.

In such cases, press the accelerator pedal.

Cornering

Weather

In adverse weather and lighting conditions,

system functionality may be limited as follows:

▷

Impaired detection of vehicles.

Brief interruptions when vehicles have al-

ready been detected.

Pay attention when driving and respond to the

prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, inter-

vene actively, for example by braking, steering

or taking avoidance manoeuvre.

If the set speed is too high for cornering, it will

be reduced slightly in the bend. However, since

247

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

The information on Cruise Control and Dis-

tance Control also applies.

Drive power

The set speed is also maintained when driving

downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set

speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough

drive power.

For further information:

▷

Cruise Control, see page 239.

Distance control, see page 242.

Depending on the drive mode, it is possible

that the vehicle will drive faster or slower than

the set speed setting in some situations; for

example, on downhill or uphill gradients.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Assisted Driving Mode

Switch last active Cruise Control

System on/off.

Principle

Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance

Control with a Steering Assistant with tracking.

The system helps keep the vehicle in driving

lane. It does this by performing supporting

steering wheel movements, for example when

cornering.

Select the desired Cruise Control

System.

To store the current speed.

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the

suggested speed manually.

General

Continue Cruise Control Systems

with the saved setting.

Depending on the speed, the system orien-

tates itself using the lane markings and vehi-

cles driving in front.

Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.

Rocker switch: to set the speed.

Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether

the steering wheel is being touched.

Safety information

Sensors

WARNING

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

▷

Camera behind the windscreen.

Front radar sensor.

Depending on the equipment:

Side radar sensors, front.

Depending on the equipment:

Side radar sensors, rear.

▷

Sensors in the steering wheel.

For further information:

248

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

The indicator light illuminates green.

The system is activated and assists in

keeping the vehicle in the driving lane.

Operating requirements

▷

Depending on the equipment: speed below

210 km/h, approx. 130 mph or 180 km/h,

approx. 110 mph.

When the system is switched on, the front-col-

lision warning and, depending on the equip-

ment, the side collision warning are active.

▷

The lane width is sufficiently wide.

Hands on the steering wheel rim.

Sufficiently wide curve radius.

Interrupting Assisted Driving Mode

automatically

The system interrupts the supporting steering

movements automatically, for example in the

following situations:

Driving in the centre of the driving lane.

Turn indicators are switched off.

The sensor system calibration process is

complete.

▷

Depending on the equipment: at a speed

above 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph or

180 km/h, approx. 110 mph.

▷

Distance control is active.

Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.

Front-collision warning is active.

Depending on the equipment:

Side collision warning is active.

▷

After releasing the steering wheel.

When the steering wheel is turned sharply.

When the vehicle leaves its own driving

lane.

▷

With a trailer tow hitch: operation with a

trailer or operation with a rear luggage rack

must be set on the control display in ac-

cordance with the use.

▷

When the turn indicator is activated.

When the driving lane is too narrow.

A lane boundary is not detected and there

is no vehicle driving in front.

Operation with a trailer or rear luggage

rack, see page 348.

▷

The Cruise Control with distance control is

interrupted.

The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-

tened.

Switching on Assisted Driving Mode

The indicator light is illuminated grey.

1.

If necessary, press the button.

System is on standby and does not

make any steering wheel movement.

2.

If necessary, press the button re-

peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-

lected.

The system activates automatically when all

operating requirements are met.

The indicator light is illuminated grey.

System is on standby and does not

make any steering wheel movement.

The system activates automatically when all

operating requirements are met.

249

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon

Description

The indicator light is illuminated grey:

The system is ready.

For further information:

Assisted View, see page 173.

The indicator light is illuminated

green.

Displays on the steering wheel

The system is activated.

The system is helping the driver keep

the vehicle in driving lane.

The warning light flashes yellow and

the steering wheel vibrates:

A lane boundary has been crossed.

The warning light is illuminated yel-

low and a signal sounds:

The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate

analogously to the displays in the instrument

cluster.

A system interruption is imminent.

Warning light flashes red and an

acoustic signal sounds:

The steering wheel displays can be switched

on/off if required.

The system is switching off or an in-

terruption of the system is imminent.

1.

Apps menu

The warning light is illuminated yel-

low:

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

Hands are not holding the steering

wheel. System remains active.

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Lighting elements"

7. Select the desired setting.

Grab the steering wheel with your

hands.

The warning light is illuminated red, a

signal sounds:

Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, the system in-

formation can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

Hands are not holding the steering

wheel. System interruption is immi-

nent.

The system reduces the speed to a

standstill if applicable.

Adjusting the strength of the

steering wheel vibration

The system may possibly not per-

form any supporting steering wheel

movements.

1.

Apps menu

Grab the steering wheel with your

hands.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

250

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

4. "Driver assistance"

Weather

5. "Feedback via steering wheel"

6. "Vibration intensity"

In adverse weather and lighting conditions,

system functionality may be limited as follows:

▷

Impaired detection of vehicles and lane

markings.

7. Select the desired setting.

The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety

Systems.

▷

Short-term interruptions in case of already

detected vehicles and lane boundaries.

Pay attention when driving and respond to the

prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, inter-

vene actively, for example by braking, steering

or taking avoidance manoeuvre.

System limits

General

The system cannot be activated or used use-

fully in certain situations.

Emergency Lane Assistant

Safety information

Principle

WARNING

The Emergency Lane Assistant can assist in

traffic queues on motorways or motorway-like

roads with the formation of an emergency

lane.

Due to system limitations, the system may

not respond at all, or may respond too late,

incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Observe the in-

formation on the system limits and intervene

actively if necessary.

General

As soon as the system detects a traffic queue,

a Check Control message is shown on the con-

trol display. Depending on the situation, the

vehicle will be steered to the right or left within

the current driving lane in order to form an

emergency lane.

The information on Cruise Control and Dis-

tance Control also applies.

For further information:

▷

Cruise Control, see page 239.

Distance control, see page 242.

The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode

sensors.

System limits of the sensors

Safety information

For further information:

▷

Cameras, see page 41.

Radar sensors, see page 42.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

Hands on the steering wheel

In the following situations, contact between the

driver's hands and the steering wheel is not

detected by the sensors:

▷

Driving when wearing gloves.

Covers on the steering wheel.

251

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Lane Change Assistant

Principle

The Assisted Driving Mode notices also apply.

For further information:

The Lane Change Assistant also assists when

changing lanes on multi-lane roads.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

General

Operating requirements

The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode

sensors.

▷

Assisted Driving Mode is activated.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Traffic queue is detected.

▷

Safety information

Driving on a motorway or a similar road.

Lane boundary is detected.

WARNING

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is being driven.

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Activating/deactivating the

Emergency Lane Assistant

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

The Assisted Driving Mode notices also apply.

For further information:

6. "Assisted Driving"

7. "Emerg. Corridor Assistant"

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Operating requirements

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

▷

The functional requirements for Assisted

Driving Mode are met.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

▷

Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-

clists and with physical barriers separating

oncoming vehicles, for example crash barri-

ers.

For further information:

Assisted View, see page 173.

System limits

The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system

apply.

▷

Since the start of the journey, a vehicle has

been detected at a sufficient distance be-

hind your own vehicle.

For further information:

Lane boundaries that can be driven over

are detected.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

252

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

Maximum speed 180 km/h, approx.

110 mph.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon

Description

The minimum speed is country-specific.

Steering wheel symbol and arrow

symbol for lane change green:

Turning on/turning off Lane Change

Assistant

The system carries out a lane

change.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Green steering wheel symbol and line

for lane boundary on the affected

side grey:

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

The system has detected the lane

change request. Lane change not

currently possible.

6. "Assisted Driving"

7. "Lane Change Assistant"

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

Changing driving lane

1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits a

lane change.

2. Press the turn indicator lever in the desired

direction as far as the resistance point for

indicating briefly.

For further information:

Assisted View, see page 173.

System limits

The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system

apply.

For further information:

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

Supporting steering movements in the desired

direction can be felt a short time later.

Principle

Assisted Driving Mode Plus assists with vehi-

cle control in traffic queues on motorways.

After the lane change, the system helps the

driver keep the vehicle in lane.

The function makes it possible to temporarily

remove the hands from the steering wheel in

suitable driving situations.

Cancelling a lane change

The lane change can be cancelled by steering

movement into the opposite direction or by op-

erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.

Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether

the steering wheel is being touched.

253

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Sensors

Safety information

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

WARNING

▷

The camera behind the windscreen.

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

The front radar sensor.

The radar sensors on the side, front.

The radar sensors on the side, rear.

The sensors in the steering wheel.

The Driver Attention Camera.

For further information:

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

Operating requirements

The Assisted Driving Mode notices also apply.

For further information:

▷

The functional requirements for Assisted

Driving Mode are met.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Assisted Driving Mode is active and the

LED displays on the steering wheel are

switched on.

Overview

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

▷

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is being driven.

Driving on motorways or similar roads with-

out pedestrians or cyclists and with physi-

cal barriers separating oncoming vehicles,

for example guard rails.

Switch last active Cruise Control

System on/off.

Select the desired Cruise Control

System.

▷

The lane width is sufficiently wide.

Sufficiently wide curve radius.

Lane boundaries are detected.

A vehicle ahead is detected.

To store the current speed.

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the

suggested speed manually.

Speed below approx. 60 km/h, approx.

40 mph.

Continue Cruise Control Systems

with the saved setting.

▷

The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-

ment cluster detects that the driver is look-

ing at the traffic situation.

Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.

Rocker switch: to set the speed.

Switching Assisted Driving Mode

Plus on/off

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

254

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

▷

Green: the system is active.

Yellow: the system has been interrupted.

Grab the steering wheel with your hands.

Red: the system is deactivated.

6. "Assisted Driving"

7. "Assisted Driving Plus"

▷

Grab the steering wheel immediately with

your hands.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically

offered when Assisted Driving is active and

all functional requirements for Assisted Driving

Mode Plus are met.

For further information:

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Two green LEDs are illuminated on the steer-

ing wheel.

Displays in the Head-up display

Depending on the equipment, the system in-

formation can also be displayed in the Head-

up display.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is

shown in green.

The system starts to help the driver to control

the vehicle.

System limits

The system limits of the following systems ap-

ply:

When the system is switched on, the following

functions are active:

▷

Front-collision warning.

Side collision warning.

▷

Assisted Driving Mode

Driver Attention Camera

Sensors in the vehicle

Displays in the instrument cluster

For further information:

Icon

Description

▷

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Driver Attention Camera, see page 224.

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

Green indicator light: the system is

active.

White indicator light: the system can

be activated.

Speed Limit Assist

Principle

Displays on the steering wheel

Speed Limit Assist helps the driver to observe

speed limits. A suggested speed can be adop-

ted.

General

When the systems in the vehicle, for example

Speed Limit Info, detect a change in the speed

limit, it is possible to adopt this new speed

value for the following systems:

▷

Manual Speed Limiter.

Cruise Control.

Depending on the situation, the two LEDs

above the keypads light up.

255

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

Distance control.

Overview

Assisted Driving Mode.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus.

Buttons on the steering wheel

The speed value is proposed as a new set

speed for adopting. The relevant system must

be activated for the speed value to be adopted.

Button Function

To accept the suggested speed

manually.

Depending on the equipment, destination sys-

tem and national-market version, the value

may be applied automatically.

Rocker switch: set the speed, see

Cruise Control.

Safety information

Switching Speed Limit Assist on/off

WARNING

1.

Apps menu

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. "Speed limits"

8. Select the desired setting:

▷

"Adjust automatically": depending on

the equipment, detected speed limits

are applied automatically.

WARNING

▷

"Adjust manually": detected speed limits

can be applied manually.

The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-

take or called up accidentally. There is a risk

of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

intervene actively if the situation warrants it.

"Show anticipation": current and up-

coming speed limits are displayed in

the instrument cluster without being ap-

plied.

▷

"Show current limit": current speed lim-

its are displayed without being applied

in the instrument cluster.

"Off": depending on the national-market

version, Speed Limit Info and Speed

Limit Assist will be turned off.

If necessary, other predictive comfort

functions will be turned off.

For further information:

Speed Limit Info, see page 232.

256

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

General

Displays in the instrument cluster

A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an

additional speed adaptation for speed limits up

to 60 km/h/40 mph can be set up.

A message is displayed in the instrument clus-

ter when the system and a Cruise Control Sys-

tem are activated.

The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-

its up to 60 km/h/40 mph can be activated or

deactivated.

Icon

Function

Detected change in speed limit de-

tected with immediate effect.

Setting the speed adjustment

Remaining distance display shown

alongside the icon indicates there

might be a change in the speed limit

up ahead.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

Indicator light is illuminated green:

the detected speed limit can be

adopted with the SET button.

6. "Speed Limit Assistant"

7. Select the desired setting:

A green tick is displayed once it has

been adopted.

▷

"Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance

for speed adjustments, which applies to

all speed limits.

Automatic adoption

"Adjust automatically": with the selected set-

ting, a detected speed limit is automatically

applied to Distance Control or the Manual

Speed Limiter adopted.

▷

"2nd adjustm. up to": to activate or de-

activate additional speed adjustment.

"Adjust speed limits": with activated

additional speed adjustment, set the

tolerance for speed limits up to

60 km/h/40 mph.

After an automatic adoption, the button

can be pressed to switch back to the

last set value of the set speed.

System limits

Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed

Limit Info system.

Manual adoption

A detected speed limit can be applied man-

ually to the active Cruise Control System.

Take into account the Speed Limit Info system

limits.

When the SET icon is displayed, press

the button.

Depending on the national-market version, up-

coming speed limits may not be available for

application or they may only be available to

a certain extent, for instance information from

the map data of the navigation system.

Speed adjustment

Principle

Cruise Control without distance control: de-

pending on the system, it may not be possible

to adopt speed limits automatically.

It is possible to set whether the speed limit will

be adopted exactly, or with a tolerance.

Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to

the Cruise Control with distance control.

257

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

With a trailer tow hitch: speed values to be

adopted are limited to the value set on the

control display for trailer operation.

In addition, the notices for Cruise Control,

Distance Control, Assisted Driving Mode and

Speed Limit Assist apply.

For further information:

▷

System limits of Speed Limit Info, see

page 235.

▷

Cruise Control, see page 239.

Distance control, see page 242.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Speed Limit Assist, see page 255.

▷

System limits of the sensors, see page 41.

Operation with a trailer or rear luggage

rack, see page 348.

Operating requirements

▷

Cruise Control and distance control are acti-

vated.

Adapting the speed to the

route

▷

Driving on a motorway or a similar road.

With navigation system: route guidance is

activated.

Principle

The system can be configured so that with

active distance control, the vehicle adapts the

speed automatically to the route.

The use of navigation software via Apple

CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-

tional limitations, for example deviations

from instructions given by the navigation

system.

For example, the speed is reduced in the

following situations if necessary:

▷

Before turning off.

Before a roundabout.

Before a bend.

▷

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is being driven.

With a trailer tow hitch: operation with a

trailer or operation with a rear luggage rack

must be set on the control display in ac-

cordance with the use.

In front of an exit junction on motorways or

motorway-like roads.

Operation with a trailer or rear luggage

rack, see page 348.

Safety information

WARNING

Adapt speed automatically to route

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Route and junction assistant"

7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"

258

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Adjusting the cornering speed

Depending on the national-market version, the

cornering speed can be set.

Lane change with active

route guidance

1.

Apps menu

Principle

2. "Vehicle apps"

Lane change with active route guidance as-

sists the driver when a lane change is needed

in order to reach a destination. A warning is

displayed in the instrument cluster. In addition,

a slight jerk can be felt on the steering wheel.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Route and junction assistant"

7. "Cornering speed"

8. Select the desired setting.

General

The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode

sensors.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Safety information

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-

market version, the information from the sys-

tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central

display area of the instrument cluster.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

For further information:

Assisted View, see page 173.

System limits

Depending on the national-market version or

country in which the vehicle is currently being

driven, the function may not be available.

The system does not respond at all or re-

sponds only to a limited extent on the route

ahead in the following situations for example:

The Cruise Control, Distance Control and As-

sisted Driving Mode notices also apply.

▷

If the position of the vehicle cannot be

clearly determined by the navigation sys-

tem.

For further information:

▷

Cruise Control, see page 239.

▷

In wintry road conditions.

Distance control, see page 242.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Additionally, the limits of the Cruise Control,

distance control, Assisted Driving Mode and

Speed Limit Assist systems apply.

Operating requirements

For further information:

▷

Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-

tivated.

▷

Cruise Control, see page 239.

Distance control, see page 242.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Speed Limit Assist, see page 255.

▷

Driving on a motorway or a similar road.

A situation-dependent minimum speed has

been reached.

259

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

The system detects a sufficiently large gap

in traffic in the adjacent lane.

Changing driving lane

If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-

igation destination, a corresponding message

is displayed in the instrument cluster. In addi-

tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering

wheel.

A lane boundary that can be driven over

is detected on the side of the desired lane

change.

▷

Route guidance is active in the navigation

system.

To change lanes, follow the instructions in the

instrument cluster.

The function is not available when using

navigation software via Apple CarPlay or

Android Auto.

1.

The system detects a suitable gap

in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A

green check mark is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster on the lane change icon. The

system prepares for the lane change.

▷

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is being driven.

With a trailer tow hitch: operation with a

trailer or operation with a rear luggage rack

must be set on the control display in ac-

cordance with the use.

2. When a suitable gap has been found, the

speed is adapted so the vehicle stays level

with the gap.

Operation with a trailer or rear luggage

rack, see page 348.

3. A lane change suggestion is displayed with

a Check Control message.

Switching lane change on/off with

active route guidance

1.

4. If the traffic situation permits a lane change,

the driver can steer the vehicle into the ad-

jacent lane.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

If the vehicle is equipped with the Lane

Change Assistant: once the Check Control

message has been displayed, the Lane

Change Assistant can be started by operat-

ing the turn indicator.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Route and junction assistant"

7. "Actively follow the route"

Display in the instrument cluster

Icon

Function

Switching the steering wheel jerk

on/off

The assistance provided by the jerk on the

steering wheel can be switched on/off.

Indicates a necessary lane change.

The icon varies depending on the

traffic situation.

A green check mark on the icon indi-

cates the active function.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

A red cross on the icon indicates

that the system cannot support lane

change.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the traffic situation is displayed

6. "Route and junction assistant"

7. "Steering wheel impulse"

260

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

in the Assisted View in the central display area

of the instrument cluster.

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

For further information:

Assisted View, see page 173.

Overview

System limits

The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-

trol and Assisted Driving Mode systems apply.

Button on the steering wheel

Button Function

For further information:

▷

Cruise Control, see page 239.

Accept detected traffic lights man-

ually.

Distance control, see page 242.

Assisted Driving Mode, see page 248.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the camera behind

the windscreen.

Traffic light detection

Principle

Operating requirements

Traffic light detection assist when stopping at

red traffic lights and draws attention to when it

is possible to continue driving.

▷

Cruise Control and distance control are acti-

vated.

▷

Speed up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph.

The function must be available in the coun-

try in which the vehicle is being driven.

General

The camera near the interior mirror is used to

detect red traffic lights.

Adjusting the traffic light detection

If necessary, the system also uses the Driver

Attention Camera and the information that has

been saved in the navigation system.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

Detected red traffic lights are displayed in the

instrument cluster and, depending on the set-

ting, can be taken into account either manually

or automatically during the journey.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Route and junction assistant"

7. "Stop at traffic lights"

8. Select the desired setting.

Safety information

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

261

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

▷

When traffic lights are hidden, for example,

by other vehicles.

Activating/deactivating drive off

reminder

With activated drive off reminder, there will be

visual and acoustic information as soon as

driving can continue at a green traffic light.

At a road junction with multiple lanes where

there are several sets of traffic lights.

For further information:

System limits of the sensors, see page 41.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Route and junction assistant"

7. "Drive off reminder"

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon

Meaning

Red traffic light detected.

As soon as a green tick is displayed

after adoption, the vehicle brakes to a

standstill.

Green traffic light detected.

Grey traffic light: the system is inter-

rupted.

If the grey traffic light is displayed

with a red cross, it cannot be offered

for acceptance.

The detected traffic light can be ap-

plied with the SET button.

A green tick is displayed once it has

been adopted.

System limits

The traffic light detection system may have re-

stricted functionality in situations such as the

following:

262

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

Parking

▷

Park Assist, see page 280.

Vehicle equipment

Manoeuvre Assistant, see page 285.

Remote Control Parking, see page 288.

Reversing Assistant, see page 290.

Trailer Assistant, see page 350.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Safety information

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Park assistance systems

General

The parking assistance systems include differ-

ent individual systems. The individual systems

provide support with assistance functions, sen-

sors and different camera views when parking,

manoeuvring or driving in reverse.

For further information:

▷

Reversing Assist Camera, see page 268.

Overview

Semi-automatic camera perspective, see

page 269.

Button in the vehicle

▷

Automatic camera perspective, see

page 269.

▷

Flank view, see page 270.

3D view, see page 270.

Trailer tow hitch view, see page 271.

Conveyor car wash view, see page 271.

Panorama View, see page 272.

Automatic activation of the panorama view,

see page 272.

Park Assist button

▷

Door opening angle, see page 273.

Remote 3D View, see page 274.

Park Distance Control, see page 275.

Active Park Distance Control, see page 278.

Drive off monitoring, see page 279.

Sensors

The parking assistance systems are controlled

by the following sensors:

263

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

Depending on the view, the vehicle surround-

ings or a partial area are displayed.

▷

Side ultrasonic sensors.

Side radar sensors, front.

Side radar sensors, rear.

Front camera.

Depending on the national-market version, ei-

ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-

era perspective is displayed.

Turning the display on/off

Exterior mirror cameras.

Reversing Assist Camera.

General

When driving forwards, the parking assistance

systems display turns off automatically when a

certain distance or speed is exceeded.

For further information:

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

Operating concept

With the reverse gear

The camera-based individual systems are op-

erated with the toolbars on the control display.

Choose a camera view by selecting the appro-

priate icon.

The display is automatically turned on if se-

lector lever position R is engaged while drive-

ready state is turned on.

Some parking assistance systems can be con-

figured individually in the Parking menu.

Via Parking Assistant button

Press the key.

Go to Park menu

1.

Apps menu

Via iDrive

2. "Vehicle apps"

1.

Apps menu

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Parking"

6. Select the desired settings.

Display in the instrument cluster

The instrument cluster shows displays of some

parking assistance systems, for example Park

Distance Control or Park Assist.

Display

Principle

The parking assistance systems support park-

ing and manoeuvring or reversing by display-

ing Park Distance Control and via various cam-

era views.

General

Depending on vehicle equipment, one or more

cameras record the area from different select-

able perspectives.

264

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

Parking view

1

Status of parking assistance systems

Assisted View

2

3

1

Toolbar, left

Selection menu

2

3

4

5

6

7

Camera image

Selection window

Display on the control display

Automatic camera perspective

Semi-automatic camera perspective

Flank view

General

The display on the control display will vary de-

pending on the equipment and the activated

parking assistance system.

Toolbar, right

Toolbar, left

Assistance view

Depending on the equipment, different views

and settings can be selected via the left tool-

bar.

▷

"Parking view"

Depending on the equipment, camera im-

ages or the view of the Park Distance Con-

trol are displayed.

▷

"Assist view"

A stylised display of the vehicle top view is

displayed.

1

Toolbar, left

▷

"Panorama view"

The display for crossing traffic is displayed.

"More"

2

3

4

Camera image

Selection window

Toolbar, right

▷

"3D view"

A three-dimensional view is shown.

"Trailer coupling view"

▷

The zoom for the trailer tow hitch can be

turned on.

▷

"Car wash view"

265

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

The display of your own lane can be

turned on for easier driving into the car

wash.

Icon

Meaning

The icon indicates the following

meanings:

▷

"Settings"

No search for parking assistance

system services.

Settings can be entered in the Park

menu.

No other parking assistance sys-

tems available.

Toolbar, right

The parking assistance functions are displayed

in the right toolbar:

Parking assistance systems have

failed.

▷

Status of the parking assistance systems.

Search for parking assistance sys-

tem services is active.

Available parking methods of the Park As-

sist.

White: an available manoeuvre is

selected but will not be performed.

Functional requirements have not

been met or the transfer of func-

tions has been completed.

▷

Functions of the Reversing Assistant.

Functions of the Manoeuvre Assistant.

Trailer Assistant functions.

Additional information in case of malfunc-

tions.

Green: parking assistance system is

active. The functions are adopted

depending on the activated system.

Status of the parking assistance

systems

The status of the following parking assistance

systems is displayed:

Manoeuvre Assistant records the

manoeuvre to be stored.

Additional displays

▷

Park Assist.

Manoeuvre Assistant.

Reversing Assistant.

Trailer Assistant.

General

Additional views, for example parking assis-

tance lines, can be shown on the camera im-

age on the parking assistance system display

to facilitate parking and manoeuvring.

The icons are shown on the control display in

the right toolbar and in the instrument cluster

in the status area. In addition to the icon, a

message is displayed on the control display.

A number of additional displays can be active

simultaneously.

Switching additional displays on/off

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

6. Select the desired setting.

266

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

Using parking assistance lines

Parking assistance lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning

circle line is within the boundaries of the

parking space.

Driving lane lines

2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green

driving lane line covers the corresponding

turning circle line.

Obstacle marking

The driving lane lines help in estimating the

space requirement when parking and manoeu-

vring on a level road surface.

Depending on the gear engaged, the driving

lane lines are displayed in front of or behind

the vehicle.

The driving lane lines are continuously adap-

ted to the steering wheel movements depend-

ing on the steering wheel angle.

Obstacles are detected by the sensors.

Obstacles detected by Park Distance Control

are marked on the camera image.

Coloured gradations of the obstacle markings

in green, yellow and red indicate the distances.

Turning circle lines

Functional limitations

The system can only be used to a restricted

extent in the following situations:

▷

With a door open.

With open luggage compartment.

With the exterior mirrors folded in.

Areas with grey hatching with an icon in the

camera image identify areas that are currently

not shown, for example an open door.

Turning circle lines can only be superimposed

on the camera image together with lanes.

The lines show the course of the smallest pos-

sible turning circle on a level road.

Once the steering wheel has been turned be-

yond a certain angle, only one turning circle

line is displayed.

267

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

System limits

Reversing Assist Camera

Safety information

Principle

The Reversing Assist Camera assists in re-

verse parking and manoeuvring. It does this

by showing an image of the area behind the

vehicle on the control display.

WARNING

Due to system limitations, the system may

not respond at all, or may respond too late,

incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Observe the in-

formation on the system limits and intervene

actively if necessary.

Additional displays can be shown in the dis-

play, for example parking assistance lines and

obstacle marking.

General

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

System limits of the sensors

For further information:

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 41.

Operating requirements

▷

The luggage compartment is fully closed.

Field of view

Due to the angle of view, the area under the

vehicle cannot be seen by the cameras.

▷

The camera area is clean and unobstruc-

ted.

Turning the Reversing Assist

Camera on/off

Detection of objects

The system cannot detect very low obstacles

and higher, protruding objects such as ledges.

Switching the camera view on

automatically

The Reversing Assist Camera is automatically

turned on if selector lever position R is en-

gaged while drive-ready state is turned on.

The objects shown in the control display may

be closer than they appear. Do not estimate

the distance to the objects on the control dis-

play.

Projecting loads, rear luggage racks, or trailers

can restrict the detection range of the camera.

Switching the camera view off

automatically

When driving forwards, the Reversing Assist

Camera turns off automatically when a certain

distance or speed is exceeded, if necessary.

Malfunction

Failure of one camera is shown on the control

display.

The detection range of the failed camera is

displayed hatched on the control display.

Switching the camera view on/off

manually

1.

Press the button.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

268

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

Depending on the equipment: the icon

in the selection window is automatically se-

lected.

Automatic camera

perspective

To exit the camera view of the Reversing

Assist Camera, select another camera view

in the selection window or press the button

again.

Principle

The automatic camera perspective displays

a steering angle-dependent view looking to-

wards the vehicle's direction of travel.

Deactivated Reversing Assist

Camera

This perspective adapts to the current driving

situation.

When the Reversing Assist Camera is deacti-

vated, for example when the luggage compart-

ment is open, the camera image is displayed

hatched in grey.

General

As soon as obstacles are detected, the view

switches to a fixed display of the area in front

of or behind the bumper or, if necessary, to the

Lateral Parking Aid page.

Semi-automatic camera

perspective

When the reverse gear is engaged, the auto-

matic camera perspective is, if necessary, exi-

ted and the system uses a semi-automatic

camera perspective to the rear. If required,

select the automatic camera perspective with

reverse gear engaged. The automatic camera

perspective is retained for the current parking

manoeuvre.

Principle

Depending on the parking direction and en-

gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera

perspective is displayed with the areas in front

of or behind the vehicle.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

General

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Switching the automatic camera

perspective on/off

Switching semi-automatic camera

perspective on/off

Switching the camera view on/off

automatically

When the display of the parking assistance

systems is switched on, the automatic camera

perspective is automatically selected.

1.

Press the button.

icon in the selection window.

2. Select the

The icon in the selection window is auto-

matically selected.

To exit the fixed camera view, select an-

other camera view in the selection window.

To exit the steering-dependent camera view,

select a different camera view in the selection

window.

269

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

The system does not detect whether an ob-

stacle subsequently moves. Consequently, the

markings will no longer be shown on the dis-

play after the vehicle has been stationary for a

while. The area next to the vehicle needs to be

scanned again.

Switching the camera view on/off

manually

1.

Press the button.

2.

The icon in the selection window is auto-

matically selected.

To exit the steering-dependent camera

view, select another camera view in the se-

lection window or press the button again.

Flank view

Principle

Lateral Parking Aid

The flank view displays the area at the side

of the vehicle to assist with positioning the ve-

hicle at the kerb or alongside any other obsta-

cles.

Principle

The Lateral Parking Aid is automatically dis-

played when the automatic camera perspec-

tive is switched on. This feature shows obsta-

cles located near the vehicle.

Flank view looks from the rear to the front. If

there is a hazard, it automatically focuses on

possible obstacles.

General

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Display

Switching the flank view on/off

Flank view can be selected for the right or left

side of vehicle in the selection window.

1.

2. Select the

side in the selection window.

Press the button.

icon for the desired vehicle

To exit the flank view, select another cam-

era view in the selection window.

Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides

of the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.

3D view

▷

No markings: no obstacles detected.

Coloured markings: warning that obstacles

have been detected.

Principle

When the 3D view is selected, a circle is dis-

played on the control display.

System limits

The system only shows stationary obstacles

that were previously detected by the sensors

when driving past.

Specified perspectives can be selected on the

circle.

270

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

General

Display

The current perspective is identified by a cam-

era icon.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Turning the 3D view on/off

1.

Press the button.

2. "More"

Two static circular segments help to estimate

the distance of the trailer to the trailer tow

hitch.

3. "3D view"

To exit the 3D view, select another camera

A docking line dependent on the steering

wheel angle assists with lining up the trailer

tow hitch with the trailer.

view in the left toolbar.

Trailer tow hitch view

Conveyor car wash view

Principle

To assist with connecting up a trailer, it is pos-

sible to zoom in on the area around the trailer

tow hitch.

Principle

The conveyor car wash view assists when en-

tering a car wash.

General

When zooming in, remember that the view

might no longer show certain obstacles.

General

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Switching the conveyor car wash

view on/off

Switching the trailer tow hitch view

on/off

1.

Press the button.

1.

Press the button.

2. "More"

3. "Car wash view"

3. "Trailer coupling view"

To exit the car wash view, select another

camera view in the left toolbar.

To exit the trailer tow hitch view, select an-

other camera view in the left toolbar.

271

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

Display

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following cam-

eras:

▷

Reversing Assist Camera.

Depending on the equipment: front camera.

Switching the panorama view on/off

1.

Press the button.

Your own lane is displayed for easier driving

into a car wash.

2. "Panorama view"

To exit the panorama view, select another

camera view in the left toolbar.

The display can be used to position the vehicle

correctly in the guide rails of the car wash.

Display

The vehicle must be able to roll freely while in

the car wash.

For further information:

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, see

page 142.

Panorama View

Principle

Yellow lines on the screen mask identify the

bumpers of your own vehicle.

The panoramic view gives you an earlier view

of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and

road junctions.

Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-

tion, the camera view of the Reversing Assist

Camera or front camera will be displayed.

General

Road users hidden by obstacles at the side

may not be seen from the driver's seat until

very late. The front camera and the Reversing

Assist Camera capture the area around the

side of the vehicle to improve the view.

Automatic activation of the

panorama view

The camera image is subject to varying levels

of distortion in some areas and is thus not suit-

able for estimating distances.

Principle

Positions at which the panoramic view should

switch on automatically can be saved as acti-

vation points.

Depending on the equipment, the function can

be used when driving forwards or reversing.

General

Up to ten activation points can be saved.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

272

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

The activation points can be used when driving

forwards.

Editing activation points

Any or all of the activation points can be re-

named or deleted.

Follow the information in the Panorama view

chapter.

1.

Press the button.

Operating requirements

2. "Panorama view"

▷

A GPS signal must be received.

3. "Manage points"

▷

A BMW ID or a driver profile must be acti-

vated.

A list of all saved activation points is shown.

4. Select the desired setting.

▷

The direction of travel, selector lever posi-

tion and vehicle angle must correspond to a

saved activation point.

Door opening angle

Saving activation points

1. Drive the vehicle to the position where the

system should switch on and stop.

Principle

Depending on the equipment, the door open-

ing angle indicator is displayed automatically

when stationary.

2.

Press the button.

The display helps to estimate how far the

doors can be opened in a parking situation.

3. "Panorama view"

4. "Activation point"

If obstacle marking is activated, the parking

view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the

opening angles of the doors.

The current position is shown.

5. "Save activation point"

Activation points are saved with the following

information, for example:

General

▷

Location.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Location and street.

GPS coordinates.

Display

The automatically created location and street

information can be renamed.

Using activation points

Use of activation points can be switched on

and off.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

The maximum door opening angles are dis-

played when the selector lever is in position P.

6. "GPS-based"

273

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

Data protection, see page 72.

System limits

The system does not issue warnings about ap-

proaching road users.

▷

The My BMW App must be installed on the

mobile device.

ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with

an existing ConnectedDrive account must

be activated.

For technical reasons, the display of the vehi-

cle surroundings is distorted.

Even if the door opening angle indicator on

the control display does not superimpose any

other objects, it is necessary to park carefully

next to other objects.

BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 73.

Activating/deactivating Remote 3D

View

The function can be activated or deactivated

individually or together with other functions.

The perspective means that protruding objects

located higher up may be closer than they ap-

pear on the control display.

1.

Apps menu

Remote 3D View

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Data privacy"

Principle

The My BMW App and the camera views in the

parking view, for example automatic camera

perspective, enable the display of the vehicle

surroundings on a mobile end device.

5. Select the desired setting.

After the activation, Remote 3D View can

be accessed in the My BMW App.

The function shows a view of the current situa-

tion.

Functional limitations

The system may have restricted functionality

or may not be available at all in situations such

as the following:

General

For reasons related to data protection, the

function can only be run three times in two

hours.

▷

With a door or the luggage compartment

open. Areas that the system is not able to

record are shown dark on the display.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

▷

If the exterior mirrors have been folded in

manually.

When other camera functions are being run

in the vehicle.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following cam-

eras:

The vehicle moves faster than at walking

speed.

▷

Front camera.

In case of missing or weak Internet connec-

tion.

Exterior mirror cameras.

Reversing Assist Camera.

Operating requirements

▷

Data transfer must be activated.

274

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

age. Avoid approaching an object at speed.

Avoid driving off at speed while Park Dis-

tance Control is not yet activated.

Park Distance Control

Principle

Park Distance Control assists with parking. Ob-

stacles in front of or behind the vehicle are

signalled by acoustic and visual warnings.

Sensors

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-

sonic sensors can also be reported.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

General

▷

Side ultrasonic sensors.

The range of the system is approximately 2 m,

6 ft, depending on the obstacle and environ-

mental factors.

Turning Park Distance Control

on/off

An acoustic warning is given when the vehicle

is approx. 70 cm, 27 in away from an object

and a collision is imminent.

Switching on the system automatically

The system switches on automatically in the

following situations:

For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic

warning is given sooner, at a distance of ap-

prox. 1.50 m, 5 ft.

▷

With drive-ready state switched on, when

selector lever position R is engaged.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

▷

When approaching detected obstacles, if

the speed is less than approximately

4 km/h, approx. 2.5 mph The distance from

the obstacle at which the system activates

depends on the individual situation.

Safety information

The automatic activation in the event of detec-

ted obstacles can be activated or deactivated.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

6. "Automatic PDC activation"

Turning off the system automatically

When driving forwards, the system turns off

automatically when a certain distance or speed

is exceeded, if necessary.

WARNING

Approaching at high speed when Park Dis-

tance Control is activated may result in late

warnings due to the physical conditions.

There is a danger of injury or material dam-

275

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

Switching the system on/off manually

Adjusting the volume

The volume of the acoustic warning can be

adjusted.

Press the key.

▷

On: the LED is illuminated.

Off: the LED is extinguished.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

If the system is manually switched on when

reverse gear is engaged, the image of the Re-

versing Assist Camera is displayed.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

Depending on the national-market version, the

system cannot be turned off manually when

the reverse gear is engaged.

6. "PDC signal volume"

7. Set the desired value.

Acoustic warning

Switching off the acoustic warning

Depending on the national-market version, the

acoustic warning can be switched off after the

start of the parking manoeuvre.

General

An intermittent tone indicates that the vehicle

is approaching an object. For example, if an

object is detected to the rear left of the vehicle,

the sound is emitted from the rear left loud-

speaker.

Press the

icon in the status field at the top

of the control display.

No audible warning is emitted during active

parking.

The shorter the distance to an object, the

shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.

When the Park Distance Control is switched

on again, the acoustic warning is automatically

switched on again.

A continuous tone sounds if the distance to

a detected object is less than approximately

20 cm, 8 in.

Visual warning

An alternating continuous tone sounds from

the front and rear loudspeakers if there are

objects in front and behind the vehicle at the

same time and at a distance of less than ap-

proximately 20 cm, 8 in.

General

When you are approaching an object, its prox-

imity is displayed on the control display and in

the instrument cluster as soon as the system is

activated.

The intermittent tones and the continuous tone

are turned off when selector lever position P is

engaged.

Objects that are farther away are already dis-

played before a signal sounds.

Depending on the national-market version, the

interval tones are switched off after a short

time with the vehicle at a standstill.

Depending on the view, driving lane lines,

turning circle lines and obstacle markings are

shown for a better estimation of the space re-

quired.

If an object approaches when the vehicle is

stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.

Depending on the equipment, the detection

range of the sensors is represented by hatched

ring-shaped areas. Markings in green, yellow

and red indicate when obstacles are detected

in the detection range.

276

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

If equipped with the Crossing-traffic Warning:

depending on the equipment, the display also

warns of vehicles approaching from the sides

at the front and rear.

System limits

General

The function to protect the vehicle sides only

shows stationary obstacles that were previ-

ously detected by the sensors when driving

past.

Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides

of the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.

Display

The system does not detect whether an ob-

stacle subsequently moves. The grey hatched

areas on the sides are hidden after a certain

period of time when the vehicle is at a stand-

still. The area on the side of the vehicle must

be newly captured.

Depending on the equipment, warnings may

be displayed in front of, next to and behind the

vehicle.

Also observe the limits of the system in the

chapter “Parking assistance systems”.

Trailer operation

With a trailer or when the trailer socket is occu-

pied, the rear functions of Park Distance Con-

trol are switched off.

Display behind the vehicle.

Depending on the equipment, the detection

range of the sensors is shown dark on the con-

trol display.

Obstacles next to the vehicle are not displayed.

Depending on the national-market version, the

rear functions of Park Distance Control remain

switched on when the trailer operation is acti-

vated.

An icon is displayed on the control dis-

play.

Display next to the vehicle.

For further information:

▷

Hatched area: detection range of the sen-

sors.

Towing a trailer, see page 348.

Grey hatched area: no obstacles were de-

tected in the detection range.

False alarms

If the system is approaching its limits, false

alarms may occur.

Coloured markings in the hatched area:

obstacles were detected in the detection

range.

To reduce false alarms, for example in con-

veyor car washes, switch off automatic activa-

tion of Park Distance Control when obstacles

are detected if necessary.

▷

Hatched area interrupted: the area next to

the vehicle has not yet been recorded.

277

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

Malfunction

Safety information

An icon is displayed on the control dis-

play.

WARNING

Depending on the equipment, the de-

tection range of the sensors is not displayed

on the control display.

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

A Check Control message is shown.

Park Distance Control failure. Have the system

checked by an authorised Service Partner or

another qualified Service Partner or a specialist

workshop.

Active Park Distance Control

WARNING

Principle

When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-

sistance system cannot react correctly if its

sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Do not use

the assistance system in trailer operation or

when using the trailer tow hitch, for example

with a bicycle carrier.

The Park Distance Control brake function ini-

tiates emergency braking if there is an immi-

nent risk of collision.

General

Due to the system limits, a collision cannot be

prevented under all circumstances.

The function is available at speeds below

walking speed when reversing or rolling back.

Sensors

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

Pressing the accelerator pedal suppresses the

brake intervention. Emergency braking is not

performed.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.

Side ultrasonic sensors.

After emergency braking to a stop, it is possi-

ble to continue a slow approach to the obsta-

cle. To approach, lightly depress the accelera-

tor pedal and release it again.

Temporarily deactivating Active

Park Distance Control

If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer,

the vehicle pulls away. Manual braking is pos-

sible at any time.

After emergency braking, the function can be

temporarily deactivated on the control display.

1. "Obstacle detected. Emergency braking."

2. "Deactivate temporarily"

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

If the journey is continued in these environ-

mental conditions, no further emergency

braking is performed.

The function is automatically reactivated when

the Park Distance Control is switched on again.

278

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

Settings

General

It is possible to set which areas of the vehicle

are protected by the system.

When obstacles are detected in close range in

front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-

duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual

braking.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-

cle, the system will brake.

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

6. "Active PDC emergency braking"

7. Select the desired setting.

Safety information

Display

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

As soon as the system intervenes, an

icon is displayed with a corresponding

message.

System limits

General

Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter

“Park assistance systems”.

Functional limitations

The system cannot be used in situations such

as the following:

WARNING

When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-

sistance system cannot react correctly if its

sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Do not use

the assistance system in trailer operation or

when using the trailer tow hitch, for example

with a bicycle carrier.

▷

The emergency braking function is deacti-

vated while Hill Descent Control is regulat-

ing the speed.

Hill Descent Control, see page 229.

When driving with a trailer.

▷

If applicable, switch off the system temporarily,

if needed.

Sensors

The system is controlled using the following

sensors:

Drive off monitoring

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

Principle

If there is a collision risk, start-up monitoring

reduces the drive power when driving off.

▷

Side ultrasonic sensors.

279

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

Operating requirements

System limits

▷

Selector lever position D or R is engaged

when the vehicle is stationary.

General

Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter

“Park assistance systems”.

Obstacles at close range are detected in

front of or behind the vehicle.

The accelerator pedal is applied forcefully,

almost as far as it will go.

Trailer operation

The system is deactivated when the trailer

socket is occupied or when the trailer operation

is activated, for example when operating with

a trailer or bicycle carrier.

The accelerator pedal is applied as soon as

the selector lever position is engaged and

the obstacle is detected.

Turning start-up monitoring on/off

1.

Apps menu

Park Assist

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

Principle

Park Assist provides support when parallel and

bay parking.

The system also makes it easier to leave par-

allel and bay parking spaces.

6. "Drive off monitoring"

7. "Drive off monitoring"

The ultrasonic sensors measure the surround-

ings on both sides of the vehicle when driv-

ing slowly straight forward. Suitable parking

spaces are calculated based on detected ob-

jects, for example, parked vehicles. The status

of the system is displayed.

A Check Control message is shown where ap-

plicable.

Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically turned on again at the

next drive.

The system calculates the optimum parking

line for driving in or out of parking spaces and

takes control of the vehicle during the parking

manoeuvre.

Cancelling reduced drive power

The reduction of the drive power is cancelled in

the following situations:

▷

The accelerator pedal is released.

If the accelerator pedal is pressed twice.

A certain distance is travelled.

The operating principle and operation of the

system is divided into the following steps:

▷

Parking space search.

Switch on.

If the reduction in drive power is cancelled by

covering a certain distance, the drive power is

released gradually.

Parking.

Leaving parking space.

The parking manoeuvre during parking is per-

formed automatically.

Display

As soon as the system intervenes, an

icon is displayed with a corresponding

message.

When leaving bay parking spaces, the vehicle

is manoeuvred completely out of the parking

space to enable continued driving in the de-

sired direction.

280

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

The Park Assist Professional increases the

comfort and range of uses of the Park As-

sist. In addition to the parking methods of the

Park Assist, parking in parking spaces that are

marked with lines is possible.

the assistance system in trailer operation or

when using the trailer tow hitch, for example

with a bicycle carrier.

With Park Assist Professional, the parking ma-

noeuvre can be carried out with the Remote

Control Parking function from a smartphone.

WARNING

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto

kerbs. There is a danger of injury or material

damage. Observe the traffic situation and in-

tervene actively if the situation warrants it

Vehicle equipment

This system may not be available in the vehi-

cle in question, for example due to the selected

optional equipment, the national-market ver-

sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling

and software updates. This also applies to the

individual functions of the system.

Parking methods

Park Assist supports the following functions:

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

General

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the

road.

Safety information

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Bay parking: reverse or forward parking per-

pendicular to the road.

WARNING

When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-

sistance system cannot react correctly if its

sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Do not use

281

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

▷

Front camera.

Exterior mirror camera.

Reversing Assist Camera.

Operating requirements

Measurement of parking spaces

▷

Driving forwards in a straight line up to a

maximum speed of approximately 35 km/h,

22 mph.

Leaving parallel parking spaces.

▷

Maximum distance from the row of parked

vehicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft.

Suitable parking space

Parallel parking:

▷

Minimum length of a detected object, for

example, a parking vehicle: approx. 1 m, ap-

prox. 3 ft.

Minimum length of gap between two ob-

jects: own vehicle length plus approxi-

mately 0.8 m, 2.6 ft.

Leaving bay parking spaces.

Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft.

Bay parking:

▷

Minimum length of a detected object, for

example, a parking vehicle: approx. 1 m, ap-

prox. 3 ft.

▷

Minimum width of gap: own vehicle width

plus approximately 0.7 m, 2.3 ft.

Minimum depth: own vehicle length.

Park Assist Professional: parking in parking

spaces with parking lines.

The depth of bay parking spaces must be

estimated by the driver. Due to technical

limits, the system is only able to gauge the

depth of bay parking spaces approximately.

Sensors

The Park Assist is controlled by the following

sensors:

Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:

The parking space must be clearly marked

with lines.

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

▷

Side ultrasonic sensors.

Parking manoeuvre

The Park Assist Professional is additionally

controlled by the following cameras:

▷

Doors and luggage compartment are

closed.

▷

Driver's seat belt is fastened.

282

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

Leaving parking space

▷

The vehicle was parked using the Park As-

sist and an object is detected in the area

around the vehicle.

6. "Show assistance info"

▷

The vehicle was parked manually in reverse

and objects in the immediate vicinity of the

vehicle are detected. The distance to a de-

tected kerb is at least 15 cm, approx. 6 in.

Switching the acoustic signal on/off

The acoustic signal for suitable parking spaces

can be turned on and off.

1.

Apps menu

▷

The parking space is at least 0.8 m, 2.6 ft

longer than the vehicle.

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

Displays

General

6. "Sound when available"

The current status of the parking assistance

systems is shown in the right-hand toolbar, in

the instrument cluster and, depending on the

equipment, in the Head-up display.

Parking with Park Assist

1. For the parking space search, drive past

parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx.

35 km/h, approx. 22 mph and a maximum

distance of 1.5 m, approx. 5 ft.

Different icons are shown on the control dis-

play for selecting the parking method.

The sequence of the displayed icons corre-

sponds to the prioritised parking option.

Parking space search is activated.

The direction of the arrow changes in the park-

ing method icons when leaving parallel parking

spaces.

2. Press the

gear.

key or engage reverse

The display of the parking assistance sys-

tems is shown.

Icon

Meaning

Reverse parallel parking, right.

Reverse parallel parking, left.

Reverse bay parking.

Forward bay parking.

The status of the parking space search and

possible parking spaces are displayed on

the control display and in the instrument

cluster.

3. On the control display: select an offered

parking method. If applicable, another park-

ing method can also be selected after-

wards.

Turning the parking manoeuvre

display on/off

When Park Assist is active, the parking ma-

noeuvre is displayed in the camera image on

the control display.

In the instrument cluster: select suggested

parking method with the knurled wheel on

the steering wheel.

Green: the system takes control of the

parking manoeuvre.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play or in the instrument cluster.

3. "Driving settings"

283

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

The speed can be reduced with the brake.

Other interventions will cancel the system.

Cancelling Park Assist manually

Park Assist can be cancelled manually at any

time, for example:

Depending on the national-market version,

an intermittent tone or a continuous tone of

the Park Distance Control will sound.

▷

Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice

in succession.

When parking manoeuvre is complete, se-

lector lever position P is engaged.

▷

Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and

move the steering wheel slightly at the

same time.

The end of the parking manoeuvre is indi-

cated on the control display and in the in-

strument cluster.

▷

Step on the brake pedal and operate the

selector lever at the same time.

5. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec-

essary.

The Park Assist is cancelled without engaging

selector lever position P. Driving can continue

immediately.

Leaving parking space with Park

Assist

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

Cancelling Park Assist automatically

The system automatically cancels in situations

such as the following:

▷

If the driver grips the steering wheel or

steers the vehicle.

2.

With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the button or engage reverse gear.

▷

When operating the accelerator pedal or

the selector lever.

The display of the parking assistance sys-

tems is shown.

▷

If the parking brake is applied.

When the driver's seat belt is unfastened.

With open luggage compartment.

With open bonnet.

3. On the control display: select the desired

parking method.

In the instrument cluster: select suggested

parking method with the knurled wheel on

the steering wheel.

When the doors are open.

4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-

play or in the instrument cluster.

During activation or intervention by driver

assistance systems.

Green: the system takes control of the

parking manoeuvre.

▷

If you switch to other functions on the con-

trol display.

The speed can be reduced with the brake.

Other interventions will cancel the system.

When the display on the control display is

faded due to messages.

A message is displayed at the end of the

manoeuvre.

▷

On snow-covered or slippery road.

On steep uphill or downhill gradients.

5. Make sure that it is safe to leave a parking

space with the given traffic situation, and

drive off as usual.

If it encounters objects that are difficult to

negotiate, for example kerbs.

▷

If objects appear suddenly.

The Park Assist is turned off automatically.

284

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

▷

With insufficient distances, which are indi-

cated by the Park Distance Control.

▷

On uneven road surfaces, for example

gravel roads.

When a maximum number of parking

moves or the parking time is exceeded.

▷

On slippery surfaces.

On steep uphill or downhill gradients.

When the system is stopped automatically, se-

lector lever position P is engaged.

If leaves have collected or snow has drifted

or been piled up in the parking space.

A Check Control message is shown where ap-

plicable.

▷

If an already measured parking space

changes.

If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex-

ample at a quayside.

Continuing the parking manoeuvre

If parking or leaving a parking space has been

interrupted, the operation can be continued, if

needed.

In some cases, parking spaces may be de-

tected that are not suitable or suitable park-

ing spaces may not be detected.

Switch the Park Assist on again and follow the

instructions on the control display or in the in-

strument cluster.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is shown.

Park Assist has failed. Have the system

checked by an authorised Service Partner or

another qualified Service Partner or a specialist

workshop.

System limits

General

Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter

“Park assistance systems”.

Manoeuvre Assistant

No parking assistance

Park Assist does not provide assistance in the

following situations:

Principle

The Manoeuvre Assistant provides support for

recurring parking and manoeuvring situations.

▷

In tight bends.

In angled parking spaces.

In trailer operation.

Parking and manoeuvring operations can be

recorded and then carried out automatically by

the system.

Park Assist: for parking spaces that are

only marked with lines on the ground. The

system orients itself on objects.

Vehicle equipment

This system may not be available in the vehi-

cle in question, for example due to the selected

optional equipment, the national-market ver-

sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling

and software updates. This also applies to the

individual functions of the system.

▷

For special parking spaces, for example

paid parking spaces with automatic locking

mechanisms, coin parking, or mechanical

parking systems.

Functional limitations

For further information:

The system may have restricted functionality

in situations such as the following:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

285

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

General

WARNING

A recurring manoeuvre is driven manually and

thereby recorded.

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto

kerbs. There is a danger of injury or material

damage. Observe the traffic situation and in-

tervene actively if the situation warrants it

When the vehicle reaches the activation range

on the distance covered by the stored ma-

noeuvre, the manoeuvre can be activated on

the control display or in the instrument cluster.

After the activation, the system takes control

of the vehicle and carries out the manoeuvre

automatically.

Detection range

The manoeuvre can be performed with the Re-

mote Control Parking function using a smart-

phone.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

Safety information

The detection range for a manoeuvre is divi-

ded into the following areas:

WARNING

▷

Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will

begin with the localisation in the back-

ground within a range of approx. 8 m/26 ft

around the path of a stored manoeuvre.

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Close range, arrow 2: in a range of

approx. 2 m, approx. 6 ft around the path,

the stored manoeuvre will be displayed on

the control display.

Activation range, arrow 3: the stored

manoeuvre can be activated on the control

display within a range of approx. 1 m, ap-

prox. 3.5 ft. After the activation, the system

takes control of the vehicle and carries out

the manoeuvre automatically.

WARNING

When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-

sistance system cannot react correctly if its

sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Do not use

the assistance system in trailer operation or

when using the trailer tow hitch, for example

with a bicycle carrier.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sen-

sors and cameras:

▷

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-

ers.

▷

Side ultrasonic sensors.

Front camera.

286

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

▷

Exterior mirror cameras.

Reversing Assist Camera.

5. With a stationary vehicle: "Save recording"

6. "Name:"

If necessary, enter the desired name for the

recorded manoeuvre.

Recording manoeuvre

7. "Save recording"

General

Do not move the vehicle until the recording

has been stored.

Up to ten manoeuvres can be recorded at dif-

ferent locations.

Up to four overlapping manoeuvres can be re-

corded.

Performing stored manoeuvre

1. Drive the vehicle into the activation range

and stop. The control display and instru-

ment cluster indicate that a stored ma-

noeuvre can be activated.

Identical manoeuvres under different environ-

mental factors can be recorded, for example

light conditions.

For each manoeuvre, a maximum distance

covered of 200 m/656 ft is possible.

2.

: activate stored manoeuvre.

Green: after the activation, the system

takes control of the vehicle and carries out

the manoeuvre automatically. If applicable,

follow the instructions on the control dis-

play or in the instrument cluster.

In total, a distance covered of approx.

600 m/approx. 1969 ft distributed to the ten

possible manoeuvres can be recorded.

Manoeuvres with a distance covered of less

than 6 m/20 ft cannot be recorded.

The speed can be reduced with the brake.

Other interventions will cancel the system.

Recording manoeuvre

1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from

which a manoeuvre must be recorded and

stop.

When parking manoeuvre is complete, se-

lector lever position P is engaged.

Cancelling the Manoeuvre Assistant

manually

The vehicle can be controlled manually during

an active manoeuvre by taking the following

actions:

2.

Press the button.

The display of the parking assistance sys-

tems is shown.

▷

Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice

in succession.

3.

"Record new path"

4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-

tion.

▷

Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and

move the steering wheel slightly at the

same time.

The manoeuvre is recorded.

When recording the distance covered, do

not drive faster than approx. 15 km/h, ap-

prox. 9 mph.

▷

Step on the brake pedal and operate the

selector lever at the same time.

The Manoeuvre Assistant is cancelled without

engaging selector lever position P. Driving can

continue immediately.

While recording, the distance covered will

be displayed.

When the maximum distance covered or

the speed is reached, a message will be

displayed and an acoustic signal will sound.

287

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver assistance"

5. "Parking"

Cancelling the Manoeuvre Assistant

automatically

The system automatically cancels in situations

such as the following:

6. "Recorded paths"

7. Select the desired setting.

▷

If the driver grips the steering wheel or

steers the vehicle.

▷

When operating the accelerator pedal or

the selector lever.

System limits

General

▷

When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.

With open luggage compartment.

With open bonnet.

Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter

“Park assistance systems”.

When the doors are open.

Functional limitations

The system does not provide support in trailer

operation.

During activation or intervention by driver

assistance systems.

▷

When the system limits of the ultrasonic

sensors and cameras are reached.

System limits can cause functional limitations,

for example, in the following situations:

If you switch to other functions on the con-

trol display.

▷

With poor GPS reception.

On steep uphill or downhill gradients.

When the display on the control display is

faded due to messages.

In case of recorded manoeuvres where the

system minimum distance to objects can-

not be maintained.

▷

In case of obstacles.

On snow-covered or slippery road.

When the lane is too narrow.

On steep uphill or downhill gradients.

In trailer operation.

▷

Greatly deviating conditions when storing

and driving the distance covered, for exam-

ple other tyres or changed environmental

factors like light conditions or weather.

▷

Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-

noeuvres when driving into the activation

range.

In the event of an automatic cancellation of

the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a

complete stop and selector lever position P is

engaged.

In multi-storey car parks, for recordings on

different parking levels or for recordings

that run over several parking levels.

An interrupted manoeuvre can be continued,

if needed. Turn the Manoeuvre Assistant on

again and follow the instructions on the control

display or in the instrument cluster.

Remote Control Parking

Editing stored manoeuvres

Individual or all manoeuvres can be deleted or

renamed.

Principle

With the Remote Control Parking function, the

vehicle can be driven by remote control in

parking and manoeuvring situations of the Ma-

noeuvre Assistant and Park Assist Professio-

nal.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

288

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

The manoeuvre is performed independently

outside the vehicle using a smartphone. This

makes it easy to get in and out.

▷

The My BMW App must be connected to a

ConnectedDrive account.

Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-

phone.

In suitable parking spaces, for example, a ga-

rage, the parking position can be corrected

with Remote Control Parking through slight

manoeuvring.

The distance between the vehicle and

smartphone is no greater than approx. 6 m,

approx. 19 ft.

A manoeuvre that has already begun can be

continued at any time with Remote Control

Parking.

▷

A valid digital key must be set up in the

vehicle.

For further information:

BMW Digital Key, see page 93.

Vehicle equipment

This system may not be available in the vehi-

cle in question, for example due to the selected

optional equipment, the national-market ver-

sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling

and software updates. This also applies to the

individual functions of the system.

Performing a parking manoeuvre

with Remote Control Parking

1. Engage selector lever in position P.

2. Exit the vehicle and close the doors and

luggage compartment.

For further information:

3. Open Remote Control Parking in the

My BMW App and manoeuvre forwards or

backwards or select the desired parking

method.

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

General

4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.

Observe the contents in the chapter Park As-

sist and Manoeuvre Assistant.

In the event of obstacles, stop the vehicle

manually.

Protect the smartphone against unauthorised

use.

Depending on the selection in the

My BMW App, the vehicle is parked at the

end of the parking procedure or control of

the vehicle can be assumed again.

The low-beam headlights are switched on for

the duration of the manoeuvre.

A parking procedure offered by Park Assist

Professional is only available for Remote Con-

trol Parking for a short time after exiting the

vehicle.

System limits

Environmental factors, for example, an im-

paired Bluetooth connection due to external in-

terference, can cause interruptions in the exe-

cution of the Remote Control Parking function.

Operating requirements

▷

All occupants have exited the vehicle.

If the power supply of the vehicle battery is not

sufficiently ensured, for example due to exces-

sive discharge, remote controlled parking may

not be available. Follow the instructions in the

My BMW app.

▷

Doors and luggage compartment are

closed.

▷

The smartphone is compatible with Re-

mote Control Parking.

The My BMW App must be installed on a

compatible smartphone.

289

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

any time, and actively intervene if the situa-

tion warrants it.

Reversing Assistant

Principle

The Reversing Assistant assists when driving

in reverse, for example when driving out of

tight or confusing parking or street situations.

WARNING

When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-

sistance system cannot react correctly if its

sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of

accident or material damage. Do not use

the assistance system in trailer operation or

when using the trailer tow hitch, for example

with a bicycle carrier.

Vehicle equipment

This system may not be available in the vehi-

cle in question, for example due to the selected

optional equipment, the national-market ver-

sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling

and software updates. This also applies to the

individual functions of the system.

WARNING

For further information:

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto

kerbs. There is a danger of injury or material

damage. Observe the traffic situation and in-

tervene actively if the situation warrants it

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

General

The vehicle saves the driving movements for

the last distance covered. This stored distance

can be driven back with automated steering.

Operating requirements

▷

To save the distance covered, drive for-

wards without interruption.

The system takes control of the steering. The

speed must be controlled by the driver using

the accelerator pedal and the brake.

▷

To store the distance covered, do not drive

faster than 35 km/h/22 mph.

Reversing Assistant: a maximum of 50 m, ap-

prox. 164 ft is stored.

▷

No trailer operation.

Reversing Assistant Professional: a maximum

of 200 m, approx. 656 ft is stored.

Reversing Assistant Professional: suffi-

ciently bright light conditions on the stored

distance covered.

Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

assistance systems”.

▷

Reversing Assistant Professional: the cam-

eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.

Safety information

Reversing with automated steering

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your per-

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-

tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot

respond independently and appropriately in

all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-

dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be

ready to take over steering and braking at

2.

3.

With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the button or engage reverse gear.

The display of the parking assistance sys-

tems is shown.

"Start Reversing Assistant"

290

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Parking

CONTROLS

The length of the distance covered is dis-

played on the control display and in the in-

strument cluster.

▷

During activation or intervention by driver

assistance systems.

After an extended period of time when the

vehicle is stationary.

If applicable, follow the instructions on the

control display or in the instrument cluster.

When exiting the stored lane when revers-

ing, for example with a maximum steering

wheel angle.

4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and

carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-

tor pedal and the brake.

▷

When the display on the control display is

faded due to messages.

Green: the system takes control of the

steering.

▷

In case of a slippery surface.

When driving in reverse, observe the vehicle

surroundings.

When the vehicle is rolling, for example on a

slope.

In case of obstacles, stop immediately and

take over control of the vehicle. Pay atten-

tion to the information on Park Distance

Control.

▷

In case of changed environmental factors.

When the trailer socket is occupied or trailer

operation is activated.

▷

At speeds over approximately 10 km/h,

6 mph.

5. Shortly before the end of the stored dis-

tance covered, an acoustic signal will sound

and a message is displayed.

Reversing Assistant Professional: in the

event of functional limitations of the sen-

sors from approx. 50 m, approx. 164 ft.

Stop when you reach normal road traffic

at the latest and take over control of the

vehicle, for example by engaging a forward

gear.

System limits

▷

The maximum speed when driving in re-

verse is limited to approx. 10 km/h, approx.

6 mph.

Cancelling the Reversing Assistant

manually

The assisted reversing by the Reversing Assis-

tant can be cancelled manually:

A warning occurs at a speed of approx.

7 km/h, approx. 4 mph.

If the maximum speed is exceeded, the

function is interrupted.

▷

"Cancel"

Press the key.

Various factors can cause the vehicle to devi-

ate sideways when reversing along the saved

distance covered. These factors include, for

example:

Cancelling the Reversing Assistant

automatically

The system automatically cancels in situations

such as the following:

▷

If the steering wheel is moved with the ve-

hicle stationary while the distance covered

is being saved.

▷

The speed is not adapted to the distance

covered in question.

▷

If the driver grips the steering wheel or

steers the vehicle.

Certain road characteristics, for example

gradients, inclines or slippery road surface.

▷

When shifting from reverse gear to another

selector lever position.

Greatly deviating conditions when storing

and driving the distance covered, for exam-

291

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Parking

CONTROLS

ple, different tyres or changed environmen-

tal factors like the weather.

▷

Reversing Assistant Professional: when

light conditions change.

Also observe the limits of the system in the

chapter “Parking assistance systems”.

292

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Vehicle equipment

Adaptive M suspension

Professional

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

The Adaptive M suspension Professional is an

actively controlled suspension and includes the

following systems:

▷

Adaptive M suspension, see page 293.

Active Roll Stabilisation, see page 293.

Integral Active Steering, see page 230.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Adaptive M suspension

Active Roll Stabilisation

Principle

The adaptive M suspension is an intelligent,

controllable sport suspension.

Principle

Active roll stabilisation reduces body lean that

occurs when cornering at high speed or taking

sudden avoidance manoeuvres.

The suspension reduces body movements

with a sporty driving style or on an uneven

road.

General

The side incline of the vehicle is compensated

by continual adjustments on the front and rear

axle. Thus, the vehicle is constantly stabilised.

General

The intelligent control of the suspension in-

creases the driving dynamics and driving com-

fort depending on the road condition and driv-

ing style.

Agility and driving comfort are increased in all

driving conditions.

Depending on the equipment, the rear-axle

locking differential can be adapted to the re-

spective traction conditions as necessary.

Setting

The system offers various settings, from com-

fortable travel to sporty driving.

Setting

The settings are assigned to the different drive

modes of Driving Experience Control.

The system offers various shock absorber set-

tings, from comfortable travel to sporty driving.

For further information:

The shock absorbers are adjusted depending

on the selected drive mode as well as the road

condition and driving style.

Driving Experience Control, see page 146.

For further information:

Driving Experience Control, see page 146.

293

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Lowest vehicle level, for driving at higher

speeds.

Adaptive suspension

▷

Normal level:

Principle

Standard level, for normal roads and nor-

mal speeds.

The adaptive suspension is an intelligent con-

trollable suspension.

High level 1:

The suspension reduces body movements

with a sporty driving style or on an uneven

road.

Raised vehicle level, for easy terrain at a

reduced speed.

At higher speeds, the vehicle is lowered if

necessary.

General

▷

High level 2:

The intelligent control of the suspension in-

creases the driving dynamics and driving com-

fort depending on the road condition and driv-

ing style.

Highest vehicle level, for very bumpy terrain

in the lowest speed range.

At higher speeds, the vehicle is lowered if

necessary.

For further information:

Two-axle ride level control

Driving Experience Control, see page 146.

Principle

Safety information

The two-axle ride level control uses air springs

to ensure the best possible driving comfort.

The vehicle is maintained at the set vehicle

level regardless of the load.

WARNING

Parts of the body may become trapped or

vehicle components damaged when adjust-

ing the vehicle level. There is a danger of in-

jury or material damage. When adjusting the

vehicle level, make sure that the movement

ranges around the vehicle and the wheel

arches are kept clear.

General

The drive modes of the Driving Experience

Control can be used to adjust the shock ab-

sorber settings from comfortable to sporty.

Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle

level can be set to different levels:

▷

Entry level:

Overview

Lowest vehicle level that can be set.

Rocker switch in the vehicle

It is possible to set the entry level at a

standstill with the following options:

▷

With the rocker switch in the centre con-

sole.

▷

With the button in the lower tailgate.

With the My BMW app.

When you drive off, the vehicle is raised ac-

cording to the selected drive mode.

▷

Sport level:

294

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Rocker switch for self-levelling

suspension.

Setting the vehicle level manually

Button on the lower tailgate

Press the rocker switch forwards:

The vehicle is raised to the next-higher vehicle

level.

Pull the rocker switch backwards:

The vehicle is lowered by one level.

Button for self-levelling suspension.

LED display on the rocker switch

▷

LED illuminated: display of the current vehi-

cle level.

Operating requirements

All doors are closed.

LED flashes: adjustment procedure active.

The vehicle is raised or lowered.

Opening a door while raising or lowering the

vehicle interrupts the process. Once the door

has been closed, the process continues.

LED flashes rapidly: the selected vehicle

level is not currently possible.

▷

LED off: the system is deactivated.

Activating/deactivating self-levelling

suspension

The system can be deactivated, e.g. for a

wheel change or for towing.

All LEDs on the rocker switch flash: the sys-

tem is initialising. The selected vehicle level

is shown after initialisation, if applicable.

Setting the vehicle level

automatically

Push the rocker switch forwards or pull it back-

wards and hold for approx. 7 seconds.

When the rocker switch is released, the LED

indicates the system status.

While driving

The vehicle will lower automatically in the

following situations:

▷

LED lights up: self-levelling suspension is

activated.

▷

When switching to SPORT driving mode.

At higher speeds.

▷

LED goes out: self-levelling suspension is

deactivated.

If the vehicle leaves the set vehicle level due to

the speed, the vehicle level is set according to

the selected drive mode.

After moving off at speeds above approx.

10 km/h, approx. 6 mph, self-levelling suspen-

sion is automatically activated.

295

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

In the event of a flat tyre

Setting the vehicle level

If a loss of tyre inflation pressure is detected

on one wheel, the wheel load is automatically

reduced to increase the possible distance trav-

elled. In this situation, only the normal level is

available.

For safety reasons, lowering is only possible

from the normal level or the sport level.

1. Apply the parking brake and switch off

drive-ready state with the Start/Stop but-

ton.

2. Close the doors.

Adjusting the vehicle level with the

button in the lower tailgate

3. In the My BMW app, switch to the menu for

the entry level and follow the instructions in

the app.

Principle

For further information:

When the tailgate is open, the button on the

tailgate can be used to lower the vehicle to the

entry level and raise it again for easier loading

and unloading.

Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain-

ment, Communication, see page 6.

Cancelling the adjustment procedure

An adjustment process that was started in the

My BMW app can be cancelled with the app.

Setting the vehicle level

Press the button on the lower tailgate.

The vehicle is lowered to the entry

level. Press the button again to raise.

Extended stationary periods

The vehicle may lower itself during extended

stationary periods. This is not a malfunction.

The change of level is indicated by the flashing

of the LED in the button.

If drive-ready state is switched on with the

doors closed, the vehicle is automatically

raised to the normal level.

During the raising process, the vehicle is raised

from the entry level to the last level selected or

to the normal level.

It may take several minutes to raise to normal

level, depending on the vehicle condition.

Cancelling the adjustment procedure

Press the button again. The vehicle is raised or

lowered back to the desired level.

System limits

▷

A change of vehicle level may not be possi-

ble during sporty driving.

Lowering the vehicle level with the

My BMW App

It may not be possible to change the vehicle

level when the axles are articulated.

It may only be possible to raise the vehicle

level in the drive-ready state.

Principle

With the My BMW App and a compatible Apple

iPhone, the vehicle level can be set when sta-

tionary, for example, for easier loading or more

convenient entry.

If the vehicle battery charge level is too low,

it may not be possible to change to another

vehicle level.

▷

If the vehicle level is changed several times

in quick succession, the system switches

itself off in order to protect against over-

heating, and the system is either tempo-

296

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

rarily unavailable, or system operation is

delayed. Allow the system to cool down if

necessary.

Overview

▷

If the payload is increased, the highest driv-

ing level may be disabled or automatically

exited to protect the system.

If the trailer socket is occupied, only the

normal level is available.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is shown.

1

xOffroad: button

xOffroad: rocker switch

In case of a malfunction, the vehicle will have

changed handling characteristics or a noticea-

bly restricted driving comfort.

2

Activating xOFFROAD driving mode

Have the system checked by an authorised

Service Partner or another qualified Service

Partner or a specialist workshop.

Press the key.

or

xOffroad package

Push the rocker switch forwards or pull it back.

The following functions are carried out:

Principle

The xOffroad package supports the driver

when driving in off-road conditions or in the

event of reduced traction.

▷

The LED in the button illuminates.

The following xOFFROAD driving mode is

set: "xGRAVEL".

For further information:

xOFFROAD driving modes in detail, see

page 298.

General

The system offers a choice of four different

xOFFROAD driving modes. When an xOFF-

ROAD driving mode is switched on, individual

systems in the vehicle are adjusted for the best

possible traction and driving stability.

Setting the xOFFROAD driving

mode

xOFFROAD driving modes can be selected ac-

cording to the ground conditions.

The vehicle level is adjusted for the respective

xOFFROAD driving mode with two-axle ride

level control.

Observe the information in the driving hints

chapter on driving on poor road surfaces.

For further information:

Press the rocker switch forwards or pull it

backwards until the desired xOFFROAD driv-

ing mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Driving on poor road surfaces, see page 338.

297

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Deactivating xOFFROAD driving

mode

xOFFROAD

driving mode

Settings

Press the key.

"xGRAVEL"

Setting for easy terrain.

The LED in the button is no longer illu-

minated.

The high level 1 of the two-

axle ride level control is set.

The last drive mode set via Driving Experience

Control is activated.

"xSAND"

Setting for difficult terrain

with loose ground.

The high level 1 of the two-

axle ride level control is set.

If a drive mode is selected via Driving Dynam-

ics Control, the xOffroad driving mode is auto-

matically deactivated.

For maximum traction, deac-

tivate Dynamic Stability Con-

trol.

xOFFROAD driving modes in detail

In order to avoid automatic

activation of Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control by the front-colli-

sion warning, deactivate the

front-collision warning if nec-

essary.

When xOFFROAD driving modes are switched

on, the following vehicle settings are made:

▷

The Automatic Start/Stop function is

switched off.

The shift characteristics and the response

to the accelerator pedal are adapted.

"xROCKS"

Setting for difficult terrain

with severe unevenness on

the ground.

The all-wheel drive system is set for opti-

mum traction.

The response characteristics of the Anti-

lock Braking System are adapted.

The high level 2 of the two-

axle ride level control is set.

The response characteristics of the Dy-

namic Stability Control are adapted.

For maximum traction, deac-

tivate Dynamic Stability Con-

trol.

Depending on the selected xOFFROAD driving

mode, additional vehicle settings are made.

In order to avoid automatic

activation of Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control by the front-colli-

sion warning, deactivate the

front-collision warning if nec-

essary.

"xSNOW"

Setting for slippery roads.

The shift characteristics of

the transmissions are set to

smooth gear changes. The

vehicle may move off in sec-

ond gear.

The characteristics of the

accelerator pedal are opti-

mised for smooth drivability.

298

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

For further information:

▷

Two-axle ride level control, see page 294.

Front-collision warning, see page 192.

xOFFROAD display

Activating an xOFFROAD driving mode auto-

matically opens the xOFFROAD display in Live

Vehicle menu.

The following information is displayed:

▷

Distribution of drive torques to wheels.

Longitudinal inclination: specified in per-

cent.

▷

Transverse inclination: specified in degrees.

Graphic of the wheel angle.

With navigation system: elevation at current

position.

▷

Self-levelling suspension of the two-axle

ride level control.

For further information:

Live Vehicle, see page 157.

System limits

At higher speeds, the properties of the selec-

ted xOFFROAD driving mode may be reduced.

BMW IconicSounds

Depending on the equipment and national-

market version, the drive sound of the vehicle

can be adjusted with BMW IconicSounds.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Drivetrain and chassis"

5. "IconicSounds"

6. Select the desired setting.

299

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Air conditioning

Icon

Function

Vehicle equipment

Amount of air.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Air distribution.

For further information:

SYNC programme.

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Seat and armrest heating.

Active seat ventilation.

Steering wheel heating.

Air conditioning control

Overview

Functions in the air conditioning menu

Icon

Function

Automatic programme.

Buttons, integrated automatic

heating/air conditioning system

Temperature.

Air conditioning function.

Maximum cooling.

Air recirculation function.

Icon

Function

Defrost function.

Automatic air recirculation con-

trol.

Rear window heating.

Fresh air.

300

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Buttons, automatic rear air-

conditioning system

Display in the control display

1

Toolbar

Icon

Function

2

3

4

Air conditioning functions, driver's side

Air conditioning functions, passenger's side

Air conditioning bar

Automatic programme.

Temperature.

Go to air conditioning functions

Via air conditioning bar:

Air conditioning function.

Maximum cooling.

Amount of air.

"CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the air

conditioning bar.

Or:

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "Climate control"

Turning the air conditioning system

on/off

Air distribution.

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "All climate functions"

Seat and armrest heating.

The complete air conditioning system is

switched on/off with the last settings.

When the air conditioning system is turned

on, individual air conditioning functions can be

turned off.

301

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Turning automatic rear air-

conditioning system on/off

Automatic programme

Principle

Operating requirements

The automatic programme ensures a comfort-

able climate, which can be modified with the

set temperature and individual settings.

▷

Automatic air conditioning is turned on.

▷

Defrost function is deactivated.

The automatic programme cools, ventilates, or

heats the vehicle interior automatically.

Via iDrive

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

General

2. "Settings"

Depending on vehicle equipment, the auto-

matic programme provides the best possible

settings for air conditioning functions depend-

ing on the outside temperature, interior tem-

perature, sunlight, seat occupancy, and the de-

sired temperature setting:

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Rear climate control"

5. Select the desired setting.

The automatic rear air-conditioning system

can be activated with the default setting for

temperature and AUTO programme:

▷

Amount of air.

"Activate with default settings"

Air distribution.

Temperature.

Switching on using the button

Press one of the following buttons:

Seat and armrest heating.

Active seat ventilation.

Steering wheel heating.

▷

Temperature.

Maximum cooling.

Automatic programme.

The automatic programme takes the seat oc-

cupancy into account to ensure energy-effi-

cient control adapting to the vehicle passen-

gers.

Upper side of the button for amount of air,

manual.

▷

Air distribution, manual.

At the same time, a condensation sensor con-

trols the automatic programme in such a way

that condensation is avoided as far as possi-

ble.

Switching off using the button

Press and hold the lower side of the

button.

Switching the automatic

programme on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

Locking the automatic rear air-

conditioning system

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Automatic programme"

3. Select the desired setting.

2. "Settings"

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Lock rear climate control"

302

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Functional example

When the automatic programme is turned on,

the intensity of seat heating can be adjusted:

Switching the automatic rear air-

conditioning system programme

on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the

air conditioning bar.

Via iDrive

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2.

Seat heating.

2. "Settings"

3. Select the desired settings, for example,

"HIGH".

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Automatic programme"

5. Select the desired setting.

The individually selected settings of the air

conditioning functions are stored and automat-

ically set up again, for example, after the vehi-

cle is started again.

Using the button

Press the key.

Display

The button LED lights up when the au-

tomatic programme is switched on.

The indicator in the climate control bar informs

of the temperature differential between config-

ured desired temperature and current interior

temperature:

Setting the intensity

▷

The red or blue bar next to the temperature

display indicates the progress of heating up

or cooling.

General

When the automatic programme is enabled,

the intensity of individual air conditioning func-

tions can be individually adjusted, for example:

▷

The desired interior temperature is reached

as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.

Active air conditioning functions, for example,

seat heating are displayed as icons in the cli-

mate control bar.

▷

"LOW"

"MEDIUM"

"HIGH"

Active air conditioning functions are highligh-

ted in colour in the climate control menu.

Each level has a specific control range of the

intensity.

Based on the stored data models, the intensi-

ties are dynamically adjusted during the jour-

ney. It is not necessary to manually change the

desired intensity to lower or higher levels while

driving.

Temperature

Principle

The automatic air conditioning cools or heats

to the set temperature and then keeps the

temperature constant.

General

Avoid switching between different temperature

settings in rapid succession. The automatic air

conditioning may not have sufficient time to

adjust to the set temperature.

303

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Adjusting the temperature

Upper body temperature

General

The air temperature in the upper body area

can be adjusted.

The set interior temperature for driver and

front passenger is not changed by this.

Adjusting the upper body temperature

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

The desired temperature can be set individu-

ally in the menu bar for the driver and front

passenger.

2. "Settings"

3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"

4. "Temp. adjustment upper body"

5. Increase or decrease the temperature.

▷

Increase the temperature.

Reduce the temperature.

Air conditioning function

Setting the temperature adjustment

When the automatic programme is switched

on, the speed of the heating and cooling proc-

ess can be adjusted as follows:

Principle

The air in the interior is cooled and dried and

then heated again depending on the tempera-

ture setting.

▷

"BALANCED".

The setting enables a smooth, low-noise

adjustment of the interior temperature.

Operating requirements

▷

"DYNAMIC".

Standby state or drive-ready state is switched

on.

The setting enables a quick adjustment of

the interior temperature with a high amount

of air.

Switching the cooling function on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

Setting the automatic rear air-

conditioning system temperature

2. "A/C"

Depending on the weather conditions, the

windscreen and the side windows may mist

over for a short time after switching on drive-

ready state.

Via iDrive

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

Cooling produces condensation, which then

exits underneath the vehicle.

3. "Second row of seats"

4. Set the desired temperature.

Using the button

Press the upper or lower side of the

button to set the desired temperature.

304

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

When the air recirculation function is turned off,

outside air is directed into the interior.

Maximum cooling

In the automatic recirculated-air control, out-

side air is drawn in or the interior air is circula-

ted, depending on the outside air quality.

Principle

The function enables quick and intense cooling

of the interior.

The interior filter cleans the incoming outside

air or the circulated inside air in air recirculation

mode.

General

The system is set to the lowest temperature

and maximum amount of air.

Turning the air recirculation function

on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

The function is automatically activated in the

rear when the SYNC programme is turned on.

2. The current operating mode is displayed in

the toolbar. Select the desired setting in the

toolbar:

Operating requirements

The function is available at an outside temper-

ature above approximately 0 ℃, 32 ℉ and

when drive-ready state is switched on.

▷

"Air recirculation"

"Fresh air"

"Auto air recirculation"

Turning maximum cooling on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

Depending on the equipment, the air recircu-

lation function will turn off automatically after

some time depending on the environmental

factors to prevent condensation.

2. "MAX A/C"

The air flows from the air vents for the upper

body area. Open the vents.

Automatic rear air-conditioning system:

Press the key.

Amount of air

The LED in the button is illuminated

when maximum cooling is switched on.

General

The blower-generated air flow can be adjusted

individually as needed.

Air recirculation function

Adjusting the amount of air

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

Principle

2.

Amount of air.

If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant

odour or contains pollutants, the supply of out-

side air into the interior of the vehicle can be

shut off. The interior air is then recirculated.

3. Select the desired setting.

The amount of air may be reduced in order to

save the vehicle battery power.

General

If there is condensation, switch off the air recir-

culation function.

305

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Adjusting the amount of air of

the automatic rear air-conditioning

system

SYNC programme

Principle

If the SYNC programme is activated, settings

on the driver's side are transferred to the pas-

senger's side and to the rear.

Via iDrive

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

General

3. "Second row of seats"

4. "Fan"

The following settings can be transferred:

▷

Temperature.

5. Select the desired setting.

Amount of air.

Using the button

Air distribution.

Automatic programme.

Press top or bottom side of button re-

peatedly: reduce or increase amount of

air.

Turning the SYNC programme

on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

The selected amount of air is shown on the

climate display.

2. "SYNC"

If the settings on the passenger side or in the

rear are changed, the programme is automati-

cally switched off.

Air distribution

General

In manual mode, the air distribution can be

adjusted as required.

Defrost function

Adjusting the air distribution

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

Principle

With the defrost function, ice and condensation

are quickly removed from the windscreen and

the front side windows.

2.

Air distribution.

3. Select the desired setting.

The selected air distribution is displayed.

General

The amount of air and air temperature are

automatically optimised for the removal of ice

and condensation.

Adjusting the air distribution,

automatic rear air-conditioning

system

The air distribution is directed towards the

windscreen and the front side windows.

Press the upper or lower side of the

button. Select the desired setting.

If there is condensation, turn on the automatic

programme to utilise the advantages of the

condensation sensor. Ensure that air can flow

towards the windscreen.

The selected air distribution setting is

shown on the climate display.

306

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

When the defrost function is switched on, the

automatic rear air-conditioning system is de-

activated to provide maximum power.

If a drive is resumed within about 15 minutes

after a temporary stop, the functions are auto-

matically switched on at the last temperature

setting.

Turning the defrost function on/off

Turning the seat heating on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the

air conditioning bar.

Press the key.

The LED in the button is illuminated

when the system is switched on.

2.

Seat heating.

3. Select the desired setting.

Rear window heating

If a drive mode for a consumption-optimised

driving style is selected, the heater output is

reduced.

Principle

With the rear window heating, ice and conden-

sation are quickly removed from the rear win-

dow.

Turning the armrest heating on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

Operating requirements

Standby state or drive-ready state is switched

on.

3. Select the desired seat.

4. "Heat armrests and seat"

Switching the seat heating for the

rear automatic climate control on

Turning the rear window heating

on/off

Press the button once for each temper-

ature stage.

Press the key.

The LED is illuminated when the rear

window heating is switched on.

The highest temperature if the three

LEDs are illuminated.

The rear window heating switches off auto-

matically after a while.

Switching off the seat heating for

the rear automatic climate control

Press and hold the button until the

LEDs are extinguished.

Seat and armrest heating

Principle

The system heats the seats and armrests if

required.

Active seat ventilation

Principle

General

The system cools the seat and backrest surfa-

ces if required and ensures a pleasant seating

climate.

Seat heating can also be used without armrest

heating. Deactivate the armrest heating if re-

quired.

307

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Switching the active seat ventilation

on/off

Ventilation at front

1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the

air conditioning bar.

2.

Seat ventilation.

3. Select the desired setting.

If a drive mode for a consumption-optimised

driving style is selected, the cooling power is

reduced.

Setting the air flow direction and amount of air

at the air vent.

Steering wheel heating

▷

Changing the air flow direction: press the

button in the desired air flow direction.

Principle

▷

Changing the amount of air:

The system heats the steering wheel if neces-

sary.

▷

Turn the button clockwise to increase

the amount of air.

▷

Turn the button anti-clockwise to de-

crease the amount of air.

Turning the steering wheel heating

on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the

air conditioning bar.

Ventilation in rear passenger

compartment

2.

Steering wheel heating.

3. Select the desired setting.

If a drive mode for a consumption-optimised

driving style is selected, the heater output is

reduced.

Ventilation

Principle

▷

Lever for changing the air flow direction,

arrows 1.

The ventilation system provides individual

ranges of adjustment for direct or indirect ven-

tilation to optimise the movement of air inside

the vehicle.

Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and

closing the air vents, arrows 2.

Knurled wheel for varying the temperature,

arrow 3.

General

Towards blue: cooler.

Towards red: warmer.

Open the air vents and position them in a way

that ensures effective climate control.

The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-

ing on the set temperature.

308

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Turn backwards: distribute the air in the

storage compartment between the seats.

Ventilation in the rear, side

The heating is not operational without switch-

ing on the blower. After the heating is switched

off, the blower can be used to recirculate the

interior air, for example at high temperatures.

To do this, switch on the blower, arrow 1, and

turn the knurled wheel towards the rear, ar-

row 2.

▷

Lever for changing the air flow direction,

arrow 1.

Air quality

Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and

closing the air vents, arrow 2.

General

The air quality in the interior is improved by the

following components:

Adjusting the ventilation

Depending on the set ventilation, align the air

flow directly or indirectly toward the passen-

gers.

▷

Emissions-tested interior.

Interior filter.

Climate control system for regulating tem-

perature, amount of air and air recirculation

function.

Heating and ventilation, third-row

seating

The air in the area of the third-row seating can

be heated or recirculated. The air vents are in

the storage compartments between the seats

and in the foot area of the third-row seating.

▷

Pre-cooling.

Physical Air Treatment Technology.

Fragrancing.

Interior filter

The interior filter cleans the incoming outside

air or the circulated inside air in air recirculation

mode.

Depending on the equipment:

▷

Dust and pollen are filtered out from the

inflowing outside air.

▷

Nano-particle emissions are reduced.

Gaseous pollutants are filtered.

▷

Button for switching on the blower, arrow 1.

The LED is illuminated.

Microbial particles, viruses, and allergens

are filtered.

Knurled wheel for activating the heating

and distributing the air, arrow 2.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends having

the interior filter replaced when the vehicle is

serviced.

Turn forwards: activate the heating and

distribute the air in the foot area.

309

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Ioniser

Ambient Air Package

Principle

The ioniser cleans the interior air by removing

suspended particles and improves the air qual-

ity.

With the Ambient Air Package, the interior air is

cleaned and perfumed with selected fragran-

ces.

Switching the ioniser on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

General

It is possible to choose between two fra-

grances in the vehicle. Additional fragrances

are possible by exchanging the fragrance car-

tridges.

3. "Air quality"

4. "Ionisation"

The following criteria can influence fragrance

perception inside the vehicle interior:

Fragrancing

▷

Settings of the automatic air conditioning.

Temperature and air humidity.

Time of day and season.

General

Fragrancing is done at intervals to avoid famili-

arisation.

Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,

for example fatigue.

Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle enable

you to switch between fragrances.

BMW recommends using genuine BMW fra-

grance cartridges.

The fragrance cartridges are located in the

glove compartment.

Genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not

refillable, and must be replaced by new fra-

grance cartridges after they are used up.

To ensure a pleasant interior fragrance in the

vehicle at the start of the journey, fragrancing

can be started before you set off. The system

is automatically switched on with pre-cooling if

fragrancing was switched on at the end of the

last journey.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating requirements

Refilled BMW fragrance cartridges may emit

harmful substances, and cause malfunctions

and damage to the system. There is a dan-

ger of injury or material damage. Do not refill

fragrance cartridges; once they are used up,

replace them with new fragrance cartridges.

▷

The fragrance cartridges are adequately fil-

led.

The interior temperature is between +5 ℃,

41 ℉ and +40 ℃, 104 ℉.

Open the ventilation air vents to allow the

fragrance to enter the passenger compart-

ment.

Selecting the fragrance

The interior is perfumed with the selected fra-

grance.

310

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

It is possible to choose between two fragran-

ces.

The cartridge holder slides downwards.

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

3. "Air quality"

4. "Fragrance"

5. Select the desired fragrance.

Switching fragrancing on/off, setting

the intensity

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance

cartridge. Grip the top of the cover to slide it

off the fragrance cartridge.

2. "Settings"

3. "Air quality"

4. "Fragrance"

5. "Intensity"

6. Select the desired setting.

Display

Illustrations on the control display show the

current filling level of the fragrance cartridges.

4. Attach the removed cover to the rear side

of the fragrance cartridge.

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

3. "Air quality"

When an empty fragrance cartridge is dis-

played, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry-

ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient

for fragrancing.

A Check Control message is displayed once

when the fragrance cartridges have been used

up.

Inserting fragrance cartridges

The fragrance cartridges are located in the

glove compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

Glove compartment on the passenger's

side, see page 322.

2. Press the underside of the cartridge

bracket.

311

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

5. Position the fragrance cartridge so the chip

points away from the cartridge bracket.

The cartridge holder slides downwards.

3. Pull the required fragrance cartridge out of

the bracket.

6. Slide the fragrance cartridge into the car-

tridge holder at a slight angle without ap-

plying pressure. The fragrance cartridge

is correctly positioned when the cartridge

holder can be closed.

Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance

displayed on the control display.

Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra-

grance displayed on the control display.

7. Push the cartridge holder upwards until it

engages.

4. Pull the required fragrance cartridge out of

the bracket.

Make sure that no objects press against

the cartridge holder from underneath, oth-

erwise the function of the Ambient Air

Package could be impaired.

8. Close the glove compartment.

Removing fragrance cartridges

The fragrance cartridges are located in the

glove compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

Recycling

Glove compartment on the passenger's

side, see page 322.

Empty fragrance cartridges can be

handed over for recycling at an author-

ised Service Partner or another quali-

fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

2. Press the underside of the cartridge

bracket.

312

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Pre-cooling/pre-heating

WARNING

When the pre-heating is operating, high tem-

peratures can be generated under the body,

for example because of the exhaust system.

If flammable materials come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system, these mate-

rials may ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make

sure that no flammable materials, for exam-

ple leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil or other

flammable objects, can come into contact

with vehicle parts when the pre-heating is

operating. Switch off the pre-heating before

refuelling.

Principle

The system consists of the pre-cooling and

pre-heating functions. It allows the tempera-

ture of the interior to be adjusted before the

journey starts. The interior is ventilated or

heated depending on the set temperature and

ambient temperature. When doing so, the sys-

tem uses any available residual heat from the

engine or the vehicle's fuel for generating heat.

General

The system can be switched on and off directly

or for a preselected departure time.

Operating requirements

The switch-on time is calculated based on the

outside temperature. The system will switch

on in good time before the preselected depar-

ture time.

▷

The vehicle is in rest state or standby state.

▷

The vehicle battery must be sufficiently

charged.

The system switches off automatically after a

while. It continues to run for a short time after it

has been switched off.

When activated, the pre-cooling/pre-heat-

ing uses power from the vehicle battery. As

a result, the maximum operating time is re-

stricted to protect the vehicle battery. After

the engine is started or after driving a short

distance, the system will be available again.

If outside temperatures are below 0 ℃, 32 ℉,

water vapour condenses and exits underneath

the vehicle.

▷

For pre-heating: the fuel tank capacity is

sufficient.

Safety information

If the fuel tank capacity is low and the ve-

hicle is parked on a slant, the pre-heating

function may be restricted.

DANGER

A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-

tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to

enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain

pollutants which are colourless and odour-

less. In enclosed spaces, exhaust fumes can

also build up outside the vehicle. There is

a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe

clear and ensure sufficient ventilation. Do

not switch on the pre-heating in enclosed

spaces, for example closed garages.

▷

Time and date are set correctly.

The air vents of the ventilation are open.

Turning the pre-cooling/pre-heating

on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

3. "Pre-heating/cooling"

4. Select the desired setting.

313

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

Departure time

Display

Icon

Description

General

To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in

the vehicle at the start of the journey, it is pos-

sible to set different departure times.

Icon in the upper centre

console.

Icon illuminates: the pre-

heating is switched on.

▷

One-off departure time: the time can be set.

The system is activated once.

Icon flashes: the residual

heat of the engine is being

used.

▷

Departure time with day of the week: the

time and day of the week can be set.

The system is switched on before the set

departure time on the required days of the

week.

Icon in the upper centre

console.

Icon is illuminated: a de-

parture time is activated.

Preselection of departure time is done in two

stages:

Icon flashes: the pre-cool-

ing/pre-heating is switched

on.

▷

Set the departure times.

Activate the departure time.

At least 10 minutes should pass between

setting/activating the departure time and the

scheduled departure time, so the climate con-

trol has enough time to work.

Activating with the My BMW App

Depending on the equipment, the My BMW

App with remote function can be used to

switch on the pre-cooling/heating via a prese-

lected departure time or directly.

Setting the departure time

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

Pre-conditioning via Remote

Engine Start

3. "Pre-heating/cooling"

4. "Departure plan"

5. Select the required departure time.

6. Set the desired departure time.

7. Select the day of the week if necessary.

Principle

Pre-conditioning cools or warms the interior to

a comfortable temperature before the start of

a journey. The system does this by automati-

cally cooling, ventilating or heating depending

on the internal, external and set desired tem-

perature. Any snow and ice can be removed

more easily.

Activating the departure time

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

3. "Pre-heating/cooling"

4. "Departure plan"

The system starts the engine automatically for

this purpose and lets it run for a limited time.

5. Activate the required departure time.

314

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

gine to switch on automatically in order to con-

trol the interior climate.

Safety information

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

DANGER

A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-

tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to

pollute the area around the vehicle or enter it.

The exhaust fumes contain pollutants which

are colourless and odourless. In enclosed

spaces or spaces with inadequate ventilation,

the exhaust fumes can also build up outside

the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the

exhaust pipe clear and ensure sufficient ven-

tilation. Do not switch on the pre-conditioning

in enclosed or poorly ventilated spaces, for

example closed garages.

3. "Pre-conditioning"

4. "Remote Engine Start"

5. "Start engine for climate cont."

6. Confirm the disclaimer.

Turning on/turning off the pre-

conditioning

General

For safety reasons, the system switches off

automatically after 15 minutes at the latest.

The system can be switched on a maximum of

twice in succession.

WARNING

When the pre-conditioning is operating, high

temperatures can be generated under the

body, for example because of the exhaust

system. If flammable materials come into

contact with hot parts of the exhaust system,

these materials may ignite. There is a risk

of fire. Make sure that no flammable materi-

als, for example leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil

or other flammable objects, can come into

contact with vehicle parts when the pre-con-

ditioning is operating.

The system will be available again once the

drive-ready state has been activated and de-

activated again.

Switching on via iDrive

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

3. "Pre-conditioning"

4. "Start now"

Switching on/off using the vehicle key

Operating requirements

The system can be switched on and off using

the vehicle key.

▷

The vehicle is in rest state or standby state.

Battery must be sufficiently charged.

Fuel tank capacity is sufficient.

Bonnet is closed.

Press the vehicle key button three

times within 1 second.

After the vehicle key is pressed, it will

take around 3 seconds for the engine to switch

on.

Ensure that the date and time are set cor-

rectly in the vehicle.

To switch the system off, press the button

again three times.

▷

Ventilation air vents are open.

Enabling automatic engine start

The automatic engine start must be enabled

before using the system. This enables the en-

315

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Air conditioning

CONTROLS

4. "Departure plan"

Switching off using the Start/Stop

button

5. Set the departure time.

The system can be switched off directly by

pressing the Start/Stop button without de-

pressing the brake pedal.

6. Select the day of the week if necessary.

Activating the departure time

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

Air conditioning for departure time

2. "Settings"

3. "Pre-conditioning"

General

4. "Departure plan"

To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in

the vehicle at the start of the journey, it is pos-

sible to set scheduled departure times in the

system.

5. Activate the required departure time.

Display

▷

One-off departure time: the scheduled de-

parture time can be set.

In the instrument cluster:

The engine runs for the purpose

of operating the pre-condition-

ing. The vehicle is not ready to

drive.

The system is switched on as a one-off.

▷

Departure time with day of the week: the

scheduled departure time and day of the

week can be set.

Icon

Description

Preselection of departure time is done in two

stages:

Icon in the upper centre

console.

▷

Set the departure times.

Activate the departure time.

Icon is illuminated: a de-

parture time is activated.

The system is automatically activated a few

minutes before the set departure time. The

system remains switched on until just after the

set departure time.

Icon flashes: the pre-condi-

tioning is turned on.

For safety reasons, climate control for depar-

ture time is only possible once.

Vehicle acknowledgement signals

The system switch-on is acknowledged by two

flashes.

The system will be available again once the

drive-ready state has been activated and de-

activated again.

The side lights remain switched on while the

system is switched on.

Observe the information regarding the inten-

ded use of the vehicle.

For further information:

Your own safety, see page 9.

Setting the departure time

1. "CLIMATE MENU"

2. "Settings"

3. "Pre-conditioning"

316

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

General

Vehicle equipment

The total load of all sockets must not exceed

140 watts at 12 V.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable

connectors.

Safety information

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

WARNING

Devices and cables, for example portable

navigation devices, that are located in the de-

ployment range of the airbags may impede

airbag deployment or be thrown around the

vehicle interior when the airbag is deployed.

There is a danger of injury. Make sure that

devices and cables are not in the deployment

range of the airbags.

Sun visor

Glare protection

Fold the sun visor downwards or upwards.

Protection from glare at the side

Folding the sun visor out

1. Fold down the sun visor.

WARNING

Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-

tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the

vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V

electrical system. There is a danger of injury

or material damage. Only connect battery

chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting

aid terminals in the engine compartment.

2. Detach the sun visor from its holder and

pivot it sideways to the side window.

3. Move it back to the desired position.

Folding the sun visor in

To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse or-

der.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located behind a cover in the

sun visor.

WARNING

If metallic objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is a danger

of injury or material damage. After using the

socket, re-fit the cigarette lighter or socket

cover.

Sockets

Principle

The socket can be used for electronic devi-

ces when the standby or drive-ready state is

switched on.

317

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Front centre console

Inside the luggage compartment

Press the cover.

There is a socket on the right side of the lug-

gage compartment. Open the cover.

USB port

General

Please comply with the notes on connecting

mobile devices to the USB port in the chapter

on USB connections.

A socket is located between the cup holders, in

one of the marked positions. Pull off the cover.

For further information:

For information on USB connection, see Own-

er’s Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,

Communication.

Rear centre console

In the centre armrest

There is a socket in the centre console.

Pull off the cover.

There is a USB port in the centre armrest.

Properties:

▷

USB port type C.

For charging mobile devices.

Charge current: max. 3 A.

318

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

In the centre console

BMW Travel & Comfort

System

NOTICE

Objects in the storage compartment, for ex-

ample large USB connectors, can block or

damage the cover on opening and closing.

There is a risk of material damage. When

opening and closing, make sure that the

movement range of the cover is kept clear.

General

USB connections and mounts for mounting

optional accessories, e.g. universal holders for

tablets or clothes hangers are located on the

backrests of the front seats.

USB port properties:

▷

USB port type C.

For charging mobile devices.

Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per

seat.

Additional information is available from an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified

Service Partner or a specialist workshop.

Overview

Press the cover.

The sockets and the USB ports are located

behind the marked covers.

A USB port is located in the centre console, in

one of the marked positions.

Properties:

▷

USB port type A.

For charging mobile devices and transfer-

ring data.

▷

Charge current: maximum 1.5 A.

319

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

sure there are no objects in the tray together

with the device.

Installing optional accessories

1. Slide the cover all the way to the side.

Overview

Tray crosswise in the centre console:

2. Fit optional accessories, see installation in-

structions.

1

LED

Wireless charging tray

2

Dock surface

Principle

Tray on the left in the centre console:

The wireless charging tray allows wireless

charging of mobile phones and other mobile

devices certified according to the Qi standard.

General

When inserting the device to be charged, make

sure that there are no objects in the wireless

charging tray together with the device to be

charged.

The charging process is indicated by the

charge indicator on the control display.

1

LED

2

Dock surface

Safety information

Operating requirements

▷

The device to be charged must have been

certified according to the Qi standard.

WARNING

When charging a Qi-compatible device in the

wireless charging tray, any metal objects that

are in the tray together with the device can

become very hot. If storage media or elec-

tronic cards, for example, smart cards, cards

with magnetic strips or cards for transmitting

signals, are located in the tray together with

the device, their function may be impaired.

There is a danger of injury or material dam-

age. When charging mobile devices, make

▷

Standby state is switched on.

The maximum size for a mobile phone is

approximately 154.5 x 80 x 18 mm, 6.06 x

3.1 x 0.7 in.

320

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

▷

Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-

able for wireless charging.

Enabling/disabling the forgotten

warning

The mobile phone to be charged is located

in the middle of the dock. The display of the

mobile phone faces upwards.

1.

Apps menu

2. "Vehicle apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Wireless charging tray"

5. "Mobile phone reminder"

Inserting the mobile phone

1. Open the cover of the dock.

2. Place the mobile phone in the centre of the

dock with the display facing upwards.

System limits

The charging current may be reduced or

charging may be temporarily interrupted in the

wireless charging tray in the following situa-

tions:

3. Close the cover of the dock.

LED displays

▷

Due to excessive temperatures of the tray

and mobile phone.

Col-

our

Meaning

When there are objects between the mobile

phone and wireless charging tray.

Blue

The mobile phone is charging.

The blue LED stays illuminated once

the inserted Qi-compatible mobile

phone is fully charged.

If storage media or electronic cards, for

example, chip cards, cards with magnetic

strips or cards for signal transmission, are

located between the mobile phone and the

wireless charging tray.

Or-

ange

The mobile phone is not charging.

The mobile phone may be exposed

to excessively high temperature or

there may be foreign bodies in the

charging cradle.

▷

By protective sleeves and covers that ex-

ceed a thickness of 2 mm, 0.07 in.

By protective sleeves and covers made

of unsuitable material, e.g. with magnetic

parts.

Red

The mobile phone is not charging.

Contact an authorised Service Part-

ner or another qualified Service Part-

ner or a specialist workshop.

▷

By add-on parts on the mobile phone, e.g.

holders.

By settings on the mobile phone, for ex-

ample for charging. Follow the relevant in-

structions on the control display and in the

instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-

ble.

Forgotten phone warning

General

A warning can be issued if a mobile phone with

Qi certification has been left in the wireless

charging tray when exiting the vehicle.

The forgotten phone warning is shown in the

instrument cluster.

321

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Vehicle equipment

Glove compartment

Safety information

WARNING

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

The glove compartment protrudes into the

interior when it is open. Objects in the glove

compartment may be thrown into the interior

during the journey, for example in the event

of an accident or when braking or taking

avoidance manoeuvre. There is a danger of

injury. Immediately close the glove compart-

ment after using it.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Safety information

WARNING

Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-

ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can

be thrown around the interior while driving,

e.g. in the event of an accident, or when

braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.

There is a danger of injury. Secure devices

connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose

objects.

Opening the glove compartment

WARNING

Pull the handle.

Anti-slip mats can damage the instrument

panel. Attached objects can become de-

tached. There is a danger of injury or material

damage. Do not use anti-slip mats.

Locking the glove compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with

an integrated key. This prevents access to the

glove compartment.

After the glove compartment has been locked,

the vehicle key can be handed over without the

integrated key, for example, if the car is being

parked by a valet parking service.

For further information:

Integrated key, see page 79.

322

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Safety information

Fold-down compartment

Safety information

WARNING

Breakable objects, for example glass bottles

or glasses, may get broken in the event of an

accident or when braking or taking avoidance

manoeuvre. Splinters may scatter throughout

the interior. There is a danger of injury or ma-

terial damage. Do not use breakable objects

during a journey. Only stow breakable objects

in closed storage compartments.

The fold-down compartment protrudes into

the interior when open. Objects in the fold-

down compartment may be thrown into the

interior while driving, for example in the event

of an accident or when braking or performing

avoidance manoeuvres. There is a danger of

injury. Immediately close the fold-down com-

partment after use.

Storage compartments in

the centre console

Opening the fold-down

compartment

Opening the storage compartment

Press the button and open the cover.

Press the cover.

Storage compartments in

the doors

Closing the storage compartment

Pull back the cover by the the handle strip.

General

Front centre armrest

There are storage compartments in the doors.

General

There is a storage compartment in the centre

armrest between the seats.

323

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Opening the centre armrest

Press the key.

Press the button, arrow 1, and open up the

cover, arrow 2.

Close the centre armrest

Press both lids down until they engage.

Close the centre armrest

Press the cover down until it engages.

Centre armrest rear

Cup holder front

Safety information

WARNING

General

There is a storage compartment in the centre

armrest between the seats.

Folding down the centre armrest

Unsuitable containers placed in the cup hold-

ers may damage the cup holders or be flung

into the interior, for example in the event of

an accident or when braking or taking avoid-

ance manoeuvre. Spilt liquids can distract the

driver from the traffic situation and lead to

an accident. Hot beverages may damage the

cup holders or cause scalding. There is a

danger of injury or material damage. Do not

force objects into the cup holder. Use light-

weight, sealable and shatterproof containers.

Do not transport hot drinks.

Fold the centre armrest forwards.

324

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

Opening the cup holder

NOTICE

When the thermal cup holder is switched

on and the cover is closed, the thermal cup

holder may overheat. There is a risk of ma-

terial damage. Switch off the thermal cup

holder before closing the cover.

NOTICE

Press the cover.

Temperature-sensitive objects can be dam-

aged by the hot metal insert in the thermal

cup holder. There is a risk of material dam-

age. Only use suitable containers.

Switching on the thermal cup holder

Press the corresponding button once to

keep cold or hot.

▷

Blue LED illuminates: keep beverages cold.

Red LED illuminates: keep beverages hot.

There are two cup holders in the centre con-

sole.

Switching off the thermal cup holder

Closing the cup holder

Pull back the cover by the the handle strip.

Press the button repeatedly until the

LEDs extinguish.

Maintaining beverage temperature

Cup holder rear

Safety information

WARNING

General

Depending on the equipment, drinks can be

kept warm or cool.

Safety information

Unsuitable containers placed in the cup hold-

ers may damage the cup holders or be flung

into the interior, for example in the event of

an accident or when braking or taking avoid-

ance manoeuvre. Spilt liquids can distract the

driver from the traffic situation and lead to

an accident. Hot beverages may damage the

cup holders or cause scalding. There is a

danger of injury or material damage. Do not

WARNING

Contact with the hot metal insert in the ther-

mal cup holder may cause burns. There is

a danger of injury. Do not touch the metal in-

sert when the thermal cup holder is switched

on.

325

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

force objects into the cup holder. Use light-

weight, sealable and shatterproof containers.

Do not transport hot drinks.

Third-row seating

NOTICE

If the cup holder is open, the centre armrest

cannot be folded back. There is a risk of ma-

terial damage. Press back the covers before

folding up the centre armrest.

The cup holders are between the seats in the

third-row seating.

Second-row seating

General

Coat hooks

The cup holder can be adapted to fit three

sizes.

General

Opening the cup holder

1. Fold down the centre armrest.

The coat hooks are located in the grab handles

and on the body pillar in the rear.

2. Press the button and fold out the cup

holder fully.

Safety information

WARNING

Items of clothing on the coat hooks can im-

pair visibility when driving. There is a risk

of accident. Hang items of clothing from the

coat hooks in such a way that they do not

obstruct visibility when driving.

WARNING

Downsizing the cup holder

Incorrect use of the coat hooks can present

a danger, for example if objects are thrown

around as a result of braking or avoidance

manoeuvres. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. Only hang lightweight ob-

jects, for example items of clothing, on the

coat hooks.

To make it smaller, the cup holder can be fol-

ded in 2 steps.

Enlarging the cup holder

To enlarge a reduced cup holder again, first

fold it in completely. Then fold the cup holder

out again fully.

Closing the cup holder

Fold in the cup holder fully until it engages.

326

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

Luggage compartment

Vehicle equipment

WARNING

Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-

ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can

be thrown around the interior while driving,

e.g. in the event of an accident, or when

braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.

There is a danger of injury. Secure devices

connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose

objects.

This chapter describes equipment, systems

and functions which are offered or may be of-

fered in future on a model-specific basis, even

if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-

tion.

For further information:

Vehicle equipment, see page 8.

Loading

WARNING

Incorrectly stowed objects may slip or be

thrown into the interior, for example in the

event of an accident or when braking or tak-

ing avoidance manoeuvre. Vehicle occupants

could be struck and injured. There is a dan-

ger of injury. Stow and secure objects and the

load correctly.

Safety information

WARNING

A high total weight can make the tyres over-

heat, causing internal damage and a sudden

tyre pressure loss. Handling characteristics

may be adversely affected, for example re-

duced directional stability, longer stopping

distance and altered steering characteristics.

There is a risk of accident. Please comply

with the permitted load index of the tyre, and

do not exceed the permitted total weight.

NOTICE

Liquids in the luggage compartment may

cause damage. There is a risk of material

damage. Ensure that no liquids leak out into

the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Stowing and securing loads in the

vehicle

If the permitted total weight and the permit-

ted axle loads are exceeded, the operational

safety of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.

There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed

the permitted total weight and permitted axle

loads.

▷

Wrap protective material around any sharp

corners and edges on the load.

Do not stack loads above the upper edge of

the backrests.

Fully fold down the rear seat backrests if

stowing a large load.

Secure load-securing equipment to the

lashing eyes in the luggage compartment.

327

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

▷

Use the luggage compartment partition net

to protect the vehicle passengers depend-

ing on the equipment. Make sure that ob-

jects cannot penetrate the luggage com-

partment partition net.

The front lashing eyes are located under cov-

ers.

Automated slide & anti-slip

rails

Small and lightweight load: secure with ten-

sioning straps or retaining straps or with a

luggage compartment net.

Principle

▷

Large and heavy loads: secure with lashing

straps.

Heavy loads: stow as far forward as possi-

ble, low down and directly behind the rear

seat backrests.

▷

Very heavy loads: stow as far forward as

possible, low down and directly behind the

rear seat backrests. If there are no passen-

gers on the rear seat, insert both outer seat

belts into the respective opposite buckles.

The system prevents the load from sliding

around in the luggage compartment when the

anti-slip rails are up.

Lashing eyes in the luggage

compartment

General

Observe the information and notes about load-

ing.

Load-securing equipment, for example lashing

straps, tensioning straps, retaining straps or

luggage compartment nets, must be secured

to the lashing eyes.

The anti-slip rails come up automatically

whenever:

▷

Tailgate is closed.

Incline of the vehicle is more than approx.

13 %.

Overview

▷

Tailgate is open and a speed of

around 5 km/h, 3 mph is exceeded.

For further information:

Loading, see page 327.

Multifunction hook

General

The lashing eyes are located in the luggage

compartment.

There is a multifunction hook on the left and

right side in the luggage compartment.

328

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

Safety information

Opening the storage compartment

WARNING

Incorrect use of the multifunction hook may

present a danger, for example if objects are

flung around when performing braking and

avoidance manoeuvres. There is a danger of

injury or material damage. Only hang light-

weight objects from the multifunction hooks.

Only transport heavy luggage in the luggage

compartment if suitably secured.

Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover,

arrow 2.

Folding down the multifunction

hook

Luggage compartment floor

General

There are storage compartments underneath

the luggage compartment floor.

Opening the storage compartment

Press on the multifunction hook and turn it un-

til it engages.

Net

Smaller objects can be stowed in the net on

the left-hand or right-hand side.

Fold up the luggage compartment floor.

Side storage compartment,

left

Enlarging the luggage

compartment

General

Principle

There is a storage compartment on the left

side of the luggage compartment.

The luggage compartment can be enlarged by

folding down the rear seat backrests.

329

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

the seats and their backrests are correctly

General

engaged or locked. If possible and if neces-

sary, adjust the height of the head restraints

or remove them.

The rear seat backrest of the second row of

seats is split 40–20–40. The rear seat backr-

ests on each side and the centre section can

be folded down individually.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down

from the rear or from the luggage compart-

ment.

WARNING

When folding down the rear seat backrest,

vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts

can become trapped. There is a danger of in-

jury or material damage. When folding down,

make sure that the movement range of the

rear seat backrest, including the head re-

straint, is kept clear.

Depending on the equipment, the rear seat

backrests can be folded down manually or

electrically.

Safety information

WARNING

Folding down the rear seat backrest

manually

Risk of entrapment when folding down the

rear seat backrest. There is a danger of injury

or material damage. Before folding down,

make sure that the movement range of the

rear seat backrest and the head restraint is

clear.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-

cured load may be flung into the interior,

for example in the event of an accident or

when braking or taking avoidance manoeu-

vre. There is a danger of injury. Make sure

that the rear seat backrest is locked after it

has been folded back.

Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest

forwards.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

manually

Fold back the rear seat backrest into the seat

position and engage.

WARNING

The red mark behind the lever disappears

completely.

If the seat is not set properly or the child

seat has been installed incorrectly, the child

restraint system may have restricted or no

stability at all. There is a danger of injury

or danger to life. Make sure that the child

restraint system rests firmly against the seat

backrest. Wherever possible, adapt the back-

rest angle of all relevant seat backrests and

adjust the seats correctly. Make sure that

330

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

Folding down rear seat backrest

electrically

Folding down the centre section

From the rear

Fold down the centre armrest and pull on the

loop.

Pull the switch and fold the rear seat backrest

forwards.

Luggage compartment

cover

From the luggage compartment

Safety information

WARNING

Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-

ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can

be thrown around the interior while driving,

e.g. in the event of an accident, or when

braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.

There is a danger of injury. Secure devices

connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose

objects.

Pull switch in the luggage compartment.

▷

Top switch: the left and middle rear seat

backrest fold forwards.

▷

Bottom switch: the right rear seat backrest

folds forwards.

WARNING

If the luggage compartment cover springs

back quickly, it can trap parts of the body or

cause damage. There is a danger of injury or

material damage. Do not allow the luggage

compartment cover to spring back quickly.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

electrically

From the rear

Press the relevant switch. The rear seat back-

rest moves to an upright position.

From the luggage compartment

Pull the relevant switch. The rear seat backrest

moves to an upright position.

331

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

WARNING

If the luggage compartment cover is not in-

serted correctly, it may be thrown around the

interior during the journey, for example in the

event of an accident or when braking or tak-

ing avoidance manoeuvre. There is a danger

of injury or material damage. Make sure that

the luggage compartment cover is engaged

securely in the brackets.

Press the release key, arrow 1, and pull the

luggage compartment cover out towards the

rear, arrow 2.

Closing the luggage compartment

cover

Stowing the luggage compartment

cover

General

The luggage compartment cover can be

stowed in the storage compartment under the

luggage compartment floor.

To stow the luggage compartment cover and

the luggage compartment partition net to-

gether, the luggage compartment partition net

must be stowed in the rear position first.

Pull out the luggage compartment cover, ar-

row 1, and attach it to the brackets on both

sides, arrow 2.

Without a third-row seating

1. Open the side storage compartment on the

left.

Removing the luggage

compartment cover

2. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.

The cover can be removed for stowing bulky

items.

3. Turn the luggage compartment cover so its

handle faces the front.

4. Set down the left side of the luggage com-

partment cover and lower the right side.

332

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

Make sure that the luggage compartment

cover is positioned correctly in the right-

hand bracket.

sure that the cover audibly engages on both

sides.

Electric luggage

compartment cover

Principle

The electric luggage compartment cover opens

and closes automatically with the tailgate. For

stowing bulky items or luggage, the luggage

compartment cover can be lowered under the

luggage compartment floor.

5. Press the luggage compartment floor down

and close the side storage compartment on

the left.

General

Objects in the movement range are detected.

The luggage compartment cover stops auto-

matically to prevent damage.

With a third-row seating

1. Open the side storage compartment on the

left.

2. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.

Safety information

3. Set down the left side of the luggage com-

partment cover and lower the right side.

WARNING

Make sure that the luggage compartment

cover is positioned correctly in the right-

hand bracket.

Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-

ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can

be thrown around the interior while driving,

e.g. in the event of an accident, or when

braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.

There is a danger of injury. Secure devices

connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose

objects.

WARNING

Parts of the body may be trapped by the

electric luggage compartment cover. The lug-

gage compartment cover may be damaged

by objects in the movement range. There is a

danger of injury or material damage. When

opening and closing, make sure that the

movement range of the electric luggage com-

partment cover is kept clear. When lowering,

also make sure that the movement range of

4. Press the luggage compartment floor down

and close the side storage compartment on

the left.

Inserting the luggage compartment

cover

Hold the cover horizontally and slide it for-

wards and into the two side holders. Make

333

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

the cover flap in the luggage compartment

floor is kept clear.

Buttons in the vehicle

NOTICE

Objects on the cover can cause damage.

There is a risk of material damage. Do not

place any objects on the luggage compart-

ment cover.

The luggage compartment cover buttons are

located on the left-hand side of the luggage

compartment.

NOTICE

Operating the electric luggage compartment

cover by hand can damage the cover. There

is a risk of material damage. Use the buttons

in the luggage compartment for operation.

Switch between automatic and base

position.

Lower or raise the luggage compart-

ment cover.

Overview

Luggage compartment cover positions

Opening the luggage compartment

cover

When the tailgate is opened, the luggage com-

partment cover is opened as far as the auto-

matic position.

To open the luggage compartment cover all

the way to the base position:

Press the key.

▷

Automatic position, arrow 1.

Base position, arrow 2.

Closing the luggage compartment

cover

Press the key.

The luggage compartment cover is closed as

far as the automatic position.

When closing the tailgate, the luggage com-

partment cover is closed completely.

334

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

The luggage compartment cover is not closed

automatically if it is in the base position when

closing the tailgate.

To restore functionality, close the luggage

compartment cover by hand, arrow 1, until it

engages in the mount, arrow 2.

▷

An ambient temperature that is too high

or too low can cause the luggage com-

partment cover to switch off. The function

will be restored when the temperature is

brought back to within the normal range,

for example by switching on the air condi-

tioning.

Lowering the luggage compartment

cover

The luggage compartment cover can be low-

ered for stowing bulky luggage.

Press the key.

If the system can no longer detect the posi-

tion of the luggage compartment cover, the

function will be deactivated. Initialisation is

required.

The luggage compartment cover is lowered

under the luggage compartment floor.

Raising the luggage compartment

cover

Initialising

▷

Press the key.

Operating requirements

The luggage compartment cover is

raised to the base position.

▷

Vehicle is standing on level ground.

Drive-ready state is activated.

▷

Press the key.

The movement range of the luggage com-

partment cover is kept clear.

The luggage compartment cover

is raised to the base position and

closes as far as the automatic position.

▷

Outside temperature is above 5 ℃, 41 ℉.

Initialising the system

Press and hold the button until initiali-

Malfunctions

▷

If the closing force exceeds a certain level

when closing the luggage compartment

cover, for example due to objects in the

movement range, the cover will disengage

from the mount. The luggage compartment

cover comes to a stop in the guide rail.

sation is complete.

The luggage compartment cover moves to var-

ious positions. Initialisation is complete when a

signal sounds.

If the button is released too soon, the lug-

gage compartment cover stops. Initialisation

has been cancelled.

Press and hold the button to restart the initiali-

sation.

335

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

With the rear seat backrest upright

1. Remove or lower the luggage compartment

cover.

Luggage compartment

partition net

2. Fold up the rear cover caps on the roof

frame at the top until they lock into place.

General

The luggage compartment partition net can be

installed in two different positions in the vehi-

cle.

With the rear seat backrest folded

down

1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.

To enlarge the luggage compartment, see

page 329.

3. Insert both upper fastening pins of the lug-

gage compartment partition net into the

holders as far as they will go, arrow 1, and

slide forwards.

2. Fold up the front cover caps on the roof

frame at the top until they lock into place.

3. Insert both upper fastening pins of the lug-

gage compartment partition net into the

holders as far as they will go, arrow 1, and

slide forwards.

4. Hook the two lower hooks of the luggage

compartment partition net into the two eyes

on the rear seat backrest, arrows 2.

Stowing the partition net

General

The luggage compartment partition net can be

stowed under the luggage compartment floor.

To stow the luggage compartment cover and

the luggage compartment partition net to-

gether, the luggage compartment partition net

must be stowed in the rear position first.

4. Hook the two lower hooks of the luggage

compartment partition net into the two eyes

on the folded-down rear seat backrest, ar-

rows 2. The rear seat backrests may need

to be raised a little to do this.

336

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

OwnersManuals2.com

Luggage compartment

CONTROLS

5. Store the luggage compartment partition

net in the recess. The mounting points

must point downwards.

Without a third-row seating

1. Remove the luggage compartment partition

net.

2. Roll up the luggage compartment partition

net and fasten with the Velcro strap.

3. Remove the trim panel on the left-hand

side.

4. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.

5. Store the luggage compartment partition

net in the recess. The mounting points

must point downwards.

6. Lower one retaining strap to the left, ar-

row 1, and lay the second retaining strap

in the recess towards the front, arrow 2.

6. Press the luggage compartment floor

downwards.

7. Insert the trim on the left-hand side.

7. Press the luggage compartment floor

downwards.

8. Insert the trim on the left-hand side.

With a third-row seating

1. Remove the luggage compartment partition

net.

2. Roll up the luggage compartment partition

net and fasten with the Velcro strap.

3. Remove the trim panel on the left-hand

side

4. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.

337

OwnersManuals2.com

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23

CONTROLS for Your BMW X5 SUV 2024

Related Topics

QUICK REFERENCE

DRIVING HINTS

MOBILITY

Care

REFERENCE